Page 1
ܓܘ
※
※
3
7 Σ
影
※
※※※※※
UNIVE
OF Cl
REV
APRIL & OC
UNIVERSITY
PERAD CEY
Vol. XOKK Nos. 1 & 2 签
 

鰲※※※※※※※※※※ స్త్రి
*
RSITY EYLON :
TOBER 1964
※
OR CEY LON
ENYA ※ ON
Rs... 5-6)
懿

Page 2
Ets
E E FERNANDO
| J. F. LABRooY
Goon EWARDENA
April & O
CONTI
The Play and its Poetry-Reflections
Shakespeare Criticism by Ashley Halpé a
Siya-Bas-Lakara and a Theory of S
by G. Wijayawardhana
The Buddhist Conception of Mahab
Elements of Matter by Y. Karunadasa
Simhalaye Abhāva-vācaka No Nipāti
by Ananda Kulasuriya
An Index Guide to a Language Studi or the Vocabulary of Law as it Ex of the Kandyan Kingdom by D. E. Hettiaratchi
The British Government and the Ind
by D. P. Sinha
The Port-Capital City of Colombo:
by B. L. Panditaratna
Book Reviews as a
UNIVERSITY OF
The University of Ceylon was establishedo Medical College (founded 1870) and the Ceyl at present the Faculties of Oriental Studie Agriculture and Veterinary Science. The Un of Ceylon the publication of the Ceylon Jour its chief means of contact with Scientists elsew of Medical Science. The University of Ceylon contact with scholars in literary subjects, to pr in those subjects conducted in the Univers Ceylon. The Review is published twice a welcome. Correspondence regarding excha University of Ceylon, Peradeniya. The ar copy Rs. 2.50, post free.

Manager THE LIBRARIAN
UNIVERSITY OF CEYLON
ctober 1964
* ENTS
PAGE on Some Modern
a
uggestion
2)
hutas as Primary
as a 28
ya with a Summary in English
a ര ♔ 48
of the Niti-Nighanduva
isted in the Last Days
a 87
ian States (1857-62)
s IOS
A Geographical Interpretation
e * * e. I35
S o a I6o
CEYLON REVIEW
in the 1st July, 1942, by the fusion of the Ceylon on University College (founded 1921). It has is, Arts, Science, Engineering, Medicine, and versity has taken over from the Government nal of Science, which has been developed as here and has also started the Ceylon Journal Review was founded in order to make similar Ovide a medium of publication for the research ity, and to provide a learned review for year, in April, and October. Exchanges are nges should be addressed to the Librarian, inual subscription is Rs. 5.00, and a single

Page 3
University of (
拿 V. XXIII, No. I & 2
The Play and its Po Some /Modern Sha.
I
AT one point in Principles of Shak Knight says with perhaps justifiab
" I do not stop at every 1 Macbeth and Lear were in that I am ignorant of th
1 .in doubt of it ܕ ܢܝ .
量he teacher of Shakespeare in Ceylon His students rarely have the opportun performance, and his work, therefore theatrical experience. He is not unav pre-occupation with theatrical techi " deeper meanings' of the plays.2 theatre in his students, for he knows t and that its form and content cannot of the theatrical experience. And it is Shakespeare criticism, seeking to exte) of exposure to the plays'.3
When modern Shakespeare criti mind it turns out to be rich in insight, to be curiously flawed by the acting
1. Principles of Shakespearian Production (1936)
2. The Wheel of Fire (1930) p. vi. 3. L. C. Knights-Some Shakespearean Themes
I

பட்ட
Ceylon Review
April 8 October 1964
Petry - Reflections OI) kespeare Criticism
espearian Production, Professor Wilson le irritation :
moment to observe that heant to be acted. Not is: but that I was never
is denied the luxury of this position. ity of seeing a Shakespeare play in ', includes the task of suggesting the ware that, as Professor Knight warns, lique could distract him from the But he wishes to develop a sense of hat the life of a play is in the theatre, pe wholly understood except in terms ; with this in mind that he approaches ind his own and his students' "degree
cism is approached in this frame of subtle, fertilizing. But it also appears out of a historical process-one of
p. 27.
(1959), p. 13.

Page 4
UNIVERSITY OF
compensation. The sense of correct in the work of the founding fathers
" I make no apology f '' the modern critic, of this partiality of oi beyond it.'s
' A Shakespeare play not a collection of aut "There are two acce posed attitudes toward what I shall endeavou attitudes are identical, is possible. . . . I believ a point at which a revol take place.'
Well, a revolution has taken place i been briefly described by Professor I
ow 1 time
and also that
the essential structur sought in the poetry easily extractable elen
99
racter'. ... 's
'Whereas in the olde the god-like creator C jecting-it is true-his habitants, but remaini of their passions, he i immediately engaged before us.'9
The Wheel of Fire, p. 5.
D. A. Traversi-An Approach to Shakespe L. C. Knights-Hou Many Children Had T. S. Eliot-' Four Elizabethan Dramatis L. C. Knights-Some Shakespearean Then

CEYLON REVIEW
ng an unfortunate bias is clearly present of this criticism :
ஒரு r restoring balance, aving become conscious tlook, is bound to look
is a dramatic poem and biographies...' sted and apparently opElizabethan drama, and ir to show is that these and that another attitude : the theatre has reached ution in principles should
in Criticism, at any rate; its nature L. C. Knights when he says that in our
te of the plays has been rather than in the more ༽ lents of plot and cha
1 VieW Shakespeare W2S f a peopled World, proown spirit into the inng essentially the analyst now felt as much more in the action he puts
are (1958), p. 3.
Lady Macbeth? (1933). so (1924) in Selected Essays (3rd Ed. 1956) p. 109. es, p. 13.

Page 5
ܢܓ
ܪ
THE PLAY AND
It is with the first of these tendenc can hardly wish to see plot and char significance they had in the work of Hamlet "being treated in Harley Stree the less important element of storyanalysis on the analogy of human life, word or two about 'the magic of po But it does seem as if the tendency in q imbalance-an imbalance illustrated by
II
Professor Wilson Knight writes th expanded metaphor, 11 and that "there correspondences which relate to each sequence which is the story'. 12 App
- s one swift act of the poet's mind'.13
powering knowledge of suffocating,
basilisk eye of a nameless terror'.14
where all is befogged, baffled, constrict
This view of Shakespeare's vision in at least one set of interpretations th: the persons of the play are described as of evil in and outside themselves. T finds no place.'16 Macbeth, Banquo, cription is applied to all of them.17 loss, and has little idea as to why he is to fit names to his reasons-ambition name." 18 Again, "Macbeth may strug more resist than a rabbit resists a weas bird the serpent's transfixing eye."19
10. G. Wilson Knight-The Wheel of Fire. p. 13. 11. Ibid, p. 15.
12. Ibid, p. 3.
13. Ibid, p. 141.
14. Ibid, p. 140.
15. Ibid, p. 141.
16. Ibid, p. 152.
17. Ibid, pp. 150-52.
18. Ibid, p. 121.
19. Ibid, p. 153.

ITS POETRY
ies that I am here concerned. One acter restored to anything like the the pre-revolutionary critics, with t” and "Part of the play-and that -(torn) out ruthlessly for detailed the rest being dismissed "with a etry or 'the breath of genius.' "10 uestion has made for a new critical the following examples.
hat we should 'see each play as an } are throughout each play a set of
other independently of the timeroaching Macbeth thus, he finds it We are, he says, "left with an overconquering evil, and fixed by the It is "a desolate and dark universe
sd by the evil'.15
of evil as expressed in Macbeth issues at one is impelled to question. All "men paralysed by fear and a sense hey lack will-power; that concept , Macduff and Malcolm: the desMacbeth "himself is hopelessly at a going to murder Duncan. He tries l, for instance-but this is only a gle, but he cannot fight: he can no sel’s teeth fastened in its neck, or a

Page 6
UNIVERSITY OF
One can but go back to what is not absent. When Macbeth us question of his having little idea as or of his casting about for names to a recognition that his reason—ambil
“. . . . . . . . . . . . I To prick the sides of 1 Vaulting ambition, w And falls on th' other.
And the recognition leads him to a
"We will proceed no
The will is strong:
" Prithee, peace. I dare do all that may Who dares do more is
He is definite about what he does want to do. His resolution is then than his, and by a trick which conf into the course of action that he has affects us here as evil incarnate, we struggle but a battle fought and admire the weasel thus:
"Bring forth men-ch For thy undaunted m Nothing but males.'2.
That is a movement of a distinctly and sinful: “I am settled.'25. It i clear change in Macbeth produced
is persuaded, not mesmerised.26
20. Act I, SC. vii, lines 25-28. (This anc
London Shakespeare (1958).
21. Ibid. line 31. 22. Ibid, lines 45-47. 23. Ibid, e.g. lines 49–59. 24. Ibid, lines 73-75. 25. Ibid, line 80. 26. Ibid, lines 59-73.

CEYLON REVIEW
happens in Macbeth. The will-concept es the word “ambition“ there is no Zo why he is going to murder Duncan, fit his reasons. The context embodies ion-is too small a motive
LaVe nO spur
ny intent, but only
nich oerleapsitself
59
20
definite act of will:
further in this business.'21
become a man:
39 ; 1ղՕ1ղe. 22
not want to be, and what he does not overmastered by a will more powerful uses his moral sense-he is shamed back just repudiated.23 Even if Lady Macbeth : have to recognize here not a fruitless lost. The cornered rabbit would not
ildren only
ettle should compose
human consciousness-free, mistaken, s to be noted that after the slight but by Lady Macbeth's great outburst, he
all subsequent references to the play are from The
t

Page 7
THE PLAY AND
Shakespeare's presentation of Ma Knight much more obviously. Macd or a sense of evil. He does not
refuses Macbeth's "great bidding' w
takes it on himself to go to England st d he ' share some guilt of the There is no question of a ` cruel des been clearly informed through the sp that Macduff has gone to England:
“ . . . . to pray the holy ki To wake Northumberlar the enterprise being seconded by the p "........................... with To ratify the work,'33
and
"....Some holy angel Fly to the court of Engla His message ere he come May soon return to this oi Under a hand accursed' and
"I'll send my prayers wi
Ater this, we have to find Lady Macd though it is logical and effective in its a clearer view in terms of the larger di Macduff's function and character does "some guilt of the down-pressing enve
".... Sinful Macduff,
They were all struck for Not for their own demer Fell slaughter on their sol
27. Act II, sc. iv, lines 35-36. 28. Act III, sc. v, lines 128-29, and III, vi, nes 29. Act III, sc. vi, lines 24-30. 30. The Wheel of Fire, p. 151.
31. Ibid.
32. Act III, sc. vi, lines 30-31. 33. Ibid, lines 32-33.
34. Ibid, lines 45-49.
35. Ibid, line 49. 36. Act IV, sc. iii. lines 224-227.

ITS POETRY
duff is misrepresented by Professor uff is certainly not paralysed by fear go to Macbeth's coronation;27 he ith “ an absolute “ Sir, not I” ”;28 he eking succour for Scotland.29 Nor down-pressing enveloping evil.'30 ertion of his family'31 for we have zech of the unnamed Lord in III, vi
ng, upon his aid d and Warlike Siward.”32 rayers of the Lord, and Lennox
him above,
nd and unfold , that a swift blessing
ur suffering country 34
th him.’35
uff's view of the matter mistaken; particular dramatic context, we have tamatic context. Our total sense of not permit us to see him as sharing loping evil' merely because he says
thee Naught that I am, its, but for mine,
ulls. ”36
39-40.

Page 8
UNIVERSITY OF
The reaction is, rather, thoroughly a. loving attribution of Superior mc interpreted in the context as a recog killed in his stead. Macbeth, we live,"37 and baulked, had come to til
"The castle of Macdu Seize upon Fife: give His wife, his babes,' ( It is only in this sense that Macdu for his dear ones' death.' 39 Sinc moral inadequacy in Macduff, neit taken as indications that he, too, is cumb to the evil downpressing on t
It is obvious that no interpreta extraordinarily vivid presence of quality.'41 But the evil is not so it so compulsive as to validate Prof.
To see a play as an expanded in Professor Knight's wish to arrive scattered correspondences throught one way of seeking its essential s Knight sees correspondences in Ma he perceives does not seem to be q can perhaps be argued that the err validate the critic's approach comp principal drive of Professor Knigh system of checks and balances if it his criticism. We must agree that
" It is, probably, the a larger areas of a great tinual widening ofvis ciate it more deeply, more surely, on ever
37. Act IV, sc. i, line 84. 38. Ibid, lines 150-152. 39. The Wheel of Fire, p. 151 40. Ibid, p. 150. 41. Ibid, p. 3. 42. Ibid, p. 4.

CEYLON REVIEW
human and even admirable, suggesting arits to the dead ones. It can also be gnition by Macduff that his family was know, had decided ' Thou shalt not
he new decision all
ܕ ܐ .
If I will surprise.. to the edge of the Sword etc.).38 f"knows he bears some responsibility e there has been no dramatization of her this feeling nor his actions can be one of the major characters who 'suche Macbeth universe.'40
tion of Macbeth can fail to recognize the evil in the play as part of its "unique ervasive as to include Macduff, nor is essor Knight's view of Macbeth.
metaphor is to see it as a poetic unit, and at a simultaneous awareness of thicklyhis way of looking at a play is of course tructure in the poetry. But Professor cbeth which do not exist, and the unity uite that designed by Shakespeare. It ors referred to are too particular to inletely. But it is at least clear that the t’s criticism needs to be controlled by a s not to lead to a definite imbalance in
bility to see larger and still work spatially with a conion that causes us to appreto own it with our minds
reading.'42
-

Page 9
THE PLAY AN
But " to see the whole play laid out view it from too far above, and we aspects of the structure. Professor against our sense of dramatically imp inflict within Macbeth before the C hich lead to his crimes. Again, the single speech that is related "spatially is not consonant with the total effect
Mr. D. A. Traversi also Seeks til plays in the poetry. His method, h
| cf Professor Wilson Knight. He des.
"To proceed from the verse setting, and thenc pattern of interdepende woven into the dramati illuminating it, is the n the most accurate, and,
least subject to preju
art.’44
We see this process at work whe ment by pointing out that "Duncan's th: images of beauty and fertility w sustance and consistency upon the 's *" te quality of his poetry is above : fiant misdirections occur when Mr. nes of certain images to the structure
"The early, light-dren gedy are dominated by ship between service sp abundant royal bounty.
Ibid, p. 3. Traversi-An approach to Shakespeare, (2nd
Ibid, p. 151. Ibid, pp. 152-3.

D ITS POETRY
, so to speak, as an area'43 we may may thus miss or misvalue essential Knight's view of Macbeth works ortant effects, such as the tension and risis is reached, and the acts of will evaluation of Macduff in terms of a '' to certain other things in the play of Macduff's character and conduct.
le essential structure of Shakespeares wever, is a little different from that ribes it thus:
word to the image in its 2 to the way in which a bnt themes is gradually c action, unifying it and 1ost fruitful approachif properly handled the dice-to Shakespeare's
in Mr. Traversi begins a line of argufunction in the play emerges.... from hich surround his person and confer ymbolic value of his rule," and that ull, life-giving, fertile”.+5 But signiTraversi relates this sensitive awareof the play. He writes:
ched scenes of the trathis rich, vital relation
ontaneously given and '46
ed), pp. 4-5.

Page 10
UNIVERSITY OF
One is willing to concede that the rel to scenes i, iii and v, though it seen more specific. But this comment when its application is limited to Sce the relevance of the term "light-dren as in any possible metaphorical sense cable to scene iv, since a royal Court W colour and light. It is literally inap is of people arriving with torches, of It may or may not be applicable to
are given, though we must give due
foul and fair;47 that no camp, even a and that drenching light would be characterized by anxious expectatio
of blood, and long descriptions of da
If scene ii exhibits the characte phorical sense of 'light-drenched' v. most suitably be applied to scene iv. and bounty are abundantly demonst occur;50 even the worthy death of th sion. But even in this scene, the e impact is strong in the patent dramat
“Dитсат: . . . . . . . . . . . . To find the mind's con He was a gentleman ol An absolute trust.
Enter Macbeth O worth The sin of my ingratiti Was heavy on me....
This irony necessarily colours our ro with its "repeated protestations of
47. It is the Same day, since the battle is end appear, and which is described by Macbeth
48. e.g. lines 7-23, 25-33, 35-43, 50-59. 49. e. g. I, iv, lines 14—21, 27.—32. 50. Ibid.
51. Ibid, lines 11-16. 52. Ibid, lines 22-27.

CEYLON REVIEW
erence is to scenes ii., iv and vi and not is odd that Mr. Traversi has not been is not completely satisfactory even nes ii, iv and vi. First, let us examine . ched,” taken in its literal sense as well }. The term would be literally applirould give an impression of movement, plicable to scene vi, where the effect light penetrating the darkness of night. scene ii, where no specific indications weight to the facts that the day is both royal one, would be drenched in light, : somewhat inappropriate in a scene in, physical and metaphysical images rkly ferocious combat.48
ristics just referred to, then no metVould fit it either. The metaphor can Here Duncan's goodness, innocence trated:49 images of beauty and fertility he traitor Cawdor adds to this impresvil of Macbeth is a felt presence. ts sic irony of
| 4
....There's no art 1struction in the face.
whon I built
, δ C. iest cousin ude even now
s
51
2ception of Macbeth's speech in rely, devotion'.52 Finally, after we hve
2d 'ere the set of sun', as that on which the withes
as “Foul and fair”. (I, iii.)

Page 11
THE PLAY AN)
seen Duncan's bountifulness to Mac than all can pay' and "I have begui make thee full of growing'-we rea Macbeth's hypocrisy- The rest is la t dhe decisiveness which reveals tha
"....Stars, hide your fi Let not light see my blac The eye wink at the han Which the eye fears, whe
In scene vi the light, metaphorica briefly. Images and associations of f in life,'55 are richly active in the spe we cannot possibly shut of the reverb our consciousness, 56 and the feelings the castle are received with an effect evil that threatens Duncan from with appears, we cannot but see her protest.
"....To beguile the tim
Look like the time; bear
Your hand, your tongue But be the serpent under
We could now examine the staten by the rich, vital relationship betwe abundant royal bounty'. It does not has just been discussed. There is cert in Lady Macbeth's speech of welcome the more we are repelled by her hypoc ness of the rejection of that relations The most we can say is that we are ter
53. Ibid, line. 44.
54. Ibid, lines 50-53.
55. L. C. Knights, Some Shakespearean Themes,
56. i.e. the impression made on us by Lady N murdering ministers,' the decision to kill I
(I. v.)
57. Act I, sc. v., lines 61-64. 58. e.g. lines 14-19, lines 25-28.

D ITS POETRY
peth-" More is thy due than more n to plant thee, and will labour To ct with a quick sense of outrage to bour which is not used for you-'53 the has been completely untouched:
eS. ck and deep desires; d; yet let that be
an it is done, to see.'54
lly speaking, flashes out strongly but ertility, holiness; of "life delighting eches of Duncan and Banquo. But berations of the preceding scene from inspired in Duncan and Banquo by of awful irony by us who know the in it. Further, when Lady Macbeth ations of devotion as an acting out of
LC,
welcome in your eye,
:: look like th' innocent flower, it. '57
nent that these scenes are 'dominated en service spontaneously given and hold true of scene vi-the scene that ainly a reference to that relationship .58 But the more she talks about it, risy, and impressed by the unnaturalhip by herself and by her husband. sely aware both of what ought to be
p. 136.
Eacbeth's awful resolution, her invocation to “the Duncan, the advice to Macbeth to act deceitfully.

Page 12
UNIVERSITY OF
and what is; of the proper relation our total response to this scene, thes other impressions, as of the irony
attractiveness, and the fatal craft of
It must be agreed that Scene iv proper relationship between loyal se
But scene ii? We know that a loyal service in fighting rebellion that Duncan rewards Macbeth-' W But the scene is hardly dominated b bounty. It is dominated, rather, b of conflict, and the characterizatio itself makes much of Macbeth's mai
ferocity) rather than of his loyalty.6
We have to conclude that Mr. cable to scene iv, and largely inappli
Associated with these misdire that the state
“has been, under Dun
orderly.'61
We cannot learn this from the pla good and bountiful, and we hear that We know nothing about Scotland 1 beginning of the play there are repo
If Mr. Traversi's description of by the play, and if he exaggerates t the dramatic function of Duncan in
both of the play's meaning and of
59. line. 68. 60. e.g. lines 15-23, 35-42, 56-59. 61. An approach to Shakespeare, p. 152. 62. Act I, sc. vii, line 18.
63. It is worth remembering that Act and sc not figure in the theatrical experience.

CEYLON REVIEW
ship and of its rejection. Besides, in e awarenesses are subordinate to certain and pathos of Duncan's situation, his Lady Macbeth.
. is dominated by the expression of the rvice and royal bounty.
Macbeth and Banquo are performing and foreign invasion. We know, too, With his former title greet Macbeth."59 y the relationship between service and y suggestions of anxiety, long reports in of Macbeth. This characterization
tial pro Wess (suggesting even excessive
Traversi's comments are largely applicable to scenes ii and vi.
ctions is another. Mr. Traversi SayS
can, positive, natural and
y itself. We see only that Duncan is he has been 'clear in his great office'.62 under Duncan's rule except that at the rts of rebellion and invasion.
the state under Duncan is not supported he relative importance of one aspect of 'Act I’03 of Macbeth, then his account a part of its structure is somewhat in
ene divisions are mere conveniences, and that they do
V
గ

Page 13
THE PLAY AN
accurate. We have at least to conc method "properly". And yet Mr. certain words and images prominentl The point is that other aspects of the in terms of situation and action. M.
ough attention to these elements ( of Macbeth.
And more is involved than the Traversi's approach through the wo particular view of the Shakespearean
** The tragedies of Shak Macbeth onwards, are sistent development oft which that play first an ism, which derives orig of the function of the matic scheme, leads lo ception of plot.'04
"Shakespeare's power drama is now such th simply an extension,
poetry. His expressio not only verbal richn even simply deep insig and the sources of mor of 'symbolic incident
The essence, in short, o lism lies in the fact th poetry as an extension
Surely, it is possible to give a differe dramatist finds more and more organ experience, and sense of form, such the various components of poetic closeness 2 There is then no need
64. An approach to Shakespeare, p. 181. 65. Ibid, p. 290.

D ITS POETRY
lude that he has not handled his own Traversi has responded sensitively to y associated with the figure of Duncan. significance of Duncan are developed r. Traversi does not seem to have paid of the play in the analysis of this part
2 analysis of a part of Macbeth. Mr. irds and images is closely related to a
creative process. He writes that
respeare's maturity, from characterized by a conhe dramatic symbolism' ticipated. This symbolinally from an extension poetiç image in the draogically to a new con
of writing poetry and at the plot has become an extra vehicle of the in has come to require ess and complexity, not ght into human motives 'al impulse, but this type as part of his purpose. . f Shakespearean "symbohat it springs out of the of the written word.'65
snt account-to say that the maturing ically unified expressions for his vision, that incident, imagery, and indeed all drama are inter-related with peculiar to give a peculiar importance to the

Page 14
UNIVERSITY OF
'extension of the function of the pc and to argue that "the plot has be vehicle of the poetry,” or that 'the's as an extension of the written word which came first, the plot or the poet in the plays as we have them these : close harmony. Besides, when Wor lated to other aspects of the exper structure and meaning can occur, as y
It is thus important to pay attenti of meaning of a Shakespeare play as t
* But it is only in rela embracing meaning-d sense of what is said, a the dramatic situation : action, by symbols and rent attitudes embodied of the drama-it is only meaning that the imag ponent that may be mo on its full significance.”
This account of the whole structure Professor Knights's view of the essent of a Shakespeare play is poetic'.67 the terms 'poetry” and "poetic' in t Macbeth's aside 'this supernatural of the body—the very feel-of the e to such things as the sickening see-se good...') changing to the rhythm c of grammar as thought is revealed i so on. Also, 'the words do not on
66. L. C. Knights, Some Shakespearean Themes
67. L. C. Knights, Pelican History of English Li See also Some Shakespearean Themes, p. 12

CEYLON REVIEW
etic image in the dramatic scheme,” come simply an extension, an extra ymbolism'..springs out of the poetry . It is logically impossible to know
und other elements work together in ds and images are not adequately reence, misinterpretations of incident, we have had occasion to notice.
ry; the symbolism or the poetry; and
V
on to such an account of the structure his, by Professor L. C. Knights:
ation to that larger alletermined by the plain und by its overtones, by and the progress of the by the interplay of diffein the different persons in relation to this total ery, orany other Com
mentarily isolated, takes 66
of meaning is, however, qualified by ial structure 'The essential structure Professor Knights clarifies his use of his context. He points out that with soliciting” (etc.) “ Our recognition Xperience, is a response to the poetry, w rhythm (Cannot be ill; cannot be if the pounding heart, the overriding in the very process of formation, and ly point inward to the presumed state
, p. 19.
erature, Vol. 2, p. 229. .
~

Page 15
THE PLAY AN
of Macbeth's mind, but, as it were, o "major themes of the play... are mi tion.' And, 'the interrelations we . speeches of the protagonists to the pc
It is beyond question that all thes are to be found in the 'dense verbal it still does not follow that the esse poetry. If it did, one would have t play.. emerge as themes because the action and symbolism-again and a do not 'emerge' in quite this way. for example, the development of the --one of the themes noted by Profess
In the first scene of the play bot us mainly through the non-verbal el and lightning are natural phenom into an abnormal and dehumanizing ciated with a bare, undefined place. given direction by the appearance o I be unnatural in appearance, and who We take our bearings here from sett do not in themselves connote evil. Graymalkin take their force from the
The associations thus called up are reinforced by their account of th appearance on Macbeth and Banquo change from "How far ist called t The “poetry supports the effect by the quick questions, that Banquo is moral effect of the witches' prophec as an action, which is described by B
68. Some Shakespearan. Themes, pp. 120-121. 69. Pelican History, (etc.), p. 230. 70. Some Shakespearean Themes, p. 121. 71. Ibid.
72. Act I, sc. iii. line 39.

D ITS POETRY
tward to the play as a whole.” For, rored in the speech under considerare forced to make take us outside the etry of the play as a whole.”68
effects described by Professor Knights texture of the greater plays.'69 But ntial structure is to be sought in the agree that "the major themes of the 7 are what the poetry-reinforced by gain insists on'.70 But the themes This becomes clear when one considers, theme of 'the unnaturalness of evil' or Knights.71
h the unnaturalness and the evil reach ements of poésie de théâtre. Thunder ena, but they shake human beings state of fear, especially when assoThe associations thus called up are f the witches, who must necessarily must act and speak as evil creatures. ing and acting, for the words spoken Even the references to Paddock and characters of the speakers.
recur when the witches reappear and eir activities. The first effect of their is an action, suggested by the sudden D Forres 2' to 'what are these...?'72 Suggesting, through the tense rhythm, more than ordinarily startled. The
es on Macbeth, too, is first registered anquo in:

Page 16
UNIVERSITY OF
* Good Sir, why do you Things that do sound so
This reaction to good tidings is unna in us the first suspicion that the 'fai for Macbeth.
Macbeth continues to be unnat underlined for us by the use of aside, feelings from the others present. Th the first time in "against the use of thoughts are turning to unnatural ev. poetry of the aside "This supernatu elucidated by Professor Knights and ot in Macbeth increases, so much so that abstraction, and it reaches us as much the words spoken. Its questionable 1 invents a lying explanation for his pre
The theme of the unnaturalness dramatic situation created is the nex irony of
" He was a gentleman C
An absolute trust.
Enter Macbeth,
O worthie
Macbeth's reply, with its protestation from the situation. And it is prim; and bountifulness rather than the terr make us react with a quick sense of " The rest is labour which is not us which reveals that he has been comp fires” (etc.) The terms of the expr through the associations called up by
73. Ibid, lines 51-52. 74. Ibid, line 137.
75. Ibid, lines 130-142. 76. Ibid, lines 149-150.

CEYLON REVIEW
1 start and seem to fear
fair '73
tural, and being unnatural, it arouses t" tidings have a "foul" significance
urally disturbed, a fact dramatically suggesting that he wishes to hide his e unnaturalness is now verbalized for nature, '74 our sense that Macbeth's il being powerfully reinforced by the ural Soliciting”75 (etc.) so sensitively hers. The effect of secret disturbance the other characters notice his "rapt" from the action and situation as from nature is emphasized when Macbeth :-occupation.76
of evil is strongly sounded in the t scene. There is first the dramatic
in whom I built
(etc.) est cousin !" (etc.)
is of devotion takes its colour entirely arily the facts of Duncan's gratitude ns in which they are expressed which outrage to Macbeth's hypocrisy, e.g. ed for you, and to the decisiveness letely untouched: "Stars, hide your ession strengthen our response, e.g. lines like:

Page 17
THE PLAY ANI
" I have begun to plant
To make thee full of grc
"Signs of nobleness, like On all deservers.'78
'...... Stars hide your fir
Let not light see my blac
In the scenes that follow the them from a complex of interrelated elen shalt bef What thou art promised'80 Under my battlements, 81 indicates : which is not natural when the opport with the awful suggestiveness of Lady ing ministers'.82 The situational iror within which evil and danger awaith welcome,83 work along with the effe his speeches and in the speech of Ban Wrongness of the proposed murder er to the decision "We will proceed 1 nature revolts against the evil.85 This in terms which embody and enrich it:
“...heaven's cherubin ho Upon the sightless Couri Shall blow the horrid de That tears shall drown th
When Macbeth 'sees the air-drawn of the fact, of his actions, and of his me are synthesized into a theatrical situati a state of abnormal disturbance.87 m
77. Act. I, sc. iv, lines 28—29. 78. Ibid, lines 41-42. 79. Ibid, lines 50-51. 80. Act. I, sc. v., lines 13-14. 81. Ibid, lines 37-38. 82. Ibid, lines 39-52. 83. Act. I, sc. vi.
84. Ibid. 85. Act. I, SC. vii, lines 18-25. 86. Ibid, lines 22-25. 87. Act. II, sc. i, lines 33—49.
 

D ITS POETRY
thee, and will labour wing.'77 : stars, shall shine
CS, sk and deep desires."79
e of the unnaturalness of evil emerges nents. The "plain sense' of "and and 'the fatal entrance of Duncan/ promptness at seizing opportunity inity is for evil. This works closely Macbeth's invocation to the 'murderlies of Duncan's praise for the castle im, and of the hypocritical show of ct of the rich associations present in quo. 84 The fact that a sense of the upts in the murderer himself, leading no further,’ indicates that his own movement of the psyche is expressed
C.g-
rsed ers of the air, ed in every eye, he wind.'86
dagger, the text is a simple record ntal reactions. When those elements on they create a picture of a man in mediately after the murder, Macbeth
S

Page 18
UNIVERSITY OF
appears in a state of shock, exciteme in the fact that he dwells as if mesm two grooms "did wake each other,' itself with the praise of sleep.89 At implications which extend our consc
“But wherefore could and
G. G. G.
Macbeth does mur
sleep; Sleep that knits up the
It would seem to be clear that “emerges from a close-knit con dependence of elements in a mature that the themes would be clearly rei other element of the experience. It and indeed 'the play's philosophy follow from this that the 'themes. what poetry-re-inforced by actic insists on." Rather, when the expel emerge as themes because action, gether, repeatedly insist on them.
Similarly, the essential structure is at points it depends on the poetry. ponse to “This supernatural soliciti the spirits, or to Macbeth's great spe to the poetry, to 'organic compon are certainly important parts of the essential parts of the structure which on the poetry. The first appearan ironies and contrasts of scenes iv and
dagger before the murder and his
88. Act. II, sc. iii, lines 22—33. 89. Ibid., lines 36-40.
90. Ibid, line 31.
91. Ibid, lines 35-40. 92. L. C. Knights, Some Shakespearean Them 93. Pelican History (etc.), p. 231.

CEYLON REVIEW
int, and horror, His state is manifested herized on the little incident where the 8 and in the fact that his mind occupies he same time some of the phrases carry 1OuSneSS-e.g.
not I pronounce Amen'?'90
der sleep"—the innocent
ravell'd sleave of care...' (etc.)91
the theme of the unnaturalness of evil nplex of effects. The organic interplay of Shakespeare makes it inevitable Elected in the poetry as much as in any is therefore possible to reach the themes, '92 through the poetry. It does not emerge as themes because they are on and symbolism-again and again tience is viewed as a whole, the themes poetry, symbolism, etc., Working to
inevitably reflected in the “poetry, and
To mention a few examples, our resng', to Lady Macbeth's invocation to :eches in Act V, is primarily a response 2nts of the living verse'.93 And these essential structure. But there are also do not depend for their effect primarily ce of the witches; the telling dramatic vi; Macbeth's vision of the air-drawn disturbance after it; the appearance of
2s, p. 138.
I6
s

Page 19
THE PLAY AND
Banquo's ghost at the banquet and the the murder of Macduff's family;-th. structure. Our response to them is p) and actions which we re-construct from
It is relevant to recognize at this from the words. As Eric Bentley says, not dramatized; '94 or, as Professor Luc
"Without the single unit warp and weft, and thei weaver, there could be in the words no play.'95
The text is the only record we have of matist; and it is particularly true of an E records the whole experience, inclusive action. Thus Dr. B. L. Joseph observe that an Elizabethan dramatist "set a pa
a trained actor who unc
of speaking and punctuat piece of dialogue in the W. runs over a score; the dir( easily followed...'96
and,
"Once a part was set it c in exactly the same was actors; and the available strongly that this was the
In a similar way, the author's attitude t directly recorded in the text. The El himself to implying his attitudes in the is compelled to limit himself. An Eliz.
94. The Playwright As Thinker, (2nd Ed. 1955), p. 95. E. F. C. Ludowyk, Introducing Shakespeare (19 96. B. L. Joseph, The Pelican History of English Li, 97. Ibid.
I7

ITS POETRY
: Consequent disruption of the feast; ese are clearly parts of the essential rimarily a response to the situations
the text.
point that we have always to start
拿 - "A drama not verbalized is a drama lowyk puts it,
is of the threads of the r arrangement by the o carpet, and without
the experience designed by the draElizabethan play that the text usually : of setting, situation, character and as with reference to characterization urt in Such a Way that
ierstood the principles ion could run over a ay in which a musician actions were plain and
ould have been played by any number of }vidence suggests very usual practice.'97
to the actions and situations is often lizabethan dramatist does not limit way in which a 'realistic' dramatist
abethan play
p. 46, 241. 62), p. 76. terature, Vol. 2, p. 157.

Page 20
UNIVERSITY O
" is an imagined sto (the dramatist's) ow wards the persons an ning; not mercly the gined in their minds he imagined theirs.'
And this, as Dr. Joseph points ou soliloquy, apostrophe, and other 'u
It is, therefore, important to in indicates the whole experience. same thing as "the poetry”. If v cription of the way in which the po of those parts of the text where ou achieved by the language itself (wil to qualities of the verse, to assoc by the words and images. It has from Macbeth elsewhere in this essa to other aspects of the experience experience is of a complex of elen dependence. It follows from thi sought through the close analysis drama. To seek the essential struc to seek it in plot, character, or any to do so implies a distorted view C
“ From time to time major sh significant and fruitful of these is t own time... It is in an explicit rc the greater plays that one of the ticism lies. 100 The gain has, inc grateful for the important contrib of Shakespeare's work made by Pro
98. Ibid, p. 148. 99. Ibid, p. 149. 100. L. C. Knights, Pelican History (etc.), pp

F CEYLON REVIEW
ry which also records his n individual reaction toLd situations he Was imagicmotions which he ima, but his own emotions as *
98 །
it, is one of the functions performed by Inrealistic behaviour".99
ote that the text of a play of Shakespeare Clearly, "the text does not mean the ve refer back to Professor Knight's desDetry works it is evident that he is talking ir response would be primarily to effects hether we are conscious of this or not)- iations and inter-relationships suggested smerged from the discussion of examples y that our response is, at times, primarily than the poetry, and that in general our lents working together in organic inters that the essential structure should be of the whole experience, of the whole rture in the poetry is not more valid than other extractable element. The attempt if the dramatic form.
V
hifts of attention occur, and not the least he one that has been taking place in our *Cognition of the dense verbal texture of main services of recent Shakespeare crilecd, been immense, and we have to be utions to our knowledge of this aspect ofessors Wilson Knight and L. C. Knights,
b. 229, 230.
Ι8

Page 21
THE PLAY ANI
and by Mr. Traversi; grateful, too, f nation of poetry's "third voice," for Miss Caroline Spurgeon, Mr. Edward William Empson, and Professor We SReper's Use of the Arts of Languag
But the modern critic's approac
Shakespeare as a totality appears to b functory attention to some aspects ( action, character, and theatrical techr pects of the experience are likely to pi theatre than in the study, and that the to spatial significances is one that can little sense of strain.
It may be necessary to guard ag
which could arise from that last sente the purpose of this essay to suggest qualities of the verse is impossible in that Shakespeare makes extended use in his own time Shakespeare could h audience to be capable of active enjoyr 11 ܝܬ
ܐܠ.
101.
We have to try to develop a similar ce
Nor is there any intention here sets himself against theatrical perform: nineteenth-century bardolators, 103 o1
e.g. Τ. S. Eliot, Poetry and Drama, and The
Caroline Spurgeon-Shakespeare's Imagery a E. A. Armstrong-Shakespeare's Imagination, F. R. Leavis-e.g. Education and the Universi
The Common Pursuit. W. Empson-Seven Types of Ambiguity, (etc Wolfgang H. Clemen–Shakespeares Bilder,
peare's Imagery, (1951). Sr. M. Joseph-Shakespeare's Use of the Arts
e.g. A. Harbage-Shakespeare's Audience, (1S L. C. Knights-Some Shakespearean Themes, e.g. "But the Lear of Shakespeare cannot
p. 185. "But we are exceedingly sceptical as to th Lear's, just as we are in the case of Hamlet (1950), p. 297. "We do not like to see our author's plays
(1903). Vol. I, p. 237. "Poetry and the Stage do not agree well to
 

D ITS POETRY
r Mr. T. S. Eliot's sustained examithe work of such different critics as A. Armstrong, Dr. Leavis, Professors lfgang Clemen; for such works as e, and so on. 101
h to the interpretation of a play of le characterized by a somewhat perof the experience, e.g. to situation, lique. It is significant that these asresent themselves more vividly in the modern approach to the poetry and be pursued purely in the study with
ainst at least two misunderstandings nce. It is not by any means part of that the appreciation of the formal the theatre. The evidence is clear of the arts of language, and also that ave expected the greater part of his ment of rhetoric properly so called. 102 upacity ourselves.
of suggesting that the modern critic ance after the manner of many earlythat he consciously devalues the
Three Voices of Poetry. nd What It Teils Us, (1935).
(1946). fy, pp. 76-82, "Tragedy and the "Medium', in
.).
(1936), translated as The Development of Shakes
of Language, (1947). 41), The Pelican History, Vol. 2, Pt. 2. pp. 19—23.
be acted.'-Lamb, Dramatic Essays, ed. Matthews,
2 power of any actor to represent such a mind as '-Leigh Hunt, Dramatic Criticism, ed. Houtchens
acted.'-Hazlitt, Works, ed. Waller and Glover
gether.” Ibid., VIII, p. 275.
9

Page 22
UNIVERSITY OF
dramatic qualities of the plays. R awareness of the importance of dra
“ The commentator
a WarC, CVCn Wary "This approach does purely dramatic eleme "... the verse... works dramatic action and O rent persons of the dr. develops."106
For all that, an imbalance has speare criticism, and it is directly to structure and meaning. They in a "spatial view. Since neither the living experience of drama in th value in suggesting that the criticis at developing a fine precision of rei be to work for a proper humility b
104. The Wheel of Fire, p. vi. 105. Traversi-An Approach to Shakespeare, p. 106. L. C. Kiaights-Pelican History, 2, p. 231

CEYLON REVIEW
ther, he is at some pains to assert an natic values, e.g.
should be dramatically
'104 not betray or neglect the nt in the plays.'... 105 in conjunction with the ur Sense of what the diffeuma stand for as each play
become perceptible in modern Shakerelated to the modern critic's approach are sought primarily in the poetry, or of these approaches is characteristic of e theatre, there may be some corrective m of drama should ideally be aimed sponse in the theatre. To do so would efore the form chosen by the artist.
ܘ ܠ ܐ
ASHLEY HALPÉ
2O

Page 23
ܢ ܐ
Siya-Bas-Lakara c Sugge
IY4—BAS—LAKARA (SBL) S theory in Sinhalese and compose
well known to be an abridged treatise Kāvyādarda of Dandin. Althc author departs from the original San tances, especially where he is concerne lese language as distinct from the San instance or two, the Sinhalese auth poetic theory by inclusion of fresh Sanskrit text. The remarks in SBL o poetry is one such significant contrit verses dealing with the subject have no
Dandin was not totally oblivious 鄞 poetry. In a few instances he had sense other than the denoted. For ex; quality (guna) named samādhi he rem (vomited), nisthyūta (spat), vānta (vomi are employed in their secondary sens vulgar. In the same way, his explar like sanasokti, paryayokti and aprastut more than one sense in Words.2 Hovi with the subject of words and their n subject of discussion among the later d Hence the comments in SBL on the they are found (and appear somewhat chapter immediately after dealing w it is virtually the last topic to be dealtv impression that these are Sinhalese at integrate well with the pattern of the (
1. Kavyadarsa of Dandin, I-95. 2. Ibid., III—205-213, 295-297 , 340-342.
2.

und a Theory of
Stion
the only classical treatise on poetic d in about the Ioth century A.D.-is Sinhalese translation of the Sanskrit ough it is a translation, the Sinhalese skrit text in a few noteworthy insd with the peculiarities of the Sinhaskrit. In addition to these, in a rare or makes additional contribution to material not found in the original in the concept of an implied sense in bution in which case the Sinhalese
parallel in Kavyadarsa.
to the function of a suggested sense recognized that words can convey a ample, while dealing with the poetic larks that some words like udgirna tted) are found to be appealing if they tes, but their primary meanings are nation of some of the poetic figures aprasausa involves a recognition of vever, nowhere does he directly deal heanings in poetic usage- a popular ay Sanskrit writers on poetic theory. subject are additional. Moreover, out of place) at the end of its third ith poetic flaws (dosas); and here within the treatise. This confirms the thor's own remarks which do not original Sanskrit text.

Page 24
UNIVERSITY OF
The verses under discussion in
393. Penenat atbelen-en: Yam sada savanatehi 394. Vena vena duțu sadili Dänena anumenenar 395. Tumul siruräti mē— Dahaval nokanu pen
A word possesses two senses, ( plicit (i.e. the primary sense), and (2) (by implication) through the force sense). The primary sense is that w. on the ear.
(On the other hand), the impli sense. It is conveyed by a process the primary sense which is explicit). the lamp is lit (-different from the aid of the lamp).
(This twofold sense is illustrat fat man does not eat during daytime. the day is the expressed primary sel (implied) sense conveyed through (th
Hence, obviously SBL recogn (I) denotative and (2) implied. Th ficance due to the fact that this basic in poetic usage of conveying somet formed the nucleus of an advanced the theory of Dhvani (suggestion). cable critique of poetry in Sanskri the history of Sanskrit aesthetics whe stage of advancement. Hence in th the comments in SBL at length and anticipate the Sanskrit theory of Dh to any other theory of poetry in San
3. siya-Bas-Lakara, (ed. D. S. Amarasi

CEYLON REVIEW
SBL read as follows :-
a arutudu Sadatu deka
heta—häňgenu penenata nam vē. n-baňdanev pahanin penena utata—atbelenenarut viyat. . 7 7 dahaval bata nubudi yata enata-rä bit belenena arut.3
I) penenat-the sense that is seen or ex1 at belen etnia araut-the sense that comes of (the primary) sense (i.e. the implied hich is expressed as soon as a word falls
ed sense is different from the primary of inference and is felt (as opposed to
It is like the pot that is revealed when lamp but perceived only through the
ed by the following example.) This
The fact that he does not eat during ise. That he eats during nights is the he primary) sense.
nizes a twofold Sense in words—viz. lis brief comment is of extreme signiconcept of the capability of the words hing beyond their primary meanings, theory of aesthetics in Sanskrit-viz. This theory which evolved a practiit, belongs to a more recent date in in theoretical speculation reached a new is context it is interesting to examine to inquire whether they, in any way, lvani; or whether they could be related skrit.
ingha), III—393-395.
22

Page 25
SIYA-BAS-LAKARA A
Incidentally, it is not inopportune independent in its thought, but is condit in Sanskrit. For, the analogy broughtf
| the pot), and the example quoted (viz.
ploed in Sanskrit philosophical treatis ions, and also in works on poetic SBL was quite conversant with these Sa
For the Sake of perspecuity, the poi may be listed as follows :
I. A word possesses two senses2. Primary is the expressed sense. 3. The implied sense,
(a) is conveyed through the pri: (b) is conveyed by a process of
duces it is inference), (c) is felt and is not outwardly
4. Analogically, the two senses c object revealed by its light. 5. An example for the two sense eat during daytime; and here, (a) the fact that the man does n
sense, and
(b) the fact that he eats during
ན་
Out of these, the statements 3(a), affinities with the Sanskrit theory of D. their suggested (vyangya) sense, the Dh sense is conveyed through the force of not expressly stated in words but felt b more, the analogy of the lamp and the or the laksya (indicated) sense on the or sense on the other was employed by gonist of the Dhvani theory—too.6 Hei 4. Danālāka of Ānandavardlana, (Kāv
5. Ibid., p. 93 et.seq. 6. Ibid., p. 421.
ܗܝ݂ܰ
. 23
 

ND A THEORY
: here to note that SBL is not quite ioned by similar theoretical writings orth here, (viz. that of the lamp and of the fat man) are frequently emes which examine Words and their theory. Obviously, the author of inskrit works.
ints stipulated in SBL on this subject
(a) primary and (b) implied.
mary Sense, inference (i.e. the vyapara that pro
perceived.
can be equated to the lamp and an
s would be, "This fat man does not
Ot Cat during daytime is the primary
nights is the implied sense.
3(c) and 4 would strongly suggest ivani. In dealing with the nature of vani theorists too explained that this the primary sense, and that this is by the responsive reader. Furtherpot to illustrate the vacya (expressed) he hand, and the vyangya (suggested) Anandavardhana-the chief protance, on a cursory view, it may appear
yamala Series Edition), pp. 50, 99.

Page 26
UNIVERSITY OF
justifiable to equate the twofold sens artha of the Dhvani theorists. As
uniform and undisputed in all Sans of SBL is coincident with the vacy, of these similarities, its implied sel their vyangyartha. The statements room for such an identification.
* Phino Devadatto diva na bhujik during the day.) was the standard ( illustrating that valid means of kir arthapatti (presumption).7 Here, thi the day is incompatible with his bei be reconciled only by presuming th the above example, the knowledge bhojanartha) is arrived at through a the apparent incongruity oftwo sta true.8 This type of abstruse rease logic and not of poetry as the expi certainly is not a case of pyatigyartha rists, because in the first instance py Moreover, Dhvani theorists have c sphere of arthāpatti, and the forme knowledge known as śābda (verbal ti
On the other hand, among San group who considered the sense of the given example as an instance ( arthāpatti. [Laksyārtha is an extens. particular context a word may ind inapplicability of its primary mear * This man is a lion, the word ' lic an indicated (laksya) sense. In poe found utilized as in the case of the fi Kavyaprakasa of Mammata in his (laksana). 10 The given example sa
7. Kāvyaprakāśa of Mammața, (Bha. p. 45. Tarkatsangraha of Annambhatta, (N 8. M. Hiriyanna, Outlines of Indian P. 9. Anandavardhana, op. cit, p. 425 et. 10. Mammata, op. cit, p. 45.

CEYLON REVIEW
e in SBL with the vacyartha and vyangythe concept of the primary sense was crit writers, the penenat (primary sense) irtha of the Dhvanivadins. But inspite inse does not bear identification - With 3(b) and 5 listed above do not leave
92
?te ” (The fat Devadata does not eat Juotation among Sanskrit logicians for owledge (pranana) which they called a fact that the man does not eat during ng fat, and the two propositions could at he eats during nights. Hence from that the man eats during nights (ratriirthapatti-a hypothesis which explains tements which have been proved to be ning comes within the periphery of ression involves no poetic appeal. This I as comprehended by the Dhvani theoangyartha involves no logical reasoning. ategorically excluded vyangya from the r is classed under the valid means of estimony).9
skrit literary theorists there existed one 'eating during nights adducible from of laksyartha-indicated sense, and not ion of the primary sense, where in a icate a secondary meaning due to the ning. Thus in an expression Such as, in conveys not its primary sense, but try, this particular kind of meaning is gure metaphor. This view is cited in discussion on the process of indication isfies all technical conditions of indi
ndarkar Oriental Research Institute Edition) irnaya, Sāgara Press Edition), p. 39.
vilosophy, London—1951, pp. 320, 32l. Seq.
24

Page 27
^్మగ
ܢ ܐ
SIYA-BAS-LAKARA
cation: the expressed sense is incompa to removes this incompatibility due sense. Hence, there is apparent justif Nevertheless, in his discussion, Mai instance is not a case of indicated m tre one has to have recourse to elab arthapatti would be much simpler.11
It is interesting to note that in laksana Mammata cites the identical the one hand this conclusively prov described in SBL was not considere suggestion, on the other hand this example and the type of implied in subject of discussion among Sanskrit treatise concerned about this category
SBL being a treatise on poetic t mise that it is subscribing to the p. cussion—i.e. that the implied meaning laksyartha. If so, the twofold sense S (I) vacyartha (denoted meaning) and ( e two corresponding functions w (2) laksana (indicative). This fact considered that this was the theory in to the advent of the Dhvani theorists; Dhvani group even afterwards. In post-Dhvani days, it was generally ag words possess a twofold sense-viz. Dhvani theorists fought for was to es vyangyartha (suggested sense) and the of words, as distinct from laksyarth SBL would be representative of the v pre-Dhvani period on the subject.
From the point of view of Ind observation in SBL deserves notice. the above list) that the idea of eating stration is derived through the proc
li. Ibid.

AND A THEORY
tible, and the indicated sense resorted
to its connection with the primary ication to call it an instance of laksana. mmata maintains that this particular aning, because to find such meaning orate logical reasoning; and to accept
this discussion that arthāpatti is not
quotation cited in SBL. While on es that the type of implied meaning d by Dhvani theorists as instances of lso clearly shows that this particular leaning involved in it was a popular poetic theorists. SBL was not the only
of implied meaning.
heory, it is not unreasonable to surirpapaksa refuted in Mammata's disderived from the illustration is a case of BL recognizes in poetic usage would be 2) laksyartha (indicated meaning); and ould be (I) abhidha (denotative) and becomes quite significant when it is vogue among Sanskrit writers prior and that this was accepted by the antiother words, in pre-Dhvani as well as reed without dispute by logicians that vacyartha and laksyartha. What the tablish the existence of the third sense : third function vyanjana (suggestion) 1 and laksana. Viewed in this light, fiew generally held by theorists of the
ian logic and poetic theory, another
It is remarked (in statement 3(b) of during nights from the quoted illucess of inference (anumenen ena arut).

Page 28
UNIVERSITY OF
Now, inference-anumania—is anothe knowledge according to Indian logic, a was considered by most of the logic schools of Indian logic-like the N accept arthapatti (presumption) as a included that too within the sphere known that the man is fat but does no he eats during nights. Hence as a m arthapatti too.12
The Bauddha (Buddhist) school o knowledge-pratyaksa (perception) at opinion in SBL that the particular sen vable through anumāna (without mei Buddhist school of thought, for, from it is not difficult to surmise that the
Bauddha.
From the point of view of poeti mands further notice. For, in Sans strong school of thought that upheld reference to words and their meaning the views of Mahimabhatta, the auth gonist of this Anuniti theory. His th sense-viz. (I) the denoted sense (i. (anuneyartha). He accepts neither th sense of the Dhvani theorists, but inc of anumeya (inferred). In other wor or vyangya by other theorists are, in hi the process of logical inference. Apa process of words conveying an impli. words, " Meanings are of two kinds, these, the expressed belongs to the fu the primary sense... From it, anothe inferable sense. 13 Consequently, he instances of suggested sense quoted by cases of logical inference.
12. Tarkasanngraha of Annambhațța, (Nir
13. Vyaktiiviveka of Mahimabhațța, (Nirn lation is quoted from S. K. De, Sanskrit Poet
2.

CEYLON REVIEW
valid means of arriving at correct nd with sensory perception (pratyaksa) ans as of major significance. Some iyayikas and the Bauddhas—did not valid means of knowledge. They of anumina (inference). When it is eat during the day, it is inferred that leans of knowledge, anumana covers
flogic accepted only two means of ld an unana (inference). Hence, the se from the given ilustration is deritioning arthapatti) would reflect the both internal and external evidence
author of SBL would have been a
C theory, this idea of inference comkrit poetic theory, there existed one a theory of Inference (anuniti), with s. In this context, one may consider nor of Vyaktiviveka, the chief protapsis was that words convey a twofold acyartha) and (2) the inferred sense e indicated sense nor the suggested ludes these too within the periphery ds, those senses considered as laksya s opinion, obtainable merely through irt from the primary, the only other 2d sense is anunuiti. To cite his own the expressed and the inferable. Of inction of a word and is alone called r sense which is inferred is called the : takes great pains to prove that the Dhvani theorists are none other than
naya Sagara Press Edition), p. 39.
aya. Sāgara Press Edition), p. 7. The transcs, Calcutta-1960, Vol. II, p. 195.
5
I

Page 29
ܮ݂ܐ
SIYA-BAS-LAKARA
When the facts that SBL expres that Buddhist logicians included arth the illustration quoted amounting to consideration, the affinity borne by t Anuniti theory of Mahimabhata is stri istreached, there remains a chronologi
It is generally agreed that Vyal century A.D.; and consequently its succeeds the date of SBL by almost believe that SBL received any inspirat exponent of the Anuniti theory. Ne recent research that the particular th invention, but was an elaboration of ancient times. 14 AnandavardhanaDhvani-too in his Dhvanyaloka (9th c anumiti which seems to have been all controvert the theory of Dhvani.15 theorist of the early 9th century A.D exposition of the concept of Rasa based it is possible to conclude that the conce Mahimabhatta and even before the co, ܪ .
When all these facts are taken into that SBL was subscribing to some ruc accepted the existence of only the prin and from which Mahimbahatta rec A numiti at a later date.
14. Dr. A. Sankaran, Theories of Rasa and 15. Anandavardhana, op. cit, p. 449 et. se
27

AND A THEORY
sly mentions the term anumana and lapatti in anumana (and consequently an instance of anumiti) are taken into he viewpoint stated in SBL with the iking. However, before a conclusion cal problem that needs clarification.
ativiveka was composed in the IIth 2xposition of the theory of Anuniti a century. Hence it is impossible to ion from the teachings of the famous :vertheless, it has been established by heory was not Mahimabhatta's own a concept already in existence from the protagonist of the theory of :. A.D.) notes and refutes a theory of ready in existence and adducible to Furthermore, an eminent Sanskrit ).–víz. Sri Sankuka-proposed al i on the concept of inference. Hence, apt of anumiti was known long before mposition of SBL.
consideration, it is possible to believe limentary theory of Inference which nary and the inferred senses in words eived inspiration for his theory of
G. WIJAYAW ARDHANA
Dhavand, Madras-1929, p. 135.
9.

Page 30
The Buddhist Concep Primary Elem
OST of the schools of Indian M Vedānta, and the medical tI Susruta, recognize five ina prthivi (earth), ap (water), tejas (fire). akasa is the fifth is admitted by the respects it differs from the other fou stance devoid of tactility (sparsa) a absolute continuity, and infinite m four substances, it is not, in the ul Thus, although akalsa is introduced ; characteristics, it has to be distinguish on a par with Such intangible subst: the other hand, it is not ranked w elemental tetrad, which consists ( akasa and bhida-catukka are broug non-spirit; but only the latter is brot matter.3
The position of Buddhism in re. of Jainism. That is to say, only pa under the heading, mahabhita. It is Mrs. Rhys Davids, in the Nikayas so ately after, and apparently as co-ordi this does not mean that akasa is the fi (consciousness), which, too, is somet in question, is not the sixth mahabhi ākāsa and viññāna are mentioned alor general designation used in respect other hand, the term, mahabhita is i.e. as referring only to the last four
1. See Seal, Positive Sciences of the Hin See Bhaduri, Nyāya - Vaiśeṣika Metapi See Pañcastikayasūra, ed. Chakravar Cf. e.g. D. III, 274; M. I, 431 ff. Cf. e.g. M. III, 31; A. I, 176.

tion of Mahabhutas CIS entS of /Matter * *
thought, notably, the Samkhya, the adition as represented by Caraka and hābhūtas (elemental Substances), viz. vayu (air), and akasa (ether). That Nyaya-Vaisesikas, too. But in many r: It is a non-corporeal (amirta) subld characterized by ubiquity (vibhi), ignitude. As such, unlike the other timate analysis, composed of atoms. as a mahabhita, in view of its peculiar a from the other four and is, in a way, inces as kala (time).2 In Jainism, on ith what is called bhilidacatiukka, “the of pyrthiw i, ap, tejas and wayu, Both ht under the general heading, ajiva, \ܥ ܲ, ܓ light under the more specific, puggala, *
gard to this question is similar to that thavi, apo, tejo and vayo are brought of course true that, as pointed out by metimes akasa is enumerated immedinate with, the above four items.4 But fth mahabhita, just as much as wifinana imes enumerated after the five items ita. It may be noted here that, when g With pathavi, ĉipo, tejo and vāyo, the Df all the six items is dhatu. On the always used in a more specific sense, te1mS.
lus, Delhi, 1925, Ch. l. g/sics, Poona, 1947, Ch. III. inayanar, Allahabad, 1920, pp. 79ff.
ܠܝܐ

Page 31
THE BUDDHIST CONCEP
In the later scholasticism, too, th on the nature of akasa, the scholiasts a But on its non-recognition as a mahal
With this clarification as to the foceed to consider how thay are unc
In the Nikayas they are defined illustrated mostly with reference to Pathavi-dhiu is that which is hard (k hair of the head or body, nails, teet (apo) or that which is watery (apog Sweat, tears, etc. Tejo-dhatu is fire (teiogatau), e.g. the heat in the body digestion. Vayo-dhatu is air (vayo) 'wind discharged upwards or downs
vapours that traverse the several m. breath'.6
What one can gather from the beginning Buddhism did not make : onception of the mahabhitas. There which seem to imply that they were u ie as interpreted in the Abhidhamma within the Nikayas themselves such a clearly formulated theory.
It is really in the Abhidhamma Here we are presented with a differen of the earlier terminology is retained, The subject is presented in greater d theories are evolved and new interpi whole subject in line with the other sul
For the Abhidhamma, too, kakek rigid respectively, bring out the esser element.8 The first is said to represt
6. See M. I, 431 ff. 7. Cf. D. I, 215 ff.; D. III, 87; S. II, 1 8. See Dhs. p. 177; Vbh. p. 82.
 

TION OF MAHA BHUTAS
a situation remains unchanged. True, dvance more than one interpretation.
hita, they all agree.
number of mahabhitas, we may now erstood in Buddhism.
in simple and general terms and are the constituents of the human body: akkhalau) and rigid (kharigatan), eg. l, skin, flesh, etc. Apo-dhatu is water itan), e.g. bile, phlegm, pus, blood, or heat (tejo) or that which is fiery which transmutes food and drink in }r that which is airy (vayogatan), e.g. vards, wind in the abdomen or belly,
tembers, inhalings and exhalings of
se definitions is that from the very a radical departure from the popular : are, however, some Nikaya passages inderstood in a more 'abstract way,7
(To this we shall come soon.) But implications are not worked out into
that we meet with such a situation. t conception of the mahabhitas. Much put the earlier definitions are modified. etail and with more precision. New 'etations advanced, so as to bring the sequent developments of the doctrine.
hala and khara, which mean hard and tial nature of pathavi-dhatu, the earthnt its characteristic (lakkhana) and the
5

Page 32
UNIVERSITY OF
second its mode (akara).9 The q hardness, is itself not the pathavi-d this is the case, yet for the conveni to possess the characteristic of kakkh,
It will be seen that according to paratively) kakkhala (hard) is pathawi mic definition kakkhalata (the facto
The conception of pathawi-dha Theravada alone. Parallel definitic Buddhist thought. In its Chapter o vastu says that When the living being world, began to eat whole mouthfi their bodies came to possess the chara roughness, and kakkhatativa, hardni urutva, kharatva and kakkhatatwa re. dhatu. The Abhidharmakosa and its in their definition of this element. 12 fined as kathinatã, a term which coi or solidity. As such, this interprete by the Theravadins. Thus there is g scholiasts in maintaining that what phenomenon of hardness, rigidity, sc
Pathavi-dhatu is also explained a pattharatī ti pathavī. 13 Extension i sional extension gives rise to our ide can occupy the same space at the sai hardness (kakkhalata-lakkhaua) from of pathawi-dhatu as the element of method of approach.
9. See Vism. p. 286.
10. Cf. Nanu, ca kakkhalattam eva paţ} 49ổỗñātasaddaffhatā?Jasema. abhimme p?. dhamm Evann, hi atthaavisesā vabodho hotī ti— Vism.T.
11. Of Yato ca bhiksa vaste sattva tam, pr teşam, kâye gurut van ca kharatvan ca, kakkh,
12. A.K. Ch. I, 22; A Kivy. I, 57, 66. 13. Vism. p. 287; Abhivt. p. 64. l4. Aung, Compendium, of Philosophy, E

CEYLON REVIEW
lestion is raised whether kakkhalata, hatu. It is maintained that, although nce of definition, pathavi-dhatu is Said latta. 10
سر بافق the Nikayan definition what is (com
, whereas according to the Abhidham
hardness) is itself pathawi.
u in this way is not confined to the ins are met with in other schools of in the Genesis of the World, the Mahas who lived at a new evolution of the ls of the essence of this earth as food, iteristics of gurutva, heaviness, kharatva, ass. The implication is given that present the essential nature of pathaviVyakhya, too, use the latter two terms In the Abhidharmasamuccaya it is deld be interpreted as meaning rigidity tion is almost the same as that given general agreement among the Buddhist i is called pathawi-dhatu stands for the olidity or Compactness in matter.
is that which extends or spreads outis occupation in space. "Tri-dimena of a solid body. As no two bodies me time, Buddhists derive their idea of pathawi."14 Thus the interpretation extension brings into relief a different
avidhati ti? Saccam'etam. Tatha pi, viññótàe kapратdsiddhena bhedena evат тidde8ӧ katӧ. pp. 362—3. thivirasamälopakärakamähäramähärensuh atha atatрат са ират. pate-ор. cit I, 339
'.T.S., 1910, p. 155, n.l.
3O

Page 33
ܓܰ
ܬ ܐ
THE BUDDHIST CONCE
In the Commentaries, we get furt of this element. Buddhaghosa obse of fulcrum, and that it manifests its thana).5 This is further explained Litas are established on it (pathawia support, a basis (patitthanag), fo the Vaibhasikas is shown by their supporting (saudharana) of ships by for the inference that the prihiwi-dhat
The above Conception of the f only a refinement of the popular v understood, is a receptacle, a sort material things. It is, in fact, signi observes that, just as what we conv trees, mountains, etc., even so the ea material elements. 18
Apo-dhatu represents the fact "binding together in matter (rip cohesion refers more to its function iron, etc. in masses, makes them rig re called rigid; similarly, in the c. elephant-tusks, ox-horns etc.. All makes rigid. '20 Paggharana, flowin ming, are also cited as two other ch which suggests the popular and con this does not mean that apo-dhatu, as dhamma, is identical with water. of, or in isolation from, the other t only in water but also in air, fire, etc
In the schools of Sanskrit Budd similar manner. It stands for drawat
15. Vism. p. 289; see also Asl. p. 332,M 16. Ibad. loc. cit. 17. See AKvy. I, 33. 18. See ADSVT. p. 110. 19. See Dhs. p. 177; Vbh. p. 83. 20. Ayalpindi-ādīni hii, āpõ-dhātu, āband thaddhāni nāma honti. Pāsāņa pabbatatā Sabbāni hetāmi āpodhātu eva ābandhitvā. thad 2l. See Vi8ma,. p. 289; . Asl. p. 336; Ab)

PITION OF MAHA BHUTAS
her discussions on the peculiar function rves that it acts as a foundation, a sort elf as receiving (sampaticcana-pacCupatto mean that the other three mahapatitthita), and that therefore it serves them.16 That this view is shared by contention that the "bearing up’ or water (= Ocean) is a sufficient ground i is present in water. 17
inction of pathawi-dhatu appears to be iew that the earth, as it is ordinarily of dumping ground for all types of icant to note that the Vibhavini Tika entionally call earth is the support of rth-element is a support for the other
of viscidity (sineha) and cohesion or assa bandhanattanu). 19 Bandhanatta or 1. "For the apo-dhatu binds together id. Because they are so bound, they se of Stones, mountains, palm-Seeds, such things the apo-dhatu binds and g, and missandabhava, state of streaaracteristics of this element 21-a view mon-sense idea of water. However, it canne to be interpreted in the AbhiNo mahabhita can exist independently hree. Hence apo-dhatu is present not
hism, too, the ap-dhatu is defined in a va, liquidity, and Snehatva, viscidity in
Тvт. p. 58.
hitvā. thaddhāni karōti, tāja ābaddhatā tām utthi-hatthidantagosiñgādīsu, pi es’eva nayõ. dhôini karôti.—A8l. p. 335.
vk. p. 250; Mvn. p. 58.
3 I

Page 34
UNIVERSITY OF
matter. It may be noted here th: too, has the same two characteristics: to the Vaisesikas, liquidity and visc substance. No such dichotomy is withstanding these metaphysical d further. The Vaiśeṣikas maintain tha is a distinct quality produced by Huic The Buddhists maintain that apo-dhat and viscidity, performs the function ing to the Vaibhāşikas, the phenome tinuity in a blazing fire is due to the same idea is recognized by the Ther dhatu manifests itself by its action C pațṭhānā..)26
Tejo-dhatu signifies the phenome usima or usuma. In the Sanskrit Sourci Pali form, unhatta, is the standard te tīkās.
One significant feature of the concerns the question of sita, cold. that usna, heat, is the peculiar quali and that Sita, cold, is that of the W the natural touch of water is cold, 'c in proportion to the extent to which That the Vaibhasikas, too, associate contention that the touch of cold ir of apo-dhatu.29 In the opinion of Bl of the Sautrantika School, ‘‘Le feu celle-ci est plus ou moins froide. ́30 cation that heat and cold are repres pectively.
22. See A. K. Ch. I, 23, In, 3. 23. V.S. p. 56. 24. See Bhaduri, Nyāya - Vaiśeṣika Metap 25. A Kay. I, 33. 26. Asl. p. 332; Abh 2»t. p. 65; Abhʼvk. ] 26. Asl. p. 332; Abh ayt. p. 65; Abhvk. 27. VS. p. 59. 28. See Bhaduri, op.cit. p. 129.
29. A. Kvy. I, 33. 30. A. K. Ch. III, 146.

CEYLON REVIEW
it the ap-substance of the Vaisesikas, apo dravah Snigdhah.23 But according dity are qualities inherent in the aprecognized by the Buddhists. Notifferences, the parallelism goes still
it sangraha, cohesion or agglutination,
ity and viscidity operating together.24 l, which stands for the facts of liquidity of sangraha. Hence it is that accordnon of Cohering or non-broken conpresence therein of apo-dhatu.25 The avadins, too, when they say that apoif cohesion. (apo-dhatu-sangaha-paccu
non of heat, the terms being used are es we get usinativa and its corresponding m used in the Pali commentaries and
Theravada conception of tejo-dhatu The Vaisesikas, for instance, maintain ty of the fire-substance (tejasa usnata) fater-substance (apsu sitata).7 Since other substances (bodies) are cold only water enters into their composition'.28 Sita with apo-dhatu is shown by their 1 wind points to the presence therein ladanta Srilabha, one of the celebrities élémentaire existe dans l'eau, puisque This statement, too, carries the impliented by tejo-dhatu and apo-dhatu res
hysics, Poona, 1947, p. 126.
... 250. ). 250.
32.

Page 35
དར་
THE BUDDHIST CONCEP
The position taken up by the T is quite different. In the works of the any explicit statement concerning the the nahabhitas. Nevertheless, there is as represented by apo-dhatu, because maintained by the Theravadins, does tangible (phottihabbāyatana).31
It is only in the tika literature tha ment on this subject: “Although c touch, it is really tejo. The sensation the heat is less, for there is no distinct it is that, during the summer season w sun, enter the shade, they experience they stay there for a long time, they e.
Thus, in the view of the Therav; teristic of apo-dhatu (as is believed by 1. the relative absence of heat. And hea
The characteristic function of tej naturing.33 For this is the element imparts heat to all other material elem
Vayo-dhatu, the air-element, as de thanibhitata, inflation or distension, a bility.35 While the other three maha cohesion, and the temperature of colt restless and dynamic aspect of matter.
The standard term used in the II vajo-dhatu is samudirana which means krit sources samudiranatvarn occurs in c(
31. See below, p. 20.
32. Kiñcāpi hii sõltatā, pihusitvā gayhati, sā, sitată-sañkchâtassa kassa ci gunassa, abhůvatö. . pa vithamam së tabuddhi hoti. Tatth'eva cirakal see also Vism, T. p. 459; Vism S. V, 75 ff.
33. See ADSVT. p. 10. 34. See Asl. p. 332. 35. Op.cit. p. 177; see also Vbh. p. 84. 36. See e.g. Asl. p. 250, Vʼi,8ʼm2. p. 38l.
33

TION OF MAHABHUTAS
heravadins in regard to this question Abhidhamma Pitaka, we do not get position of sita, cold, in relation to ; no possibility of its being considered this particular primary element, as not come within the sphere of the
t we are presented with a clear stateold (sita) is known by the sense of of cold (sita-buddhi) is obtained when quality (guna) called Cold... Hence then people having first stayed in the 2 the sensation of cold. And when xperience the sensation of heat.'32
adins, Cold is not the peculiar characmany other Buddhist schools), but is t is represented by tejo-dhatu.
0-dhatu is paripacana, i.e. ripening or which heats, matures, sharpens, and ents.34
fined in the Dhammasangani, signifies nd chambhitata, fluctuation or mobhitas stand for the facts of solidity, i and heat, this represents the more
Pali commentarial works to describe mobility or motion.36 In the Sansombination with laghu or laghuta (light
pana tejo yeva. Mande hii nuņhaite sītabuddhi, . Tathā hệ ghammakãle ātāpe that?)ã chảyam, ат. httатат итlabиddhi.-ADS ИТ. p. 111,

Page 36
UNIVERSITY OF
or lightness).37 For the Theravadin elements of matter, i.e. one that seems to be the reason why they d wayo-dhatu, which is one of the pi dharmakosa takes note of a similar pi to a Sütra passage vãyo-dhātu is la karanas laghutva is a secondary in the two views by stating that "le (iranātmaka), c'est l'élément vent; son acte de motion (iranakarman) lahuta as a secondary element of ma with one particular mahabhita, but are but minor differences. There is schools that wayo-dhatu is represe затиairana).
With the development of the the above definition of wayo-dhatu : could not be retained without mo according to this theory, all clement are of momentary duration. Th being, in the sense that they arise : jecting a picture of static existence. is the denial of motion. As the tionné n'existe pas au delà de l'acqu il est né; il ne peut de cette place representative of mobility or motio with the denial of motion ?
In keeping with the theory o a different interpretation: "Par : série d'états qui constituent une c différents; de meme qu'on parle d
37. See e.g. A.K. Ch. I, 23; A. Kvy. I, 38. See the list of material elements (r 39. Op.cit. Ch. I, 23. 40. See Dhs. p. 189
4. See A. K. Ch. IV, 4 ff.; also Sill Stcherbatsky, Buddhist Logic, Petrograd,
42. Op.cit. Ch. IV, 4—5. 43. AhK. Ch. I, 22—3.

CEYLON REVIEW
s, lahuta 38 represents one of the secondary is dependent on the nahabhutas. This o not associate it with the definition of imary elements of matter. The Abhioblem when it observes that, according ghutva, whereas according to the Pralaterial element. It seeks to reconcile dharma qui a pour nature la motion sa nature (legertè) est manifestée par '39 Since the Theravadins recognize tter, in their opinion, it is not associated is dependent on all the four.40 These : general agreement among the Buddhist ntative of mobility or motion (irana,
: theory of momentariness (ksana-vada), as representative of mobility or motion dification. Suffice it to note here that is of existence, mental as well as material, ey are characterised by instantaneous and perish in continual succession, pro41 Closely connected with this theory Abhidharmakosa observes : “Le CondiLisition de son etre: il périt à la place où : aller à une autre."42 If vāyo-dhâtuis n, how is this statement to be reconciled
f momentariness motion, too, is given motion, on entend ce qui fait que la hose va se reproduisant dans des lieux à la motion d'une flamme."43 Accord
33. йра-dhаттd) given in Dh8. р. 188.
purñ, Instant et Cause, Paris, 1955, p. 12 ff.; 1935, Vol. I, p. 20 ff.
34

Page 37
THE BUDDHIST CONCEP
ingly, motion has to be understood, of matter from one locus in space to : appearance of different elements of n rotpatti).44 For in the case of momer tales place there itself takes place c vina’sah.45 The classic example given lamp. The so-called light of the lam common designation given to an uni flashing points. When the productic light has changed. But in reality oth place.
It is interesting to notice that this how or other found its way to Therav; the time of Buddhaghosa. In the e. is understood as indicative of motion In the later works, notably the tikas, 1 interpreted as desantaruppatti, the app adjacent locations.o This new deve cation of the earlier definition of wayoseek to define wayo-dhatu as the cause is that which causes or brings about th adjacent locations (desantariuppatti-hetu. cognition, on the part of the Theravad is no matter for surprise, for they, to vhich, except for minor details, prese schools of Sanskrit Buddhism.
From the fore-going description that, as interpreted by the Abhidhamn extension, apo for viscidity and cohesi and heat, and vayo for motion or (acco cause of "motion.' The four are not rupa, the primary matter; they are its are like the three gunas of Sānkhya, wil the ultimate causal nexus of the world
44. AKvy. I, 33; see also Le Traité de la karana) tr. E. Lamotte, Mélanges chinois et bo
45. A Kvy. I, 33. 46. See Vism T. p. 359; ADSVT. p. 110; 47. Vism.T. p. 359.
35

TION OF MAHABHUTAS
not as the movement of an element nother (desantaraganana), but as the latter in adjacent locations (desantatary elements, wherever appearance isappearance-yatraivotpattih tatraiva in this connection is the light of the p, it is contended, is nothing but a hterrupted production of a series of in changes place one says that the er flames have appeared in another
new definition of motion has someida scholasticism that flourished after arlier Pali commentaries vayo-dhátu ; but therein motion is not denied. motion is denied, that is to say, it is earance of momentary elements in lopment has necessitated a modifidhatu. Hence it is that the scholiasts of "motion'' (= desantaruppatti). It le arising of momentary elements in -bhāvena . . gametī ti). 47 The reins, of this new definition of motion o, developed a theory of moments, hts a close parallelism to that of the
of the mahabhitas it should appear ikas, pathau i stands for solidity and on, tejo for the temperature of cold rding to the later interpretation) the
the qualities or attributes of bhata
constituents. In this respect, they nich form the Constituents ofprakti, Df non-self.
Demonstration de l'Acte (Karmasiddhiprauddhiques, IV, 1936, pp. 151 ff.
Abhvk. p. 249.

Page 38
UNIVERSITY OF
The four mahabhatas are co-or or phenomena in the realm of 1 functions (rasa), and manifestation ( those of another.48 The non-alte stantly alluded to. However muc others, it never abandons its essentic salini refers to a Sutta passage, wh might alter their characteristics Soo disciple endowed with assured faith cation is that both are impossibiliti four mahabhitas, which stand for fc phenomena, are neither transmuta a common ground.
There is, however, a way in pairs, each having one Common that pathavi-dhatu and apo-dhatu ares that tejo-dhatu and vayo-dhatu are This theory seems to have been de the features of the mahābhūtas as ur It is also reminiscent of the contenti is possessed only by two elemental
Another fundamental feature o together (sahajata, sahabhi). No maha three. 52 The nascence, subsistence synchronize with those of the oth their relation is described as one sahajata).54 That is to say, since in pendently of the others, in this ser way of co-nascence in relation to t
The commentators seek to ex mahābhūtas under all possible comb
48. . . Sabbasam, pi dhatnam, salakkha
lakkhanarasapaccupatthdndni, ańfidni dipo
49. Ορ.αίί. p. 336. 50. Vism. p. 289. 51. See Bhaduri, Nyāya - Vaiśeṣika, Mei 52. See Tkp. pp. 3, 14, 36 ff.; AK. C 53. Cf. theory of moments. 54. See Tkp, pp. 3, 14.

CEYLON REVIEW
linate and represent four distinct forces matter. The characteristics (lakkhana) paccupatthana) of one are different from ration of their characteristics is conh one mahabhüta is influenced by the l nature. In this connection the Athaere it is stated that the four mahabhitas ner than it were possible for the Ariyan in the Buddha to alter. 49 The implies. What all this amounts to is that the our distinct ultimate data of all material ble into one another nor reducible to
which they group themselves into two characteristic. Buddhaghosa observes imilar in heaviness (garukatta sabhaga) and similar in lightness (lahukattā sabhāgā). 50 veloped from the observation of some of lderstood in the popular or literal sense. on of the Vaisesikas, namely that weight substances-earth and water.51 *人
(" f the nahabhitas is that they always exist bhūta can existindependently of the other 2 and evanescencess of one do always ers. It is precisely for this reason that of reciprocal co-nascence (ainian'annao Hahabhita can come into being indeise, each is postulated as a condition by he other three.
iplain the mutual conditionality of the inations and permutations: Taking each
CLCCL GCCCCCCCLCCCSS S LCCCCL CLCCC LT LLLG0GLLCCGCLCCCC thatи-adtтат - Иisт р. 387.
a physics, Poona, l947, p. 135. h. II, 248.
36
息。
།
༽ལྟར།
ܘܝܒ

Page 39
NIK
ܘ ܠܐ
محص۔
THE BUDDHIST CONCEPT
one beginning with earth, there are thre that one, thus with three due to one, ways. Likewise each one beginning v the other three, thus with one due to t four ways. But with the last two de first two dependent on the last two, wi on the first and third, with the first and fourth, with the first and fourth"depend second and third dependent on the first with two elements due to two.55 Th the relation by way of reciprocal coarises, what is related to it, too, must the basis, the commentators have shov comes, at one and the same time, the in relation to the others, under differen
Closely connected with this is th They exist in inseparable (avinibhoga) a resolvable, one mahabhita cannot be st ghosa explains this characteristic of it way: "And just as whomsoever the grasp hold of (possess), they have no outside him and yet they have no stal these elements are not found to stand yet they have no standing independ attempted to show is that they have 1 to each other.
This explanation as to the relative to be justified on the following ground other, then they would not perform the to exist outside each other, then they case, the theory of inseparability (avi dity.58
55. Path of Purification, tr. Bhikkhu Nanai
56. See Vism. p. 381.
57. Path of Purification, tr. Bhikkhu Nanan
58. Үаdi hi imd dhátшуo аййат аййа 88a bahitthä vinibbhuttä säyum. Tatha sati avinibbha Abhvk. p. 248.

ION OF MAHABHUTAS
e others whose occurrence is due to their occurrence takes place in four vith earth, occurs in dependence on hree, their occurrence takes place in pendent on the first two, with the ith the second and fourth dependent third dependent on the second and 2nt on the second and third, with the I and fourth, they occur in six ways e fundamental principle involved in nascence is that when one element arise simultaneously. With this as wn how each of the mahabhitas becondition as well as the conditioned it combinations and permutations.
he inseparability of the mahabhitas. SSociation: they are not positionally aparated from the rest.56 Buddhaseparability in a rather mysterious great creatures such as the spirits standing place either inside him or lding independently of him, so too either inside or outside each other, 2ntly of one another.'57 What is no thinkable standing place relative
position of the mahabhitas is sought ls: If they were to exist inside each ir respective functions. If they were would be resolvable, and in such a mibbhuttavada) Would have no vali
moli, Colombo, 1956, p. 405. (Vism. p. 391)
noli, Colombo, 1956, p. 40l. (Vism. p. 387) anto thitā na Sakiccakarā siyum . . . Atha uttavado hdiyeyya.-Vism.T. p. 364; see also

Page 40
UNIVERSITY OF
Each mahabhita assists the rema function: The earth element which by fire, and distended by air is a cond by acting as their foundation. The earth, maintained by fire, and disten three primaries by acting as their founded on earth, held together by dition for the other three primaries air element which is founded on ear tained by fire, is a condition for the distension. 59 Thus each mahābhūta the other three.
Since the four mahabhitas are r inseparable, the position taken up by how they enter into the compositio In every instance of matter all the f On this view there is general agre The Vaibhasikas, for instance, main vayu in an earthy substance (prthivi maturing and expansion respectively in water is shown by its support of s of prthivi, udaka and vayu in a blazin. cohesion or unbroken continuity, an ap and tejas in the air is shown by its and its touch of heat. 60
Accordingly, all material, thing bhautic.” With this view may be co to which there can be "mono-bhau But this statement needs qualificatio there are five silksma-bhitas (subtle) (gross). And according to the th ''the five silksma-bhitas are present as portions, in each mahabhita.”61 He bhitas, each and every material thing
59. Path of Purification, tr. Bhikkhu Na
60. prthivi-dravye samgraha-pakti-vya astitvат атитїyate. арѕи таи-sатdhäranб. astitvam. agnijvalaydn sthairya-sampir astitvam. vägau sandhõrana-šitosna-8parš vaibhāşikāh.—AKvy. I, 33.
61. Seal, Positive Sciences of the Hindus

CEYLON REVIEW
ining three by performing its peculiar is held together by water, maintained ition for the other three great primaries e water element which is founded on ded by air is a condition for the other cohesion. The fire element which is water, and distended by air is a conby acting as their maintaining. The th, held together by water, and mainother three primaries by acting as their depends on, and is depended on by
1ecessarily co-existent and positionally the Buddhists in respect of the question n of material aggregates is quite clear: our mahabhitas are necessarily present. rement among the Buddhist schools. tain that the presence of jala, tejas an i-drawye) is inferred from its cohesion, ; the presence of prthivi, tejas and vayu ships, its heat and motion; the presence g fire is shown by its solidity (sthairya), d mobility; and the presence of prthivi, action of holding up, its touch of cold
is or aggegates are necessarily "tetraontrasted the Vedantic view, according tic Substances as earthy, watery, etc. in. For, in the view of the Vedantins corresponding to the five mahabhita neory of pañcikarana, quintuplication ingredients, though in different pronce from the Standpoint of the sükşma 2 turns out to be "penta-bhautic'.
namoli, Colombo, 1956, p. 403. (Vism. p. 289). һата-daršапdc chesӑтäт jala-teјo-väyüтат gnateranakarта-daršатdt prthivi--teјo-väyüтäт.
dana-Calana-daršanat prthiv/udaka-vdyünam а-darsатät prthivy-ap-tejasäт, astitvат iti
, Delhi, 1925, p. 154.
38
ܒ ܓ ܬܐܕ ܓ`
- ܢܓܡ

Page 41
THE BUDDHIST CONCEPT
It is in fact the view of the Vaisesi the Buddhist theory. The difference 1 sesikas in regard to this question will explain the constitution of the human it is composed of all the four mahal Acording to the latter, it is essentially do not enter it as its substantive or mate is based on the following arguments:
The conjunction of things perceptib ceptible. Hence, since akasa and vayu . the human body is a conjunction of the that it is itself imperceptible. 62 Secon Vaisesikas that the quality in the effect quality in the cause,63. It is also maint except through the combination of two if earth unites with water to form a comp of odour, for odour is present only in earth and fire will have no odour and t. earth. Likewise a compound of earth and colourless, for odour, taste and colo Now all the foregoing qualities are pre fore, it is to be concluded that it is not a
The above argument of the Vaisesik that air possesses only touch, fire possess taste, colour and touch, and that earth and smell. For the Buddhists smell, tas of the mahabhitas; they are a set of secor on the latter. In point of fact, a theor is cited by Buddhaghosa only to be re theme of his argument may be stated as
Ifsmell were the special quality ofe has an excess of earth in it, should be gr which has an excess of water in it. Aga of fire, then the colour of hot water whi
62. Bhaduri, Nyaya-Vaisesika Metaphysics, 63. Кататадипариroakah, Karyадитбаrsiah/, 64. See Bhaduri, op. cit. p. 151 ff.
39

ON OF MAHABHUTAS
kas that stands in clear contrast to between the Budhists and the Vaibe clear if we consider how they
body. According to the former, hütas (catum mahabhütiko'yan kâyo). arthy, because the other substances rial causes. This Vaiśeṣika theory
le and imperceptible is itself imperre imperceptible, to maintain that five bhitas is tantamount to saying dly, it is one of the theses of the i is preceded by the corresponding ained that no effect can take place component elements. Therefore, ound, the compound will be devoid earth. Similarly a compound of aste, for they are possessed only by and air will be odourless, tasteless our belong to earth and not to air. *sent in the human body. There
combination of all the bhitas.64
(as is partly based on the contention *s colour and touch, water possesses possesses all the foregoing qualities te, colour, etc. are not the qualities dary elements of mater dependent y similar to that of the Vaisesikas futed as unsatisfactory. The main follows:
arth, then the smell of cotton which eater than that of fermented liquor n, if colour were the special quality ch has an excess of fire in it, should
Poona, 1947, p. 152. -VS. p. 63.

Page 42
UNIVERSITY OF
be brighter than that of cold water.
fore the theory in question should be of the mahabhitas which are not sep say that this is a quality of that one
The fact that Buddhism does n and ever-perduring substances has als the composition of material aggreg Buddhist conception, should be cor solidity, cohesion, etc. point to their ice is essentially a watery (ap) subst mately reducible to the four kinds earthy, the watery, the fiery and th able, decomposition of a compound tion. Hence when ice melts it be composed of watery atoms.67 Frc ice remains as it is, or whether it when excessively heated, in all these present.
Although all the four mahabhita. yet there is no quantitative differe they enter into the composition of There is as much āpo-dhātu in a bla: It is argued that, if there were to b mahabhitas that enter into the comp thesis that they are inseparable wou theory is not confined to the Ther. of Sanskrit Buddhism call "tulya-bhi
If the mahabhitas are present i. material aggregate, what explains t matter of common experience tha
65. Cf. Te vattabbā: iccheyyāma, yadi kappãse gandho adhikataro siyā, tejādhikas pariháyetha. Yasтd panoetaт иbһауат ірі bhatатат. pisesakapратат.-Иisт. p. 444.
66. Alvinibbhoga uttīs, hi, bhūtes, ajam vattum, ti..-ibid. loc. cit.
67. See Bhaduri, op. cit. Ch. VI. 68. See Vism T. pp. 450 ff.; Abhvk. p, 69. Aññathãi hii avinibbhogavuttitā ma gynų 70. See AKvy. I, 124.

CEYLON REVIEW
Neither of these things is true. Thereabandoned.65 It is also observed that, arable, one from another, one cannot or that is a quality of this one.06
ot conceive the mahabhitas as eternal o some relevance to its attitude towards tes. A piece of ice, according to the posed of all the four mahabhitas. Its presence therein. For the Vaisesikas, ance. In their view, all matter is ultiof eternally existing atoms, namely, the e airy. Since no substance is destroymeans its reversal to the original posi'comes water, and water is ultimtely om the Buddhist standpoint, whether pecomes water when melt, or vapour
different states the four mahabhitas are
are present in every instance of matter, ince between them. In other Words, material things in equal proportion.68 zing fire as there is in wood or water. e a quantitative difference between the position of material aggregates, then the ld not be logical (na yuieyya).69 This avada alone. This is what the schools ita-sad-bhava'.70
n equal proportion in each and every he diversity of the latter ? For it is a it, in many respects, a comparatively
apādākas sā āsavasēc gandhato path vā-adhike sa ca unhodakas sa bannato situdakassa vanno natthi, ta simiċi paħċi u eth'eta in po'etesan nissaya
| imassа дитó ауат ітassa gито ti na labbhä
D。273量。 јеyya. – Vism T. p. 451.
4O
A་།།
ܕܝܡܐ

Page 43
THE BUDDHIST CONCEP
hard stone is different from water, at put it differently: now the Theravadi exception of apo-dhatu are tangible ( of Sanskrit Buddhism say that all the Sugih being the case, what accounts f For it is a matter of common experic sensation when one touches, say, a flo
The diversity, it is maintained, is (pamana), but due to a difference in (ussada).72 That is to say, in a given in intense than the others. For instance, in a stone, although all the mahabhitas the pathvi-dhatu is more intense or n is apo-dhatu in water, tejo-dhatu in fire,
In the Atthasalini we get more de mahabhitas (except apo-dhatu) reach the neously. Although they strike the bodily cognition of them does not ari is determined by one of two alternativ (abhufijita-vasena) and extrusion (ussada
The first alternative is illustrated : with food and brought, one who tak it is hard or soft, is considering only th may be heat and mobility present. hand in hot water, is considering only t and mobility are present. One who by opening the window in the hot se: beats gently and softly, only the eleme heat are present.74
The other alternative, where the absent, is explained with reference to us
71. see below, p. 20. 72. See Vism T. p. 451; Abhvk. p. 273.
73. Kim pama etdim, öz tömü ona höbhbütün ö eke app Agacchanti. Evaņu, āgatāni kāyappasādaiņi, gha äraттатат. katvä käyaviћйäтатут, иррајjati Abhuõjitavasena vähi ussada vasena vääramma
74. Eacpositor, tr. Maung Tin, P.T.S., l920
4I

TION OF MAHA BHUTAS
ld both from a blazing fire. Or to ins say that the mahabhitas with the photthabhayatana), while the schools four are tangible (sprastavyayatana).71 or the diversity in tactile sensations? ance that one does not get the same Ver and a blazing fire.
not due to a difference in quantity capability (samatthiya) or extrusion material thing, one mahabhita is more in a comparatively solid thing, say, are present in equal proportion, yet hore extruded than the others. So and wayo-dhatu in air.
tails on this subject. It says that the avenue of the sense of touch simultasentient body simultaneously, yet seat once. For the object of touch a factors, namely, deliberate attention -vasena).73
as follows: When the bowl is filled as up a lump and examines whether e element of extension, though there One who investigates by putting the he element of heat, though extension
lets the wind beat upon the body ason, is considering, while the wind nt of mobility, though extension and
: element of deliberate attention is sada, i.e. extrusiveness of one element
эahären’eva äрätһат ägacchanti udäһи по ti? țițeintī, ti ? Ghiațțenti. Ekappahāren’eva tāni п’иррајjatї ti ? N’иррајjati. Kasтä ? итakaraтат, hotä.—op.cit. p. 333. -21, Vol. II, 434 (=Asl. p. 333).

Page 44
UNIVERSITY OF
in relation to others. "But he who is or in eating bites on a stone, takes as
extension, on account of its extrusiv heat and mobility were present. C element of heat his object owing to and mobility are present therein. W ear as if to make one deaf, although e the element of mobility alone is madet
That intensity determines as to object of touch is recognized by many too. The Abhidharmakosa, for instan the elements do not become the obje answer given is almost the same as th: alternative: "On percoit dans un : (dravya, terre èlémentaire, etc.) qui se tama), et non pas les autres. De mê brins végétaux et d'aiguilles (silicitülike on mange de la bouillie salée, on perc
From the Abhidharmakosa one ga
more than one explanation in respec there is the opinion of Bhadanta Sril: gâts comportent les quatre grands élé de certaines causes, les choses solide élémentaire exists dans l'eau, puisque qui s'explique par la présence, on qu élémentaire.'77 This theory attemp objects of touch as being due to a qua Thus the degree of hotness in water dhatu with which it is mixed (misribh, and the Vaibhasikas refuse to believe conception, says the tika to the Visu the theory of the inseparability of ti tation is criticised in the Abhidharmaka
75. Ibid. loc. cit. (tr. slightly changed).
76. Op. cit. Ch. II, 146.
77. Ibid. loc. cit.
78. Ibid. loc. cit. 79. Vism.T. p. 45l.

CEYLON REVIEW
lips or knocks his head against a tree, his mental object only the element of sness, though where he slipped, etc., ne treading on fire makes only the its extrusiveness, although extension hen a strong wind blows striking the xtension and heat are present therein, he object owing to its extrusiveness.'75
which element should become the of the schools of Sanskrit Buddhism, ce, poses the question as to why all ct of touch simultaneously. And the at which we mentioned as the second aggrégât donné celle des substances trouve la plus vive (patutama, sphutame, lorsqu'on touche un faisceau de |lapa), on percoit les aiguilles; lorsqu' oit la saveur du sel. ́76
thers that the scholiasts had advanced it of this subject. In the first place, ibha, according to which “les aggréments, puisque, etant donnée l'action s deviennent liquides, etc. Le feu
celle-ci est plus ou moins froide, ce antité plus ou moins grande, du feu ts to explain the differences in the ntitative difference of the mahabhitas. is dependent on the quantity of tejoīva, vyatibhāva).78 The Theravādins : in a quantitative difference; such a ldhinagga, does not accord well with he mahabhitas.79 Srilabha's interpreIśa itself. It observes that the varia
2

Page 45
THE BUIDDHIST CONCEPT
bility, say, of cold is due to the variab and not due to the fact that it gets mix is represented by tejo-dhatu.80
Still more different is the explana grands éléments qui ne sont pas perçus a l'état de semence (bijatas, Saktitas, sān en soi (svaripatas). C'est ainsi que Bh. de bois, il y a beaucoup de dhâtus c entend que ce bois contient des sement breux d'hâtus, car l'or, l'argent, etc., bois.'81 This theory of the Sautranti of the Theravadins and the Vaibhasik mental difference to be noticed: Foi element means that it is characteriz They do not say that the other elemen what they say is that in a given objec present and that those elements whic the object of touch.
Closely connected with this prin sense in which the names of the mah, Abhidhammic interpretation of the ma rial things as pathaui, dipo, tejo, and va of matter all the four are present. He Abhidhammikas speak of material agg This is established with reference to intensity. If in a given material aggreg by a comparatively high degree of inten then (as a matter of convention) that m In such instances the term is sometin (in intensity or capability), e.g. path names of the other three mahabhatas.82
This kind of description is, in a v
earlier conception of the mahabhitas, :
etc. are pathawi, blood, mucus, etc. art
80. Op. cit. Ch. II, 146.
8Il. A.K. Ch. III, 147. 82. See Vism. p. 357; Abhvk. p. 274.

TION OF MAHABHUTAS
ility of the intensity of the apo-dhatu (ed with its opposite, i.e. heat which
tion given by the Sautrantikas: "les ; dans un aggrégât donné y existent narthyatas), non pas en acte, non pas agavat a pu dire: Dans ce morceau ou substances minérales. Bhagavat es, des potentialités (Sakti) de nomn'existent pas actuellement dans le kas appears to be analogous to that zas. There is, however, this fundar the latter, excess (adhikata) of one 2d by more intensity or capability its are in an 'état de semence'. All it of touch all the four elements are h are comparatively intense become
ciple of intensity (ussada) is another abhitas are used. According to the habhitas, one cannot speak of mateyo. For in each and every instance wever, there is a sense in which the gregates named after the mahabhitas.
the above-mentioned principle of gate the pathavi-dhatu is characterized sity (ussada) or capability (samatthiya), aterial aggregate is also called pathavi nes followed by adhika, "excessive" lavi-adhika. Similarly are used the
vay, an attempt to accommodate the according to which hair, nails, teeth, 2 apo and so on. However, as inter

Page 46
UNIVERSITY OF
preted in the later scholasticism, stric The attribution of visibility, as the of view of common usage: "Dans par le mot terre, c'est de la couleur nan ucyate lokasaniniaya.83 Accordi mentary, the Andhakas object to t visible. But do we not see'-so a mountain, water, fire blazing, tre objection, it needs hardly any ment Abhidhammic interpretation of the 1 their earlier conception.
The inclusion of the mahabhitas in mot visible, they are tangible. They From the point of view of the Therava For, as indicated above, in their opi pathavi, tejo and vāyo come under schools of Sanskrit Buddhism incluc tangible. 86
Why the Theravādins have exclu tangible is partly explained by what of sīta, cold, in relation to the mahu instance, the Theravadins do not as: the latter, cold is not a force distinct of heat (= tejo-dhatu).87 As such, i. cold (sīta) and heat (unha), in other v represented by, and therefore testify t
Apo-dhātu, as stated above, is rei "binding together' or cohesion, and to Buddhists, are not felt by the sen
83. A K. Ch. I, 23. 84. Кти. p. 331; КоиА. p. 93. 85. See Dhs. pp. 143, 179, Vbh. p. 72. 86. See AK. Ch. I, 18 ff. 87. See above, p. 7. 88. Cf. Kểmidari, photthabbam, nãma ? ăpo-dhătu aggahită ? Nanu, sitată phusitvă dhãtu, tejõ-dhãtu eva. Mande hi un habhãue s
Vism.T. p. 459; see also ADSVT. p. lll.
89. See ADSVT. p. Ill; Vism S. V., 257

CEYLON REVIEW
tly speaking, no mahabhita is visible. |bhidharmakosa says, is from the point l'usage commun, ce qu'on désigne et de la figure'-prthivi varnasamstha
- - ng to the Kathawatthu and its comhe recognition of mahabhitas as not runs the argument-'earth, a stone, es waving in the wind. . ?”84 This on, has hardly any relevance to the nahabhitas. It is only reminiscent of
photthabhayatana shows that, although can be known by the sense of touch. dins this statement needs qualification. nion, only three mahabhitas, namely, photthabbayatana. 85 In contrast, the le all the four in the sphere of the
lded apo-dhatu from the sphere of the We have observed about the position ibhitas. Unlike the Vaibhasikas, for sociate cold with the apo-dhatu. For from, but is only the relative absence in the view of the Theravadins, both words, all degrees of temperature, are to the presence of, tejo-dhatu.88
presentative of bandhanatta, the fact of davata, fluidity. But these, according ise of touch.89 ' When one puts his
Рафhavї-teјӧ-dhätuttaуат. Ка8тä pan ettha gagyhati ? Saccam gayhati. Na pana sā, āpoitabuddhi. Na hii sitarņa nāma koci guno atthi—
t
ܓܗܢܐܕܐ

Page 47
THE BUDDHIST CONCEP
hand into cold water, the softness of the cold felt is not apo, but tejo, the Its cohesion and fluidity, whatever be are not felt by the sense of touch. atthabhayatana and is included in 蠶 be known by any of the sense known by a process of inference.
The general position assigned to sidered. If one were to examine how of Indian thought, one would notice a comparatively primary position. V bhitas are not the ultimate irreducible evolved immediately from the tanna the uncaused first cause of the wor Vedantins, the mahabhitas are prod former are a species of gross matter and For the Jainas the ultimate constituent elements (dhadu-catukka), but the he latter are recognized as the essential Vaisesikas postulate four kinds of a mental Substances, namely, carth, wat ibed as an attempt to reconcile the ol later atomic theory.
In Buddhism, unlike in many C mahabhitas are assigned a primary pc cognized as the ultimate irreducible that a given instance of matter consi but also of a set of upada-ripas, such : so-called upada-rupas, as conceived in and therefore secondary to, the mah
90. because softness is relative absence of
91. Aung, Compendium, of Philosophy, P.T.
92. See Dhs. p. 179.
93. See Seal, Positive Sciences of the Hind
94. Ibid. loc. cit.
95. Cf. Adesammatta muutto dhāducatiukkassa,
so теo paraтäто parinäтаgито 8а.
Chakravartinayanar, Allahabad, 1920, p. 28.
96. See Bhaduri, Nyāya- Vaiśesika, Metap, 97. See Dhs. p. 153.

TION OF MAHA BHUTTAS
water felt is not apo, but pathavi;90 pressure felt is not apo, but wayo.'91 their degree of intensity or capability,
Hence apo-dhatu is excluded from dhammayatana.92 That is to say, it es other than the mind (mano). It is
o the mahabhiitas may now be conthey are interpreted in other systems that in Buddhism they were assigned Vhat the Samkhya considers as mahãa constituents of matter, for they are tras and ultimately from the prakrti, ld of non-self.93 According to the uced from the silksma-bhitas. The i the latter a species of subtle matter.94 IS of puggala, matter, are not the four imogeneous atoms (paramanu). The causes of the former.95 The Nyayatoms corresponding to the four elleger, fire and air,96 This may be deslder theory of the mahabhitas with the
other systems of Indian thought, the isition in the sense that they are redata of matter. It is of course true sts of not only the four mahabhitas as colour, Smell, taste, etc. But these Buddhism, are always dependent on, abhitas (primary elements).97 Even
hardness = pathan-dhatu. C.S., p. 155, n. 6.
aus, Delhi, 1925, Ch. I.
kåranan, jo du/ ya masaddõ // —Pañcastikāya-sāra, ed.
hysics, Poona, 1947, Ch. 3.

Page 48
UNIVERSITY OF
the development of the theory of ru, atomism,98 did not, in any way, r. position. For in every ripa-kalapa, t mahabhatas are necessarily present.99 ultimate (primary) elements of matte stood as uncaused or as ever-perdur the laws of "phenomenal' (sankhat they are anicca in the sense of liability being a source of suffering, and ana perduring essence.100
98. For more details on this theory, see pp. 5 ff.; NRS. pp. 17 ff.
99. Cf. Aññamaññen’upatthiaddhā sesarūp catudh’evam, kalāpesu, mahābhūtā, p 100. See Vism. p. 446.
4.

CEYLON REVIEW
a-kalapas, i.e. the Theravada form of :duce the mahabhitas to a secondary he smallest unit of matter, all the four Although they are postulated as the r, the mahabhitas are not to be underng entities. They, too, come under a) existence. As Buddhaghosa says,
to destruction, dukkha in the sense of tta in the sense of having no ever
Y. KARUNADASA.
ADS. pp. 27 ff.; ADSVT, pp. 56 ff. ; SS.
assa, missayā Javattare.-NRP. p. 34.

Page 49
THE BUDDHIST CONCEP
*
ADS.
ADSS.
ADSVT.
AIK.
AKvy.
Asl.
Dhs.
Kνι 1.
Kvu.A.
Mvn.
NERP.
NRS.
SS.
Tkp.
Vbh.
Vism.
VismS.
VisInT.
VS.
Abbrev (All Pali texts, unless otl
Of the Pali T.
Anguttaranikaya. Abhidhammatthavikasi:
Aibhidh aimmä vatara.
Abhidhammatthasańgał
Abhidharmārthasaṁgrah
goda, 1926.
Abhidhammatthasańgał
Colombo, 1889.
L'Abhidharmakosa de
Poussin, Paris, 1923
Abhidharmakosa-vyakh Tokyo, 1932–36.
Atthasālinā.
Dīghanikāya. Dhammasanganī. Kathāvatthu.
Kathāvatthuppakarana. Majjhimanikāya. Mohavicchedanī.
Nāma rūpapariccheda. Nāma rūpasamāsa. Sanyuttanikaya. Saccasamkhepa. Tikapatthäna. Vibhanga. Visuddhimagga.
Visuddhimârgasannaya,
1890-1917.
Visuddhimagga-țīkā (PE
Colombo, 1928.
Vaiśeşika Sūtras of Kan

TION OF MAHABHUTAS
iations
herwise stated, are those 2xt Society)
ni, ed. A. P. Buddhadatta, Colombo, 1961.
8.
lasannaya, ed. Paññàmoli Tissa, Ambalan
ha-Vibhävini-Tika, ed. D. Paiifiänanda,
Vasubandhu, I—VIII, tr. L. de la Vallee
-31.
yā (Sphūțārthā), I—III, ed. U. Wogihara,
Ațțhakathā.
I-VI, ed. M. Dharmaratna, Colombo,
ramatthamañjusà), ed. M. Dhammänanda,
āda, ed. N. Sinha, Allahabad, 1911.

Page 50
සිංහලයේ අභාව පි
සිංහලයේ නො යන්න අරුත් තුනෙ ප්‍රශේනය, තර්ජනය යන තුන් අරුත යි. 1 ප්‍ර: එය 'නෙරා වෙයි’’, ‘නැන' යන අරුත් ගෙ නම් යමක් දැන ගැන්මට කරුණු විචාරීම කීම යි; යමක් කරන ලෙස හෝ නොකර යන්න යෙදෙන තැන දී ඇහැවෙන්නේ ය අරුතෙහි යෙදෙන වැකිවල සවරූපය එක වැකියේ පද පිළිවෙළ සාමාන්‍ය කියමනෙ? පැවැසෙන වැකියේ සවරූපය ප්‍රශේනාර්ථ දී තහනම් කිරීමට දෙන විධානය පවසන ක්‍රී වෙනස් අයුරින් යෙදෙන්නෙකි. ප්‍රශේනය, සැටි අප සාකච්ඡාවට භාජන නො වේ. කැරුණු අරුත් තුනෙන් පළමු වැන්න යි
ප්‍රතිෂේධ (ප්‍රති-4+\සිධ - සිදධාන්‍යෙත) තහනම් කිරීම, තහනම් නියෝගය යන අර් සමානාර්ථයෙහි වැටේ.2. එසේ ම විධි ය වේ'', 'නැත' යන අරුත් පැවැසීම ද ප්‍රතිලෝ හෙවත් ප්‍රතිෂේධය යන අරුත් පැවැසීම පිණි මා යන නිපාතය වුව ද, ඇතැම් විට න ය: එය පැවැසේ. එබැවින් එකී නිපාතයත් සංස්කෘත වෛයාකරණයෝ පවසති. නි. සැලැකිල්ලෙක් නැති. සංස්කෘතයෙහි න යාස්කයෙහෝ බොහෝ කලකට පෙර පැවැසූ
1. සොරත සථවිර, වැලිවිටියේ පණඩිත - |
2. ශබ්දකල්පද්‍රගැමය (ශබ්දක.) – 1813 කල '' ප්‍රාධානාපානතු විබෙධර්යතු ප්‍රතිෂේෂයෙ පයසූදාස8 ස විශේඥයො යෙත්‍රයාත්තරදී Renou, L.—Terminologie Grammaticale a II. 27; III. 103; Bohtlingk, B. & Roth,
ස. පීටර්ස්බුර්ග) IV. 979 83ga) වැන්නෙහි :
‘’ විධායුතතරකාලාදි ප්‍රතිෂේධාදී භවනති '' ප්‍රතිෂේධපුතිෂේධාද විධිර් භවති ' ද විධිය බලපවත්වයි.
3. යාස්ක - නිරුක්තය. 1. 4.

වාච තිත ඉංන0 නිප0තය
·ක වැටෙන බව කියති : එනම් ප්‍රතිෂේධීය, තිසේෂධ යන්නේ සාමාන්‍ය අර්ථය වැළැක්වීම යි. න දීමට ද ඇතැම් තැනෙක යෙදී ඇත. ප්‍රශේනය යි, පිළීවිසීම යි. තර්ජනය නම් සැරකෙනාට රන ලෙස හෝ තරයේ කියා සිටීම යි. නො මක් නොකිරීමට ම අණ කිරීම යි. මේ තුන් එකට වෙනස් වෙයි. පුග්නාර්ථය පැවැසෙන ක පද පිළිවෙළට වෙනස් වේ. තර්ජනාර්ථය වැකියට වෙනස් වේ. තර්ජනයට නොහොත් ක්‍රියා පදය සාමාන්‍ය කියමනෙක ක්‍රියා පදයට
· තර්ජනය යන අරුත්හි නො යන්න යෙදෙන ප්‍රතිෂේධාර්ථය යනුවෙන් ඉහතින් සඳහන් මෙහි ලා අප විසින් සලකනු ලබන්නේ.
යන සංස්කෘත ශබ්දයේ අර්ථය වැළැක්වීම යි. }ථ ද ඉන් ලද හැකි වේ. නිෂේධ යන්න එයට }න්නට විරුද්ධාර්ථයෙහි එය යෙදේ. “නො
·ඡධ යන්නෙන් පළ කරනු ලැබේ. වැළැක්වීම %ස සංස්කෘතයේ බොහෝ සෙයින් යෙදෙන්නේ න නිපාතයෙන් ද අ (න්) යන උපසර්ගයෙන් ද
උපසර්ගයත් ප්‍රතිෂේධාර්ථයෙහි යෙදෙන බව පාතය ගැන විනා උපසර්ගය ගැන මෙහි දී නිපාතය '''ප්‍රතිෂේධාර්ථිය' නිපාත පදයෙක( යි ပြဲ (9.ါ
ශ්‍රී සුමඩ්ගල ශබ්දකෝෂය (2496/1952, කොළඹ)
'කතාව, ප්‍රතිෂේධ ශීර්ෂය යටතේ එන :
}'''ප්‍රධානතා
පදෙන නඤ ' යන පාඨය ද සලකන්න. තව ද
lu Sanskrit. TGS. (1942, e336,303)
R.—Sanskrit-Worterbuch, SVV (1865,
බලන්න. කීයේ ම නො මහාභාෂායයේ VII. 2.8
3 ’’ යනුවෙන්. යනුවෙන් දැක්වෙන පරිදි ප්‍රතිෂේධයාගේ ප්‍රතිෂේධයෙන්
48

Page 51
.
ག
ܢ
සිංහලයේ අභාව වාචක
සංස්කෘතයේ න යන්නට සමානාර්ථ ඇති සංස්කෘත වෛයාකරණයන්ගේ අනුසාරයෙන් ප්‍රතිෂේධාර්ථයේ නිපාත පදයක් ලෙසිනි. එමෙ ඇත්තේ ‘නො වේ', 'නැතැ" යි යන අරුත ලද ප්‍රශේනාර්ථය සහ තර්ජනාර්ථය යන දෙ අරුත “නොවේ. වේ’’, ‘නැත' යන අරුත යි. සකු විය යෙදීමට පුරුදුව සිටියහ. එනම් 'නකද්’ යන්න එහෙත් සිංහල වියරණ ඇදුරන් අතර හෝ ගත් බවෙක් නො පෙනේ. සකුවෙහි පවා එය අ යන්නෙන් හෝ සිංහලයේ නො යන්නෙන් හෝ ඇදුරන්ගේ අනුමතිය ලත් පදයෙක් ඇත. ‘’න් පැවැසෙන 'නො වේ. නො පවතී’ යන අරු: 'අභාව’ යන ශබ්දය යෙදී ඇත.5 නියම වශයෙ; හෝ නැතිව නොවීම, නොපැවැත්ම යන අරුත ගිය (අතීත), නොගිය (අනතීත) යන කාලයන්හි ක්‍රියා පද සමඟ හෝ යෙදෙන නො යන්න මුනි වාචක නිපාතයක් ලෙස හැඳින්වීම වඩා යොග
නො වේ, නො පවතී, නැත යන තුන් තන් නො වෙතැ යි යමකුට හරස් විය හැකි ය. එක් අ ද අනෙක් අතට නැත යන තැන ද නො යන්නේ නො වේ, නො පවතී යන තැන්වල \/ව (ස පවතී. (සං, පු - \වෘත්) ධාතුයෙන් සෑදෙන පද පැවැත්ම හෝ නැති බව, නො යන්න හඟවයි ඇති යන තත්ත්වයක් නොවන බව යි. පළ නොවන බව නො යන්න පළ කරන බැවින් එ ත ලෙස හැඳින්නීම නිවැරදි ය. ඒ අනුව දෙ ව වාචක නිපාතක් ලෙස හැඳින්නීම යි තර්කානුකු වෙනසක් ඇති බව පිළිගත යුතු වේ. එකක් “ස, අර්ථයක් ඇත්තා සේ ම අනෙක –Nඅස්– ධාතුව නො වේ, නො පවතී යන යෙදුම් සිංහලයේ යෙදේ නොවන බව සැබෑවෙකි. මේ දෙ තැන සියුම් : කියැවෙන්නේ යම් පිළිගත් තත්ත්වයක් නොව යෙන් පළ වන අරුත \!ව ධාතුයෙන් නිපන් ඇත්තේ ය. සිංහලයේ වඩා වාද්‍යාප්ත වූයේ ද , වෙන් කොට-ලූ මෙ තුන් තන්හි, වීම, පැවැත්ම
4. Monier Williams-A Sanskrit-English Dictional 525 පිටුව. කියන ලද්දේ ම නො : 'කෙත Renou, L.-TGS. I. 55.
කුමාරතුංග, මුදා - වාසාකරණ විවරණය (බු.ව.
49

| ෙනා නිපාතය
නිපාත පදය සිංහලයේ නො යන්න යි. දෝ එය සිංහලයෙන් ඇඳින්වෙන්නේ හත් ප්‍රතිෂේධාර්ථයට වැඩියෙන් මෙහි ! යි. වෙසෙසින් මෙහි මුලින් කියන මෙයින් ඉවත ලුව හොත්, ඉතිරි වන්නේ රණ ඇදුරෝ න නිපාතයට තව ද නමක් යි. එහි අර්ථය නඤර්ථය යි ද පැවැසූ හ.* කරුවන් අතර හෝ ඒ යෙදුම ප්‍රචලිත වූ (සෙන්නේ කලාතුරෙකිනි. සකුවේ න පැවැසෙන අරුත ඇහැවීමට සකු වියරණ නාස්ති’’, ‘’න භවති’’ යන යෙදුම්වලින් ත් හා 'නැත' යන අරුතත් පැවැසීමට න් ප්‍රතිෂේධය හෝ පුග්නය හෝ තර්ජනය
· ගෙන දීමට ඒ වචනය යෙදිය හැකි ය. යෙදෙන ආඛ්‍යාත පද සමඟ හෝ වෙනත් දාස කුමාරතුංගයන් හැඳින්වූ පරිදි අභාව OS GåÒ. ó
ඒහි ම නො යන්න අභාව වාචක පදයක් තකට නො වේ, නො පවතී යන තැන්වල | අරුතෙහි සියුම් වෙනසක් ඇති බැවිනි. |o. Nභ) ධාතුයෙන් සෑදෙන පදයකුත්, මයකුත් ඇත. ඒ දෙ තැන ම වීම හෝ
නැත යන්නෙන් අදහස් කැරෙන්නේ මු තැන වීමේ, පැවැත්මේ තත්ත්වයක් ගැන නො, යන්න අභාව වාචක නිපාතයක් න තැන යෙදුණු නො යන්න නාස්ති yල වන්නේ. මේ දෙ තැන අරුතේ ඉංස්කෘතයේ –\භූ- ධාතුවට සම්බන්ධ වූ )ට සම්බන්ධ වූ අර්ථයෙක් ඇත්තේ ය. දන්නේ නැත යන්න යෙදෙනා සැටියෙන් වූ අර්ථ භෞදයක් ඇතත්, දෙ තැනින් ම න බව යි. මේ සියලු තැන්හි ආඛ්‍යාතපදයෙකින් පැවැසීමට සිංහලයේ අවසර \! ව- ධාතුව යි. මෙසේ දෙ ගොඩකට 2, ඇත යන තත්ත්වය නොවන බව නො
“y. SED. (1951, ඔක්ස්පෝඩ්) න නඤවිශිෂේටනානඤ'' පාණිනි. II. 1. 60.
2492, කොළඹ) 298 පිටුව.

Page 52
UNIVERSITY OF
යන්න පිළිවෙළින් පවසයි. එ බැවින් හැඳින්නීම සුදුසු වේ.
අභාව වාචක නිපාතය යෙදෙන සැ; ඇත්තේ ඉතා මඳ වශයෙනි. සංස්කෘත දී පැවැත්වූ පෙර-අපර දෙ දිග ම උගතුන්ගේ දුලබ වශයෙනි. බොහෝ ව්‍යාකරණ ශුන්‍ය යෙදෙතැ යි කියනුවට වැඩියෙන් යමෙක් යෙක යෙදෙන අයුරු පිළිබඳ ව සාකච්ඡාව කිනි. එහෙත් ඒ ප්‍රශේනය මුළුමනින් ම දේ මැක්ඩොනල්, හොණඩා යන පඩිවරු මේ දැරූ හ.8 සංසකෘත ව්‍යාපාකරණ විෂයයේ ප විභාග කොට බැලිමට ස්පෙයරයෝ වෙ සංස්කෘතයෙහි එය යෙදෙන අයුරු පොත් කිරීමට මැක්ඩොනල් විශාරදයෝ ඉදිරිපත් වෙසෙසින් ලක්වුණේ වෙදය සහ කාව්‍ය භ යෙදේ ද යන්න යි. පිළිගත් ග්‍රන්ථවලින් හොණඩා මහාචායයීයෝ න යෙදුම පිළි සමඟ එය යෙදීමේ දී අන්‍ය ඉන්දු-යුරෝපී වන තැනුත් කිහිපයක් පෙන්නුම් කරති.
සිදත් සඟරාවෙහි නො නිපාතය ගැන ෙන0 ෙව්.
සාමාන්‍යයෙන් සිංහල ග්‍රන්ථ වාද්‍යව: න යෙදුමට අනුකූල වේ. වැකියෙක එද යෙදෙන තැනට සමාන යි. ග්‍රන්ථ, ව්‍යවහා බැවින්, මෙහි කිහිප තැනෙක ම, සිංහලයේ සැසැඳීමට අපට ඉඩ ලැබෙනු ඇත. එ ගත හැකි වේ. නො යන්න හැර අභාව
7. Kale, M. R.-A Higher Sanskrit Gramm Whitney, W. D.-A Sanskrit Grammar Monier-Williams, M. — A Practical Gra (1864, ඔක්ස්පෝඩ්) 312,371 පිටු.
8. Speyer, J. S.–Vedische und Sanskrit-S) Altertumskunde. (1896, CS) pe3S)čốco) Macdonell, A. A.-A Vedic Grammarf Macdonell, A. A.–A Sanskrit Granna 153 පිටුව. Gonda, J.-La Place de la Particule Neg. 47-පිටු.

CEY LON REVIEW
නො යන්න අභාව වාචක නිපාතයක් ලෙස
ටි වියරණ ඇදුරන්ගේ සැලැකිල්ලට භාජන වී කාෂාවේ වාසාකරණය පිළිබඳ ගැඹුරු පර්යේෂණ ග් අවධානය මේ ප්‍රශේනයට යොමු වී ඇත්තේ න්ථයන්හි ඒ නිපාතය අසූවල් අසූවල් අරුතින් නො පැවැසේ.7 න නිපාතය සංස්කෘත වාකන්‍යJක් හෝ විග්‍රහයක් හෝ ඇතොත් ඒ කලාතුරෝනො සලකා හරින ලද්දේ නො වේ. ස්පෙයර, පිළිබඳ යථා තත්ත්වය පිරික්සා බැලීමට යත්න ද යොjජනයෙහි ලා න නිපාතය යෙදෙන සැටි Jෙසසින් තැත් කළහ. වෛදික හා පුරාතන 2–පතින් නිදසුන් ගෙන හැර දක්වමින් තේරුම් ක් වූ හ.හොණඩා පඩිතුමන්ගේ සැලැකිල්ලට හොෂයාවේ වැකියෙක කවර තැනෙක න නිපාතය } උපුටා දක්වන ලද පාඨයන්ගේ ද ආශ්‍රයයෙන් පිබඳ වැදගත් නිගමන කිහිපයකට බසිති. ඒ ය භාෂාවලට සමාන වන තැනුත් එයින් වෙනස්
හෝ එහි යෙදුම ගැන හෝ කිසි තැනෙක සඳහන්
භාරයේ නො යෙදුම සංස්කෘත-පාළි භාෂාවල ය යෙදෙන තැන ද ඒ භාෂා ද්වයයෙහි නිපාතය හාරය මුල් කොට ගෙන මෙම ලිපිය සැපැයෙන ×ය නො යෙදුම ඒ භාෂාවල නිපාතය යෙදුම හා සේ සැසැඳීමෙන් වෙනස් වන තැන් ද සලකා වාචක අර්ථයෙන් යෙදෙන නැත, නැති, නැත්,
lar (1931, බොම්බාය) 235–36 පිටු.
(1879, ලයිප්සිග්) 365 පිටුව. munar of the Sanskrit Language,
"ntax. Grundriss der Indo-Arischen Philologie und
236-240, 265.
or Students (1916 325e.8cesjö) 235–36; 239-40 33. r for Students (තaනීය සංස්කරණය 1950 ඔක්ස්පෝඩ්)
ative na. dans la Phrase en Vieil Indien (1951 G36)22)(3)
SO
- }
بیبر : كا

Page 53
ཀ་
සිංහලයේ අභාව වා!
නැතැ, නැහැ, නෑ යන පද පිළිබඳ ව මෙහි අන්තිම දෙක යෙදෙන්නේ කට වහරෙහි ය ගැන්මෙන් අමුතු අයුරෙකින් අභාව වාචක ද සමඟ යෙදුම්, ගත් වහරේ බහුල වුව ද, කට යන දෙකින් එකෙකි. ඒ අනුව ගත් වහරේත ජෝජන ක්‍රම දෙකෙක් ඇත. ඊට නිදසුන්
හේ නො යයි. ... - ඔහු නො යති, යත්, - මම නො යමි. - අපි නො යමු, යම්හ. -
මෙයින් පළමුව දක්වා ඇති ගත් වහරේ හැම රූපය වෙනස් වේ. ක්‍රියා රූපය අවසාන ආඛ වචනයෙන් ද උක්ත-ආඛ්‍යාත සම්බන්ධයෙක් යෙදෙන වැකිවල ක්‍රියා රූපය යෙදෙන්නේ කෘදන්ත රූපයත් අභාව වාචක නැ යන පදය අනුක්ත කර්තෘ රූපයයි.
කට වහරේ යෙදෙන මේ වැකියේ සවරූප තේරුම් ගැන්මට ඇතැම් නූතන ඉන්දීය භාෂාව සොයා බැලීම වටී. සිංහලයේ නො නිපා: වැටෙන්නේ න, නාහ්, නාහි, නාහී, නාහින් ය යන්න යෙදේ.? සංස්කෘතරාදි භාෂා ගණයට ගුජරාටිය, පංජාබිය, හින්දිය, බංගාලිය, ඔරිය
කාශ මීරයේ අභාව වාචක නිපාතය න යන අභාවයට පත්කරයි. බොහෝවිට අභාවාර්ථ වීමෙහි ධාතුවෙන් සාදා ගන්නා ලද ආඛ්‍යාතය
කරාන් ජුග් – කරන්නේ වේ. කරා කරාන් ඡඟ – කරන්නේ (-නොj) මෙ කරාන් ජෙහ් – කරන්නේ (-නී) වේ. කරාන් ජෙඛ - කරන්නේ වෙහි. ක්
මෙහි න යන්න සංස්කෘත, පාළි යන භාෂාවල යෙදේ. මෙය සිංහලයේ නො යන්න යෙදේ රූපය ද ඒක වචන, බහු වචන වශයෙන් හෝ වෙනස් වන සැටියෙක් නො පෙනේ. ඉහත ස
9. Hoernle, A. F. R.-A Comparative Grammar to the Eastern Hindi (1880 Goa)2)c5) 39:
10. Grierson, G. A.–Essays on Kägniri Granna
SI

}ක නො නිපාතය
ලුහුඩු සටහන් දක්වනු ලැබේ. මෙයින් }... නැහැ, නෑ යන දෙකින් එකක් යොදා !ර්ථය පැවැසිය හැකි ය. නො යන්න හා වහරේ වැඩි කොට හමුවන්නේ නැහැ, නෑ කට වහරේත් එක එකට වෙනස් වූ වාකාස මෙසේ දැක්විය හැකි :
- ඔහු (උදා) යන්නේ නෑ. – ඔවුන් (උන්) යන්නේ නෑ. – ම0 යන්නේ නෑ. - Φεβ යන්නේ නෑ.
වැකියෙක ම උක්තයේ හැටියට ආඛ්‍යාත ඝාතය ලෙස යෙදෙන බැවින්, පුරුෂයෙන් ද ඇත. එම අරුත් ගෙන දෙන කට වහරේ කෘදන්තයක් ලෙසිනි. හැම වැකියෙක ම ත් නොවෙනස් ව පවතී. වෙනස් වන්නේ
}යත් ඒ වැකි රටාවේ යෙදෙන නැ යන්නත් Jන්හි අභාව වාචක අර්ථය පවසන ආකාරය තයට සමානාර්ථයෙන් ගොඩිය භාෂාවල න පද යි; විධානාඛන්‍යාතයේ පමණක් කඩින් අයත් ගොඩිය භාෂා සතෙකි : සින්ධිය, 3ය, මරාටිය යනු ඒ සත යි.
නින යි.10 න නිපාතය ආඛ්‍යාතයේ අර්ථය ය පැවැසීමට කෘදන්ත රූපය සමඟ –ව-
ද යෙදේ. උදා :-
න් ජුන –කරන්නේ නො වේ. වත්, කරාන් ඡන-කරන්නේ (-නොj) වෙත්. කරාන් ජෙන – කරන්නේ (-නී). නොවේ. කරාන් ජෙබන-කරන්නේ නො වෙහි.
9 මෙන් ආඛ්‍යාතයට පෙර ව නොව පසු ව න පිළිවෙළට ද වෙනසි, කෘදන්ත පදයේ
ස්ත්‍රී, පුරුෂ, නපුකාංසක ලිංග වශයෙන් හෝ ඳහන් කාග්මීර වාකාසවල අර්ථ සිංහලයෙන්
of the Gaudian Languages with special reference |-93 පිටු.
r (1899 කල්කතාව) 177, 255-56 පිටු.

Page 54
UNIVERSITY OF
දැක්වුණු තැන වරහන් ඇතුළත යොදන ලද්දේ (අනාගතය), කරින – නො යයි; ගෙයාර්‍ට් පකන - නො ගිය යන ෙයදුම් ද සැලැකුව
මරාටියේ අභාව වාචක නිපාතය සං| යෙදෙන බව පෙනේ; සංස්කෘතයේ එය ආ' යෙන් කො පමණ දුරින් සිටින්නේ දැ යි ලෙ සිටින්නේ පශේචනාත් කාලයෙහි සමහර තැන් යෙන් ආඛ්‍යාතයට පෙරටු ව සිටී; ඇතැම් දී (සං. න්‍යාස්ති), නවෝහ < න හොයි, නෙස < නකො යන යෙදුම් ඊට නිදසුන් වේ. එසේ නා යන්න යෙදේ. මෙය කාව්‍ය භාෂාවට
**ෙත නොව විශේෙෂථ කර්මාෙතට ත.
‘‘තො කර්මබන්ධ ආකාංගී• වාගේ
දැනුදු අතීත කාල ක්‍රියාවත් ආවස්ථික ක්‍රියා ‘’කරි නා, අස්තා නා'. මෙ සේ අභාව ව කෙළවර වී ඇත්තේ කොට ගණි බසේ දක්: නිද්නා — නිදන්නේ නො (වේ), නිද්නන්: – නිදියෙ(ම්) නො (විමි).
සංස්කෘතයේ –අස්– \ භූ– යන ධාතු නො වේ යන අරුත් දෙන ක්‍රියා රූප මෙසේ නඟී යනුවෙන් වර්තමාන කාල එක වචන කාල බහු වචන රූප ද යෙදේ. --හො ( සමාන රූප නව්හෙණි, නව්හස්, නව්හෙ යනු වේ. මෙසේ බලන කල්හි අභාවාර්ථය ප්‍රධාන ක්‍රියාර්ථය කෘදන්තයෙන් දක්වා ය.
ජාත් නාහී -o- නාහීස්, ෆා- නාහී කඩාලෝ (-ලි-ලෙ)-නාහී දා - උහොණනාර් නාහී උ - උකඩාලෝ (-ලී–ලෙ) නව්හත (නී–ලූ
මේ වාකාරී යෝජන ක්‍රමයේ යෙදෙන අභ; සිංහලයේ නැහැ යන්නට සමාන බව පෙ{
11. Bloch, J.—La Formation de la Langue Ma ආ සියලු උදාහරණ යරෝක්ත ග්‍රන්ථයෙන් 12. කොටගණි බසේ ප්‍රාදේශික ව්‍යවහාරයන් Katre, S. M.–The Formation of Konkani

CEYLON REVIEW
දේ සිංහලයෙන් සිටිය යුතු පරිදි යි. කරි –යයි – ගිය, ගෙයාjව්න -- නො ගිය; පකු — ගිය,
මැනැවි.
ස්කෘතයෙහි එය යොදෙනුවට වඩා නිදහසේ ඛාන්‍යාතයට පෙරටුව ෙයදේයි. එ ද ආඛ්‍යාත}වෙනස් විය හැකි ය; එසේ ආඛ්‍යාතයට දුරින් වල පමණි. මරාටියේ න නිපාතය සාමාන්‍යඊට ආඛ්‍යාතය සමඟ එය සන්ධි ව සිටී: නාරී
· න අසෝ, නාහී• < න ආහෙ, නයෙ නලගේ ස් වුව ද සමහර තැනෙක වාකාසාවසානයේ ද ) සීමා වූවක් නො වේ. උදා :-
තාපජාවෙබ් නා.' (ඥානෙශවරී. III 168)
ජල් නා.'' (එහි ම 1H 175)
වත් සමඟ නා යන්න පසුව යෙදේ. උදා :- මාවක නිපාතය වාකාස්‍යයේ අවස්ථානයට යෙදීම නට ඇති අභාව වාචක වරනැගීම් ක්‍රමයෙනි: ත් – නිදන්නෝ නො (වෙත්), නිදනාත්ලෝ ට
සමඟ අභාව වාචක නිපාතය යෙදුණු, නැත, ! මරාටියෙන් දැක්විය හැකි ය: නාහී, නාහිස් ) රූප ද නාහී නාහි නාහීවත් යනුවෙන් එම සං. – භූ) ධාතුවෙන්, නිපාතය සමඟ සෑදෙන ද නව්හෝ, නව්හා, නව්හෙත්, නව්හත් යනු ද පවසන අභිනව වාකාරී යෝජන ක්‍රමය නම් ට කී රූපවලින් සුදුස්සක් යෙදීම යි. උදා :-
— යන්නේ නො වේ.
-- ගියේ නො වේ.
- වන්නේ නො වේ. නො) o- උ- - ගියේ නො වී.12
}ව වාචක ප්‍රත්‍යය අර්ථයෙන් හා රූපයෙන් මෙන්.
rathe (1920, පැරිසිය) 269-70 පිටු. මේ ජේදයෙහි බී උපුටා දක්වන ලදී.
පිළිබඳ ව වැඩිපුර විස්තර සඳහා
(1942, බොම්බාය) 134–36 පිටු බලන්න.
S2

Page 55
සිංහලයේ අභාව වාච
ශෛමථිලී භාෂාවේ ද අභාව වාචක නිපා නො, ගෙනෙන යනු උදාහරණ වේ. ඒ සියලු රූ යන්නෙන් සිද්ධ යි.13 ප්‍රතිෂේධාර්ථය දක්වනු යෙදේ. මෙහි මුලින් දක්වන ලද ප්‍රතිෂේධ වා අන්තිමය සංස්කෘත මා යන්නට සම්බන්ධ වේ
සිංහලයේ නො නිපාතයත් එහි යෙදුමත් වත්වය පවසන ක්‍රමයට කිසි ද සම්බන්ධයේ පවසන වචනවල හිඟයක් එහි නැත. එහෝ ප්‍රාදේශික ව්‍යවහාර භාෂාවන්හි පෙනෙන පරි{ අනුයමින් හෝ ලැබුණු වැදගත් වචන කිහිප යෙදෙන නිපාත නැත. ද්‍රවිඩා දි භාෂාවල ආබා යෙදෙන ක්‍රියා නිපාත නැත.14 මේ ආඛ්‍යාත වෙනත් වචන හා එක් වේ. (මෙ තැන් සී ඉහතින් සඳහන් කරන්නට යෙදුණු ග්‍රන්ථයෙන් ඒ යෙදුම් සිංහල අකුරින් දක්වා සිංහලයෙන්
දෙමළ – මරම් ඉල්ගොලයි
කණඩිලේන්
කන්නඩි-–නීවු කොඩුවදිල්ල
තෙළිඟු - නේෂනු කොට්ටලේඩ්
කොට්ටඩමු ලේඩ්
මෙය අභාවාර්ථය පවසන පදවලට සීමා පේධාර්ථය පවසන අමුතුම ක්‍රමයක් ද්‍රවිඩාදී භ වරනැඟීම් ක්‍රමයක් ලෙස හැඳින්විය හැකි වේ අතර (වටිනාකමින් ඇතැම් විට ශූන්‍යත්වයට
තෙ –1. වේය-අ–නු – වේය: 2. වේය-අ-වු — වේය: 3. වේය -ආණඩු - වේය. වේය-අදු – → වේය,
13. Jhā, S.—The Formation of the Maithili Langu
14. Bloch, J.—Structure Grammaticale des Langue ලිපියෙහි ආ ද්‍රවිඩ යෙදුම් සිංහලයට නැඟීමේ උපකාරය අගය කොට සලකමි.
15. Caldwell, R.–A Comparative Grammar oft
(1956, මදුරාසිය) 468-77 පිටු බලන්න.
53

െ ആജ്ഞ 2685%8
ත රූපය මෙයට සමානයි: නාහී, න, නඟී, ප පුරාතන ඉන්දීය භාෂාවල හමුවන නඟී
සඳහා ජනු, ඡනු, ජනී, ජුනී සහ මති යනු චක පද සතරේ නිරුක්තිය අවිනිශේචිතයි; き).
ද්‍රවිඩාදි ගණයට අයත් භාෂාවන් හී අභායක් නැත. අභාවාර්තය, ප්‍රතිෂේධාර්ථය හත් බ්‍රහුවි, කුරුක් සහ ඇතැම් ගොණඩ දී ආර්ය භාෂාවලින් ගත් හෝ එම භාෂාවන්
·යක් හැරුණු විට ඒ අර්ථය පැවැසීමට පීඨාත හා ක්‍රියා නාම (කෘදන්ත) මිස ඒ සඳහා හෝ කෘදන්ත හෝ ප්‍රතිෂේධාර්ථය පවසන ට නිදසුන් කොට දැක්වෙන ද්‍රවිඩ යෙදුම් ක් ගත් ඒවා ය. අප විසින් කොට ඇත්තේ
ඊට අරුත් බිණිම යි.) උදා :-
*- ගසක් නැත. -- (මම) දුන්නෙම් නො වෙමි. – - (තෝ) දුන්නෙහි නො වෙහි. --- (මම) ගැසුයෙම් නො වෙමි. –- (මගෙ ) ගැසීමෙක් නො වේ.
වූවෙකි. මේ හැර අභාවාර්ථය, ප්‍රති බාෂාවන්හි දක්නා ලැබේ. එය අභාව වාචක .15 ඒ නම් ධාතු ප්‍රකෘතියටත් ප්‍රත්‍යයයටත් පැමිණෙන) අ යන්න ආගමයෙන් යෙදීම:
2) - මම නො කරමි.
- තෝ නො කරඟි. මණඩු – හේ නො කරයි.
– උ9 නො කරයි. යනාදී වශයෙනී
age (1958, ලංඩනය) 565 පිටුව.
s Dravidiennes (1946, est 53C3) 50-52 33. Gë)
· දී ආචායයී M. H. P. සිල්වා මහතුන්ගෙන් ලත්
'te Dravidian or South-Indian Family of Languages

Page 56
UNIVERSITY OF
දෙමළයෙහි -ආ යන්න ප්‍රථමාපුරුෂ එ:
සෙයයා
නඩව0 කුඩාදු (වත්මන් වහර) තෙරියාදු
ඇතැම් කෘදන්ත සහ තද්ධිත පද සමඟත් දී
සෙයයාද - @gYQ ? ෙසයයාගෙම - G25Y02
එහෙත් පුරුෂ ප්‍රතාපය හඟවන සාමාන්‍ය වේ වනුයේ නිහැඩියාවට පත් වෙයි. එහි ප්‍රති. වාචක ආඛ්‍යාත රූපයෙන් වෙනස්වන බව
කාණබෙන් – දකිම් (අනාගත කාණඩේන් – දිටිමි.
කාෙණන් – නො දකිමි, දකි, අරියාර් – නො දකිත්, දකි.
කන්නඩියෙහි ද මෙය මෙසේ ම ය :
නොjඩෙම් – නො දකිමි. නොjඩයි - නො දකිහි.
බ්‍රහුවි භාෂාවේ නම් සවරය පැහැදිලිව පෙර ව එයි :
බිසික් - හේ පිසයි. තික්සින් - අපි ලමු. අරේත් – මම වෙමි.
මෙයින් අන්තිම ආඛ්‍යාතය කාලාර්ථවාචි
තිතවත් – නො දනිමි. තිස්සුත් - දිනිමි.
මෙ ලෙසින් බ්‍රහුවී බස අභාව වාචක වරන
කුවි බසේ ද එසේ ම අතීත කාල අභ

CEYLON REVIEW
ක වචන නීවාර්ථ ප්‍රත්‍යයය හඟවයි :
— හෝ නොකරයි.
– හෝ නො යයි.
— ඒ නො විය යුතු. ཉིང་
– හෝ නො දනී. | ტ
ඒ යෙදේ :
කළ හැකි, නොකට හැකි කළ හැකි බව, නොකට හැකි බව.
රන(ඟිල්ලේ-අ- යන්න අනාදි සවරය හා එක් ඵලය නම් අභාව වාචක ආඛ්‍යාත රූපය භාව පැවැසීමට කාලාර්ථ ප්‍රත්‍යයක් නොතිබීම සි :
}gరంcది)
මි (අනාගතාර්ථය), නො දිටිමි. ති (අනාගතාර්ථය)
පෙනේ; එය අවිනිශේචිත -ප– කාරයකට
බිස්පක් – හේ නො පිසයි.
තික්ස්පන් - අ. පි නො ලමු.
අපහත් — මම නො වෙමි
(تاج كنوع * لك حسيضطبع)
ධාතුවක් සමඟ එක් වේ.
ඇඟිල්ලට කාලාර්ථය ද එකතු කරයි.
ශ්‍රව වාචක වරනැඟිලි ක්‍රමයක් දක්නා ලැබේ
54.

Page 57
--
සිංහලයේ අභාව වාචක
තාකිති - මම ගියෙමි. තාකති – තෝ නො ගියෙහි.
මෙහි සවරය නිරන්තරයෙන් උපධිමානීයයට නොයෙදෙන තැන්හි, අනාගතාර්ථය ප්‍රකාශිත සවණ් නැති වී ගොස් උපධීමානීයය පමණක් ද
තකෙනු - මම නො යමි (අනාග:
සමහර විට මේ උපධිමානීයය වනාහි ආදියේ ; ලැබ, ගෙවී ඉතිරි වූවක් විය හැකි ය. එය සැම ත. සමඟ අභාව වාචක ආඛ්‍යාතයක් බවට පත් වී අ
ඒ කෙසේ වුව මෙහි ප්‍රතිඵලය වී ඇත්තේ පැවැසෙන ආකාරය භාවාර්ථය පැවැසෙන ආකාර මේ භාෂාවල ඇත්ත වශයෙන් ම, පුරුෂ ප්‍රත්‍යය පදත් අතර (පද) රූපයේ වෙනසෙක් දක්නට නැ යන්න සේ ම 'මට නො පෙනේ.’’ යන අරුත යෙදුම් ගෙවී යන බව ද පෙනේ.
දෙමළ-තෙළිඟු-කන්නඩි යන තුන් බසේ ම ප්‍රත්‍යයයන්ගෙන් තොර වේ.
සංගම් හා මධ්‍යම අවධියේ සාහිත්‍යයේ දැක් සයක් දෙමළයෙහි තුබුණු බව සුබ්‍රහ්මණ න්‍ය ශ පෙරියතිරුමෙjලි, තොල්කාප්පියම් යනාදී පැරැ ගත් පාඨ ඒ එක් එක් ක්‍රමයට නිදසුන් කොට ද ඔ
(1) -අල්- යන විකරණය ධාතු ප්‍රකෘතියට
උදා : සෙල්-ල්-අල්-අම් සෙල්ලලම් — (අපි අරි–ය-අල්-අන් අරියලන් – නො ද
(2) -අල්- හෝ -ඉල්- යන විකරණය කා පුත්‍යයයටත් අතර යෙදීම.
උදා : සිරන්ත් -අල්-රූ සිරන්තන්රු – උචෛර-ත්-ත්-ඉල්-අන් උගෙත්තිල් කණ-ඩි-ඉල්-ඒන් කණඩිලේන් -
16. Subrahmanya Sastri, P. S.-History of the Gr. to the Grammatical Literature in Sanskrit (1934
SS

) නො නිපාතය
පෙරව යෙදේ. කාලාර්ථ ප්‍රත්‍යයයක් යි. එහෙත් දෙමළයේ මෙන් මෙහි ඉතිරි වේ.
ව්‍යඤජනයත් සමඟ උච්චාරණය කරනු දුන්හි ම අතුරුදන් වී අන්තිමයේ සවරයත්
2).
දෙමළයේත් කන්නඩියේත් අභාවාර්ථය |රය හා පැටැලෙන තරම් සමාන වීම යි.
· ගත් නාම පදත් අභාව වාචක ආඛ්‍යාත ත : කාබෝණන් යන්න 'මට ඇස් ඇත’’
ද දෙන්නෙකි. එසේ ම අභාව වාචක
අභාව වාචක වරනැඟීම් ක්‍රමය කාලාර්ථ
'වෙන පරිදි අභාවාර්ථය පැවැසීමේ ක්‍රම රාස්ත්‍රීහු නිගමනය කරති.10 පුරනානුරු, <ණි දෙමළ වියරණ පොත්වලින් උපුටා }නු දක්වති. ඒ ක්‍රම සය මෙසේ යි :-
}ත් ආඛ්‍යාත ප්‍රත්‍යයයටත් අතර යෙදීම : ) නො යමු (අනාගතාර්ථය) පුරන . 101.1 gཛུ་ཉི་ පුරන. 239.9
ලාර්ථය අඟවන ලකුණටත් පුරුෂ වාචක
යෝගට්‍ය නො වේ. පුරන. 75.5 |න් - (හේ) නො කී. පෙරිය. 205.12 දුටුවෙම් නො වෙමි. පෙරිය. 20.2
mmatical Theories in Tamil and their Relation
මදුරාසිය) 172–74 පිටු.

Page 58
UNIVERSITY OF
(3) -අල්- විකරණය පුරුෂ වාචක පසුවත් යෙදීම.
උදා : මුයෙකිනෙන් අල්ලේන් —
සෙල්වේම් අල්ලේම් — යන්න ඔල්ලාන් අල්ලන් - එකඟ වන පෙරුවාර් අලර් – ලබන්නෝ
(4) ධාතු ප්‍රකෘතියටත් කාලාර්ථ පු පුරුෂ නපුකාංසක එකවචනයෙහි මෙය ප
උදා:- ආක්-ආ-දු ආකාදු — වන
ΕξG-εβο-ς εξους - έβις පේන්-ආ-දු පේනාදු — රකි
(5) පුරුෂ වාචක ප්‍රත්‍යයය කෙළින්
උදා:- \/කාණ–එන් කාණෙන් — 

Page 59
༽
ܠܐ
සිංහලයේ අභාව ව.
බෙගි සූරීහු නොjවාන් යන්නට පෙළෙන්ද පවසති. එසේ ම නන්නුල් වාසාකරණයට මැරෙන්නේ, නොමැරෙන්නේ යනුවෙන් මෙ
මෙයින් ගත යුත්තේ භාවාර්ථය හෙවත්
表。 කළ යුත්තේ ඒ ඒ පාඨ යෙදුණු තැන
සමහර විට, අවධාරණය වැටෙන තැන අනු සෙයයිර් යන පදවල භාවාර්ථය දිය යුතු තැන බවත් අභාවාර්ථය දිය යුතු තැන දී ඒ යෙදුණේ එය මුලින් ම විධානාඛන්‍යාතයේ මධ්‍යම පුරුද එය ම පුග්නාර්ථය ගෙන දීම පිණිස දැන් මෙ ඇත. එ වැනි පුග්නාර්ථ වාචී යේ දුම්වලින්
මෙ නයින් බලන කල කර්තෘ කාරක ආ යේත් සම්බන්ධයක් නැති බව පැහැදිලිව පෙ නය අතින් දෙමළයත් සිංහලයත් සමාන ව
උදා :-සිරක්ක-පඩුදු–අන්රු සිරක්ක
దా3లిప-రిల్లి-@Gర్తి భవాలపరికి උගෙයෙරක්ක-පඩු-ඉන්රණ උචෛර:
దాలు-ఆర్డి-టిలా කාණප් කාණ-පඩු-ආන් කාණප් దొ3లు-ఆర్ట్స్-రేుద్ధి డాలిషe
කාණ-පඩු-ඒන්-අල්ලේන් කාණප්
සිංහලයේ ,
සිංහලයේ අභාව වාචක නො යන්න පැවැත එයි. එය සිංහලයේ දෙ ලෙසෙකින් නො යන්න ප්‍රධාන වාකාස්‍යයේ අර්ථය නොවේ මේ යෙදුමෙහි නො නිපාතය වාකාස්‍යයේ ආ6 පෙරළයි. එය අවසාන ආඛ්‍යාතයක් හෝ නේ ය. එ බඳු ක්‍රියා රූපයක් හා පමණි. මේ
කියති — නො කියති (ආඛ්‍ය: ගොස් – නො ගොස් (ක්‍රියා
17. Subrahmanya Sāstri, P. S.—History of th the Grammatical Literature in Sanskrit. (I

චක නො නිපාතය
}න්, නොපෙළෙන්නේ යනුවෙන් අරුත්
· ව්‍යාපාඛායාන සැපැයූවෝ සාවාන් යන්න තjරති.
නිශේචිත්‍යර්ථය ද නැතහොත් අභාවාර්ථය දැ යි අනුව යැ යි ශාස්ත්‍රිහු කියති. එසේ නැත්නම් }ව විය හැකි යි ද ඔහු පවසති. සෙයයාර්, x දී අවධාර ණය යෙදුණේ පළමු අක්ෂරයෙහි
· දෙවන ආ හෝ ඊ සවරයෙහි බවත් පෙනේ. 3 එක වචන, බහු වචන රූප වන්නට ඇත. න් අමුතු ලෙසෙකින් උච්චාරණය වන්නට ද පසු කලෙක අභාවාර්ථය ලැබුණා විය හැකි.
බාපාත යෝජනය අතින් දෙමළයේත් සිංහලනේ. එහෙත් කර්මකාරක ආඛ්‍යාත යෝජන තැන් ඇත.17
'ප්පඩ්ඩතන්රු-හොඳ යි කියනු ලැබෙනු
නොවේ. පඩ්ඩිලදු –දකිනු ලැබෙනු නැත. ක්කප්පඩ්ඩින් රූ–(විස්තර) කියනු ලැබෙනු
නැත
පඩොන්-දකිනු ලැබෙනු නො වෙමි. පඩාන්-දකිනු ලැබෙනු නො වේ. පඩාදු – දකිනු හැකි නො වේ. පෙඩ්නල්ලේන්-දකිනු ලැබුවෙම් නො වෙමි.
නො යෙදුම
ආදියේ පටන් අද වන තුරු නොවෙනස් ව (නී යෙදේ : (1) නිපාතයක් ලෙස යෙදෙන ව්, නැතැයි යන පරිද්දෙන් වෙනස් කරයි. ව්‍යාතයෙන් පැවැසෙන අර්ථය අභාවත්වයට
ක්‍රියා නිපාතයක් හෝ සමඟ ම යෙදෙන්අරුතින් නො යන්න යෙදෙන්නේ. උදා :-
තය) නිපාතය)
Grammatical Theories in Tamil and their Relation to }34, මදුරාසිය) 177 පිටුව.
7


Page 60
UNIVERSITY OFR (
** මිසක් කී 225)2 නො යෝ නො සිටි නොරිසි විල: මිනිහා මුදල් ශුනා ගෙන ගියේ ය,
(2) නාම පදවලට, නාම විශේෂණ ද උපසර්ගයක් ලෙස යෙදෙන නො යන්න යි. නො සිටී. වෙනත් පදයෙක කොටසක් වන උදා :- නොමිනිස් (නාම පදය), නොමිටි (කෘදන්ත).
නිපාත ලෙසින් හෝ උපසර්ග ලෙසින් කල්හි එසේ සන්ධි වන තැන අනතුරු ව යෙදේ හැකි ය.
උදා:- නො උපදී යන්න වෙනුවට
නො උස් යන්න වෙනුවට නො පුළුවන් යන්න වෙනුවට { නො ඇත යන්න වෙනුවට නො ඇවිත් යන්න වෙනුවට 2.
මේ දෙකින් නිපාතයක් ලෙස තනි ව යෙදෙස් වන්නේ.
මේ නො නිපාතය පුග්නාර්ථයේ යෙදෙන සිංහලයේ මෙය යෙදෙන්නේ සංස්කෘතයේ න: යන්නත් යෙදෙන සැටියට බෙහෙවින් සම නිපාත තුන ම අර්ථයෙන් සමාන යි. වෙනස දෙකේ ඒ ඒ නිපාත වාකාපයේ මුල ම වැඩි කො; වාකාසයේ අගට යි. නිදසුන් කිහිපයක් ගෙන
'' තද් මෙන් සිත් ලියන් උන් කෙළි '' කිමිදහා තුණහීභූතොසි, නිහඩහි නේ '' ......... එක රජෙකුදු නොසිඟුයේ '' පුතා, මා හා නො බෙදෙණහි නේ
සංස්කෘතයේ ප්‍රශේනාර්ථයෙහි යෙදෙන නිපා: අරුතින් ම සිංහලයේ නො යන්න යෙදෙන
18. වෙසතුරු දා සන්නේ - හෙට්ටිආරච්. 19. අමාවතුර - (සං.) කෝදාගොඩ ඤ)ණයාලෝ2 20. එහි ම - 136 පිටුව. තව ද 'එසේ වන්නේ 21. Macdonell, A.A.-A Sanskrit Grammar for
153 පිටුව.

CEYLON REVIEW
කට සට.'' (කව් සේකර - 5.45)
පදවලට, කෘදන්ත පදවලට් හෝ පෙරටුව මේ අරුතින් යෙදෙන නො යන්න තනි ව් න බැවින් ඒ එක්වන පදය හා බැඳී පවතී. (නාම විශේෂණ පදය), නොබලන්නේ
හෝ යෙදෙන මේ නො යන්න සන්ධි වන න අක්ෂරයේ සවරය අනුව වෙනස් වන්නටද
නූපදී
ವ್ಹಿಟಿ නුපුළුවන් హ25) නෑවිත්
න නොඹා යන්න යි. මෙහි ලා විමැසුමට ලක්
න නො යන්නෙන් ද වෙන් කළ යුතු යි. නූ යන්නත් ලතීනයේ නොන්නෙ (non-ne). මාන අයුරිනි. ප්‍රශේනාර්ථයේ වැටෙන මේ ඊට ඇත්තේ සංස්කෘත, ලතීන යන භාෂා }ට යෙදෙන අතර, සිංහලයේ ඒ යෙදෙන්නේ } බලමු.
සෙයින් ව ද නො ?’’ (සීගිරි පදාප 215)
}ෂා - නො බෙදෙණහි නො ?''18
19* * 2 وحتعG
ჯე 2**20
තයක් වන නනු යන්න යෙදෙන සැටිත් ඒ සැටිත් සසඳා බැලීම වටී.24 උදා :-
වී සංස්කරණය (1950, කොළඹ), 94
ක සථවිර (1959, කොළඹ) 45 පිටුව. නො වෙ ? යි සෙයි.'' 162 පිටුව.
Students (3 වන සංස්කරණය, 1950 ඔක්ස්පෝඩ්)


Page 61
,
සිංහලයේ අභාව වාචක
'' නන්වහට තෙත ප්‍රිය8 ?’’ මම තහොග් '' නනු බො භවාන් ('' ඔබ කවුරු ද
යට දැක්වුණු දෙ වන උදාහරණයෙහි නනු යන්නෙ? යෙදුණේ ප්‍රශේනය නැඟීමට මුල පිරීමක් වශයෙනි දෙවරක් පමණි. එහි එය යෙදී ඇත්තේ නො ( නිපාත පදයක් ලෙසිනි. බ්‍රවාහ්මණ සාහිත්‍යයේ ලෙස කිහිප තැනෙක යෙදේ. එසේ ය යන } සිංහලයේ නොව ? නො වේ ද? යන්නට සමා (= ල. නොන්නෙන). උදා :- ''නනු ශුශුම''
පුග්නාර්ථයේ වැටෙන නො නිපාතය ද ඇත යෙදේ. මෙ තැන අභාව වාචක නිපාතය ඇත පරරූපයෙන් වෙනස් වන්නක් නො වේ. එ ත
'' නුඹ මට නො කී විරී තෙපුලක් කිය '' අද නො දකිමි නු...'''23 '' තැවෙයි නු, '''24
යට කී සියලු තන්හි ප්‍රශේනාර්ථ වාචක නු නිපාත ප්‍රශේනාර්ථයට වෙනසක් නො කොට එ දෙක ම
ග්‍රන්ථ ව්‍යාව භාරයේ පුග්නාර්ථ වාචක නො හාර්යේ නොව, නොවැ යන යෙදුම් ද ඇතැම් , යන්න අන් දෙකට පසුව ඇති වූවක් සේ පෙනේ. යන යෙදුමෙකින් ඇති වූවක් විය හැකි ය. යන්නෙන් සිදු වූවක් වීමට ද බැරි නැත. මෙහි එසේ නම් ව කාරය පැමිණියේ ආගමයෙනි. යන නිපාතයට සමානාර්ථයෙන් ද වැටේ. එය ගත් වහරේ ද හමු වේ. එහෙත් ඒ අරුතින් ද නො යන්නත් සමඟ යෙදේ ද යනු සැක සහිත
(නම්) රුවන්මල් නිඝණඩුව නම් වූ පැ අරුතින් නො, නහම, න යන නිපාත සඳහන් : නිපාත ලෙසින් ගිණිය යුත්තේ ඒ තුන යි. සුලබ ව යෙදේ. එය පැරැණිතම පොත-පෙ එ දා පටන් අද වන තුරු වහරින් නො ගිලිහී
22. වෙසතුරු දා සන්නෙ - හෙට්ටිආරච්චි (1950, 23. එහි ම. - 478
24. එහි ම - 516 25. රුවන් මල් නිඝණටුව - (සං) D. P. ද අල්
59

ක නො නිපාතය ·
යහළුවා නො ? (නොව ?) p
න් වෙසෙසි අරුතෙක් නැත. නනු යන්න
· නනු යන්න සෘග්වෙදයෙහි යෙදෙන්නේ වේ මැ යි යන අරුත් දෙන ප්‍රතිෂේධ වාචක (යහි එය පුග්නාර්ථ වාචක නිපාතයක් පිළිතුරක් බලාපොරොත්තු වන්නා වූ ද, යානාර්ථ ඇත්තා වූ ද නිපාතයක් ලෙසිනි. (ශතපථ බ්‍රහමණය) – අපි නැසුවාමු ද?
කැම් විට නු යනුවෙන් ග්‍රන්ථ වාපවහාරයෙහි xලැම් තැන්වල වෙනස් වන්නා මෙන් සවර ගැන මෙන් මෙහි සන්ධි වීමෙක් හෝ නැත.
සහි නු.''22
කය වෙනුවට නො යන්න යෙදිය හැකි වේ. 2ෂාරු කළ හැකි වේ.
}} (නු) යන්න යෙදෙන තැන, කථා වාසවවිට නේ යන්න ද හමු වේ. මෙයින් නේ න්. නොව (නොවැ) යන්න නො වෙ යැ. එසේ නැත්නම් නොව යන්න නො යැ ය (යැ) යනු සමාප්තාපර්ථයේ නිපාතය යි. ය (යැ) යන නිපාතය ප්‍රශේනාර්ථයේ ද දැනුදු කට වහරේ නිතර හමු වේ. පිළිගත් මේ නිපාතය අවසාන ආඛ්‍යාතයක් නැතුව
3.
රැණි සිංහල කෝෂ ග්‍රන්ථය වැළැකීමේ කරයි.25 ඒ අනුව සිංහලයේ අභාව වාචක
මෙයින් නො යන්න ඉතිරි දෙකට වඩා තහි පවා හමු වන්නෙකි. එසේ ම එය (සන්ධි වන තැන් කිහිපයෙක හැර) නො
කොළඹ) 66.
‘විස් විජයසේකර (1914) 732 පදායය.


Page 62
UNIVERSITY OF
වෙනස් ව පවතින්නෙක් ද වේ. වත්මන් න-සම = එපා) යන්න අරුත් දෙකෙක දී යෙහි යනුවෙනි. ප්‍රතිෂේධ වාචක නිපාතය සමඟ හෝ ‘‘ආශීර්වාදාඛන්‍යාතය' සමඟ හෝ මා යන්නට එය අරුතින් සමාන වේ. උ
'' නහම් සිත '' — පා. මා චිනතයි '' නහම් විස්වැසෙ ''' = පා. මා වි '' නහම් පහර '' — පා. මාච්ජුපි '' නහම් හඟු මෙයි යෙහෙයි.''' *' නහම් කොධයෙන් පවත්ව ''' =
විධානාඛන්‍යාතය සමඟ නොයෙදුණු තැන්ව සමඟ එය යෙදී ඇත. උදා :-
'' නහම් හනු '' (සීගිරි පදාය. 285
විධානාඛන්‍යාතයක් සමඟ හෝ එම අර්ථයේ වෙනත් ක්‍රියා රූපයක් සමඟ නහම් යන්:
‘‘ කැනෙන් නහම් ගත හෙජ මන
නම් රුවන් මලේ සඳහන් නොවෙතත් න' පොත-පතේ යෙදෙන්නෙකි.26 විධානාඛ යෙදෙන මෙය තහනම් නියෝගයක් පැන වේ. නම් රුවන් මලේ සඳහන් වෙතත් සිංහල ග්‍රන්ථ වාද්‍යවහාරයෙන් නො පෙනේ සීගිරි පදාපයේ දෙ පොළෙක එයි :
** ජීවි න හෙයි'' —. ජීවත්විය ՇՉՏ) '' න භද්හයි කළ පින් කරය......"
මේ න යන්න සාමාන්‍ය අභාව වාචක නිප හොත් සංස්කෘත-පාළි භාෂාවල සමානා යෙදුණක් දැයි විමසනු වටී. සවර පරරූ යන්නෙන් එකකට පෙරැළෙයි. ඉහතින් මෙයට නිදසුන් කොට දැක්විය හැකි ය. යෙදුණා විය හැකි ය. වත්මන් කට වහරි හැකි වේ. සාහිත්‍යයේ වෙන තැනෙක මෙ
26. ජාතක අටුවා ගැටපදය - (සං) D. B. 130, 132, 140, 141, 142, 153 යනාදී වෙසතුරු දා සන්නේ - 49, 64, 98, 149, සද්ධර්මරත්නාවලිය - (සං) D. B. ජය

CEYLON REVIEW
' කට වහරේ ද එය පවතී. නහම් (වෛදිකවැටේ : (1) ප්‍රතිෂේධාර්ථයෙහි (2) අභාවාර්ථ }ක් වශයෙන් එය වැඩි කොට ම විධානාඛන්‍යාතය | යෙදේ. සංස්කෘත-පාළී භාෂාවන්හි යෙදෙන
G . ÷ ܝ (Q. Ժ. 69լ. 293, 223) ස්සාසි (එහි ම. 5526) (එහි ම. 261)
(టిటిర ఆట్టు. 118) = පා. මා මුඤච (ජා. අ. ගැ. 140)
}ල දී විධානාර්ථයේ වැටෙන කෘදන්ත රූපය
)
වැටෙන කෘදන්ත පදයක් සමඟ හෝ නොයෙදී න යෙදුණු එක් තැනෙක් ඇත. උදා :-
ගත්නි මුළුල්ලෙන් '' (සීගිරි පද්‍ය. 313)
හමක් යන්න නහම් යන්නට වැඩියෙන් සිංහල ව්‍යාපාතය හෝ ආශීර්වාදාඛාසාතය හෝ සමඟ ඇවීමෙහි යෙදෙන ප්‍රතිෂේධ වාචක නිපාත පදය ' න යනුවෙන් අභාව වාචක නිපාතයෙක් '. එහෙත් නො අරුත්හි වැටෙන න යන්නක්
} හැකි (23 වන පදාපය) | ニ○○] ర్కిలి 2○○] 卧 35 దDE බැවින් - - - - - - (522 වන පදාපය)
ගාතය වන නො යන්නෙන් ම සිදු වූවක් ද නැත ර්ථයේ වැටෙන න් නිපාතයට සමාන්තර ව පයෙන් නො යන්න බොහෝ විට න, නා ක් දක්වන ලද උදාහරණ දෙකින් දෙ වැන්න නො හද්ගයි යනු වෙනුවට න හද්හයි යනුවෙන් න් මෙයට නිදසුන් රැසක් ම ගෙන හැර දැක්වීය ම් යෙදුම අපට හමු නො වේ.
ජයතිලක (1943, කොළඹ) 39, 43, 53, 72, 102, 106,
S.
150, 184, 254, 390, 391,412, 458, 501, යනාදිය. 5(~প্র9. 207 12.
6O
。


Page 63
සිංහලයේ අභාව වාචක
නම් රුවන් මලේ සඳහන් නැති තවත් ප්‍ර: මෙය රූපයෙන් ද අර්ථයෙන් ද සංස්කෘතයේ යෙදී ඇත්තේ පැරණි පොත-පතෙහි ය. උදා :
‘‘‘ මහම් සිත’ – පා. මා චින්තයි (ධ '' නහම් පහර, මහම් පහරා''' = පා. ම ‘‘‘ මහම් නස – පා. මා මහ නාසයි (
මෙය රූපයෙන් නොවෙතත් අර්ථයෙන් නහම් ඛ්‍යාතය සමඟ යෙදේ. එය බෙහෙවින් ප්‍රචාරය පසු අවදියේ පොත-පෙතහි එය දක්නට නො ( පාළි භාෂාවන්හි යෙදෙන මා සම යන්නට සමා යන්නට සමාන රූප ඇති නහම් යන්න යි සිංහ රූප ද්වය ම ග්‍රන්ථ ව්‍යවහාරයට සීමා වේ.
අවදියෙන් පසු ව මහම් යන්න ගිලිහී ගිය සේ
නහමක් යන්න හැම විට් ම යෙදී ඇත්තේ සිංහලයට නැඟීමට වුව ද, මා යන්න හැම විට ම සිංහල ගැටපද සන්නාදි පොත්වල ඒ වෙනුවට දක්නට ඇත :
මා මඤඤත්ථ – නො සිතා ! මා උකඳඤයාසි – නහමක් අවඥා ක මා ච මදදේ - මද නො ම කර
r නහම්, මහම් යන රූප දෙක ගත් වහරේ වුව ද නො යන්නට තැන දී වහරින් ඉවත් ව යයි.
මෙ සේ අභාව වාචක නො නිපාතය සිංහ පමණක් නොව විධාන-, ආශීර්වාද- ආඛ්‍යාත පත් වේ. පැරැණිතම ග්‍රන්ථවල හමුවන නහම් එය යෙදේ. අර්ථයෙන් හා ව්‍යවහාරයෙන් ද යන්නට ද සම වේ. උපසර්ග වශයෙන් එය යන්නට සම වේ. සවරයකට පෙර ව අන්— වල යකට පෙර අ– යනුවෙන් සිටී. මෙසේ බලන } අවසථා කිහිපයකට සරි ලන පරිදි යෙදෙන ,
සිංහලයේ නිබඳ යෙදෙන අභාව වාචක නිව් න, නෝ යන්නට සම වේ. (මේ දෙකින් පළ නේ.) ලතීන - නොන් (nOh), ඉංග්‍රීසි නෙ කෘදන්ත පදවලට මුලින් යෙදීම එ කෘදන්ත ප එසේ නම් එයට විරෝධාර්ථයක් පළකරන) ලෙස යෙදේ. එය සංස්කෘතයේ අන්- යන්න
6I

| ෙනා නිපාතය "
|ෙෂ්ධ වාචක නිපාතයෙකි. මහම් යන්න. **මා සම' යන්නට සමාන වේ. එය
අ.ගැ. 22337) }චජසි (එහි ම 6120) එහි ම 14626)
යන්නට සම වේ. එය මෙන් විධානා|ට ගිය බවෙක් නො පෙනේ. එ බැවින් ඇබේ. තව ද නිරුක්තියෙන් සංස්කෘතන රූපය මෙය වුව ද, වෛදික ‘’න සම'' ල පොත්වල වැඩියෙන් දක්නට ඇත්තේ.
ග්‍රන්ථ වාද්‍යවහාරයෙනුත් පොළොන්නරු Cටී.
ත් සං-පා. ප්‍රතිෂේධ වාචක මා නිපාතය නහමක් යනුවෙන් සිංහලයට නො නැහේ. අභාව වාචක නො නිපාතය යෙදුණ තැන්
(&63.ቁ.Got. 102) \ර හෙවත් අනාදර නො කර (එහි ම, 130)
(එහි ම. 179).
දුලබ වශයෙන් යෙදී අවුත් කල් යත් යත්
}ලයේ අතීත-අනතීත කාල ආඛ්‍යාතය හා
· හා ද යෙදෙන සමාන්‍ය නිපාතය බවට , නහමක්, මහම් යන පද තුන ම වෙනුවට එය සංස්කෘත-පාළි න යන්නට සේම මා සං-පා. න- උපසර්ගයෙන් සිද්ධ වූ අන්ශූයෙන් යෙදෙන මේ උපස්ර්ගය ව්‍යඤජනකල නො යන්න සිංහලයේ අරුත් රැසෙක, බව පෙනේ.
}ධාතය නො යන්න යි. එය සංස්කෘත-පාළි මු වැන්න යි වැඩි කොට දක්නා ලැබෙන්හාට් (not) යන්නට ද අරුතින් සම වේ. දවල අර්ථය අභාවත්වයට පමුණුවන (නො නො- යන්න අභාව වාචක උපසර්ගයක්
යෙදෙන සැටියෙන් යෙදෙනු ඇත. මෙ


Page 64
UNIVERSITY OF
තැන නො– උපසර්ගය කෘදන්ත පදය හ පදයක් ලෙසින් සිටී. අභාව වාචක නිපාත්‍ය වයට පමුණුවනු ලබන පදයට පෙරටුව සිඳී සවර පර රූපයෙන්, විකල්ප වශයෙන්, යන්නට පර ව යෙදෙන අකෂරය හුදු ස දික් විය හැකි ද වේ. උදා :-
නො-උස් නූස් G නො-එන වෙන්න (c)
නො-ආ නා Gô‘:
මේ අර්ථයෙන් යෙදෙන නො-" උපසර්ග තැන ප්‍රශේනාර්ථ වාචක නො නිපාතය දේ නො යන්න ප්‍රශේනය මතු කිරීම පිණිස ( පුග්නයේ අවසාන පදය වේ.
යට දැක්වුණු යෙදුම් අතුරින්, අභාව දි (1) අතීත (ගිය), අනතීත (නොගි (2) විධාන, ආශීර්වාද ක්‍රියා පද යෙ
වාස්‍යවහාර වන අයුරු අපගේ සැලැකිල්ලට නො යෙදීම වත්මන් අවදිය තෙක් ම ගත් කලින් සඳහන් කරන ලද පරිදි, මෙ දා කට { තනා ගත් වාකාප විශේෂයක් බහුලව යෙදී වහරේ යෙදුණු නො යන්න වෙනුවට එප] වහරේ නොපෙනෙන අභිනව වාකාස්‍ය ප්‍ර නො යන්න තව මත් පවතී.
අතීත-අනතීත කාල අවසාන ආඛ්‍ය යොදේ. ආඛ්‍යාත පදයේ ප්‍රථම, මධ්‍යම, යන වචන හෙදයෙන් හෝ එයට වෙනසෙ. යෙන් ඊට නිදසුන් කිහිපයක් මෙසේ යි :
'' සිද්ධත් කුමර.......කිසි ශිල්පයද - - - - - - ඇපි දරුවන් නො දෙම්හ ‘‘ බුද්නු එ පා නො ගත්හු, '''28 ** ...... පැවැරු කෙනෙකුදු නො '' ...... රහමස් ගඳමල් ආදි වළඳ "* ...... මෙලෙක් සිතින් (කුමරු
27. අමාවතුර – 16 28. අමාවතුර - 33 29. අමාවතුර - 44 30. අමාවතුර – 71
31. අමාවතුර - 82

CEYLON REVIEW
එකතු වී සංග්‍රහ නාම පදයක් හෙවත් සමාස
·ය ලෙස යෙදෙන නො යන්න අර්ථය අභාවත්| ... මෙ කී නො-" උපසර්ගයත් නො නිපාතයත් නු හෝ නො බවට පත් විය හැකි ය. නො– වරයක් නම් විකල්පයෙන් වෙනස් වන සවරය
නා උපදී නූපදී නා එයි නේයි
නා අඳුනයි නාඳුනයි.
ය හෝ නො නිපාතය හෝ වැකියේ යෙදෙන සදෙන තැනට වෙනස් වේ. ප්‍රශේනාර්ථ වාචක යොදන පදයට පර ව සිටී. එය බොහෝ විට
)ඨාචක නො නිපාතය ය) කාල වාකාපවල ද දෙන වාකාපවල ද
) භාජන වේ. අතීත-අනතීත කාල වාකාපවල වහරේත් කට වහරේත් පවතී. එහෙත් මෙයට වහරේ නම් නො වෙනුවට නෑ යන්න යොදමින් දෙන්නේ ය. එසේ ම විදහනෙහි මුලින් ගත් | යන්න වහරට පැමිණ ඇත. මෙහි ද ආදි ගත් }යොjගයක් දක්නට ලැබේ. ආශීර්වාදාර්ථයේ
·ත ඇති වාකාස්‍ය සමඟ අභාව වාචක නිපාතය උත්තම යන පුරුෂ හෙදයෙන් හෝ එක-බහු ක් නො වේ. ප්‍රශස්ත පුරාතන ග්‍රන්ථ ව්‍යාවහාර
ක් දන්නෙ නො වෙයි; ...... 5.27
29". ويع بع ! කරනු නො ලදුම්හ.''30
!) නො මැරූහ.''31
62.
蠍


Page 65
සිංහලයේ අභාව වා:
බොහෝ විට මෙය මිශ්‍ර ක්‍රියා නිපාත සමඟ ද ක්‍රියා පදවල අර්ථය අභාවත්වයට පමුණුවමින් යෙදේ. මිශ්‍ර ක්‍රියා සහ පූර්වක්‍රියා නිපාත පද
'' නො බලමින් ''32 33''.මුසු නො වැ ’’ ܐܰ= වෙනත් ක්‍රියා පද හා යෙදුණු තැන්වලට :
** නො පියා-සිටි ’’34
'' නො කට හැකි '35
, . ඔහු කාම විෂය ඉක්මළ නො යා–දු:
'' මෙම පලගින් දැන් නො නැවංග මැ
'' එ කල්හි මාරකනාන්‍යාවෙj...... ©2ബാe) හි පැරැද ගියො '38 යනු නිදසුන් ලෙ
ඉහතින් දැක්වුණු නිදසුන් පාඨවල අභාව පමුණුවනු ලබන අවසාන ආඛ්‍යාතයට හෝ ,
අභාව වාචක නිපාතය විධානාඛන්‍යාතය මෙ යන්හි දක්නට ලැබේ. කලින් කියැවුණු පරි. ග්‍රන්ථවල සහ වෙනත් ලේඛනවල දක්නට සිංහලයේ පැරැණිතම ලියැවිලි එයට දෙස් කිය පාළි මා යන ප්‍රතිෂේධ වාචක නිපාතයේ අර්ථ වටි. එහෙයින් කී හ පරණවිතාන සූරීහු : ක්‍රියා පදයෙක මුලට යෙදිය හැකි ය; අප ප (196 පැදිය), නො බල (523) නොවන් (304) • පුරාතන ග්‍රන්ථවලින් තව ද උදාහරණ දැක්විය
'' එ කෙරෙණහි මැ මර දෙව්පිත් ..., '' දෙදෙනෙක් එක් මඟින් නො යව. ** රට නො නසව. ''42
32. අමාවතුර - 6 33. අමාවතුර – 12 34. අමාවතුර – 16 35. අමාවතුර – 23 36. අමාවතුර – 27 37. අමාවතුර - 31 38. අමාවතුර – 32 39. Paranavitana, S.-Sigiri Graffiti Vol. I, 40. අමාවතුර - 19 41. අමාවතුර - 36 42. අමාවතුර - 64

}ක නො නිපාතය
පූර්ව ක්‍රියා නිපාත සමඟ ද යෙදේ. ඒ ඒ වෙනත් ක්‍රියාපද සමඟින් එය කිසි තැනෙක හා යෙදුණු තැන් කිහිපයකට නිදසුනි මේ :
න මැනැවැ ’’ 岔.36
නැවැ ’’ යි.37 ක් ලීලායෙන් භාවභාවයෙන් නො පැලැඹියැ ー).
| වාචක නිපාතයෙන් අර්ථය අභාවත්වයට ක්‍රියා පදයට හෝ එම නිපාතය ඇදෙයි.
හා ආශිර්වාදාඛපාතය හෝ යෙදෙන වාකාස්‍යදී, මේ යෙදුම වෙසෙසින් පැරැණි අවදියෙහි ලැබෙන්නා වූ සාමාන්‍ය ව්‍යවහාරය යි. යි. මේ අර්ථයෙන් නො යන්න සංස්කෘතය ගෙන දෙන්නට යෙදී ඇති බව සිහි කරනු 'අභාව වාචක නො යන්න ඕනෑම විධාන හැදිවල එයට නිදසුන් සුලබ වේ; නො යන් යන වශයෙනි. එයට විවරණ අනවශ්‍ය යි.’’39 } හැකි ය :
'' නො යා, නවත' යි කී.40 241
cxliv. &ge). 466.


Page 66
UNIVERSITY OF
පණිවා නො කට යුත්තෙ යැ, අයි: සිරියැ යුත්තෙ යැ, මුසවා නො කි. නො සොස්, නො වහස.''44 මට නො දැහැව.''45 තො ඔහු කරා නො යා.''46 නො සිතව.''47 ජීවකය, මා නො නස.''48 මහරජ, නො බව.''49 නො කට යුත්තෙ යැ.''50 නො බව මහරජ, නො බව මහරජ ♔% G8)a)'352 නො බසිත්ව ''යි.53 @25, 25 Ca), '54 ගහට නො වෙව ’’යි ඉවූහැ.55 ගී නො කියව, නො වයව, නො මෙ සත්හු නො නසිත්ව ’’යි.57 මෙ බඹ මුල් පිළිසඳට නො යෙ මෙ බඹ 'ලො වැසියො මා හෝ නො වෙ වා කෙරෙණක්හි දු - පර
සිංහලයේ ප්‍රතිෂේධ වාචක නො නිපාතය ව්‍යවහාරයේ ආ නහම්, නහමක්, මහම් යනු වූවා සේ ම කථා වාද්‍යවහාරයේ ඒ වෙනුවට
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50. 51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
අමාවතුර - 67
අමාවතුර – 75 අමාවතුර - 80 අමාවතුර – 96
අමාවතුර – 119 අමාවතුර – 123 අමාවතුර – 130 අමාවතුර – 132 අමාවතුර – 138
• අමාවතුර – 162, 164, 179
අමාවතුර – 235 අමාවතුර - 244 අමාවතුර – 246 අමාවතුර – 277 අමාවතුර - 300, 301 අමාවතුර – 302 අමාවතුර – 302 අමාවතුර - 304

CEYLON REVIEW
Nථාදන් නො ගත යුත්තෙ යැ, මිස හසර නො }ය යුත්තෙ යැ, රහ නො බිය යුත්තෙ යැ.''43
, මෙම දැන් කිහිඹියකු දු දිවි නො ගළවයි.''51
Ø නටව’යි.56
)○ "3.58 නා දකිත්ව ’’යි.39
වැඩ මුත් පියො මා.''60
සට පුදුම යටගිය පවතක් ඇත්තේ ය. ග්‍රන්ථ වෙනුවට, කල් යත් යත්, එය යෙදෙන්නට
එපා යන නීපාතය යෙදෙන්නට විය. එදා ܚܝܪܡܨܠ


Page 67
සිංහලයේ අභාව වාච}
යන්න පිළිබඳ ව සලකා බැලීම මෙහි ලා අප සී. පිළිබඳ කරුණු කිහිපයක් ගෙන හැර දැක්වීම අ යෙන් එපා යන්න සාමාන්‍යයෙන් යෙදෙන්නේ භාව කෘදන්තය හෝ සමඟ වේ. මේ වාකාව්‍ය රූපුණ්‍ය යෙදීම ග්‍රන්ථ ව්‍යවහාරයට වැඩියෙන් අ එන 'බොන්න එපා’’ යනු වෙනුවට 'බොනු එ. වේ. නැත හොත් —නු කාරාන්ත ක්‍රියා නාම , සෑදුණු සංග්‍රහ නාම පදයක් හෝ විය හැකි ය. ල විසින් මේ සඳහා විවිධ නිරුක්ති දක්වා ඇත.51
එපා යන්න අවසාන ආඛ්‍යාතය හෝ උක් සමඟ ද යෙදෙන බව සැලැකුව මනා ය. උදා දෙකේ ම අවසාන ආඛ්‍යාත නැත. පළමු වැන නො සිටී. යට කී තැන්වල එපා යන්න යෙදී ඕනෑ, බෑ යනු යෙදෙන පරිද්දෙනි. මේ වැනි වෙනුවට නෑ, ඕනෑ, බෑ යන පදවලින් එකක් යෙ ඕනෑ යන්නෙන් එකක් යෙදිය හැකි ය. මේ විධානාර්ථයේ වැටෙන ක්‍රියා නාමයක් (භාව අර්ථය අභාවත්වයට පමුණුවයි. එය අවසාන
· මෙ තෙක් දක්වන ලද උදාහරණවල අභාව අනතීත කාලාර්ථයෙහි හෝ විධානාර්ථයෙහි හේ ආඛ්‍යාත පදයක් සමඟිනි. අවසාන ආඛ්‍යාතය ක්‍රියා හෝ වෙන යම් ක්‍රියා නිපාතයක් සමග හෝ ෙණ ය. කරද්දී, කරත යනු කාලාර්ථයේ අස කරතොත්, කළොත් යනු ආවස්ථික ක්‍රියා නිපාත
61. Paranavitana,— SG. Vol. I. cxliv. 466.
පරණවිතාන - සීගිරි ගී-වියරණ 1 වැනි කාණ:
** අංක 39 පදාපයෙහි අවවාදාත්මක ප්‍රතිෂේධ වර්තමාන සිංහලයෙහි වැළැක්වීමේ අර්ථයෙහි මෙය වන හෙයිනි. තබන්න එප (පදයන් ග
· ව්‍යවහාරය සාමාන්‍ය සිංහලයන් අතර වර්තම එන්න එප, කරන්න එප ආදියට හාත්පසින් ම පදයත් යන්න, එන්න, කරන්න ආදියත් -නු මෙන් පෙනේ. (345 ජෙදයේ එ බලන්න). යන අදහස ඇති එ–පහ යන්නෙන් ඇති වූවක් ද ප්‍රකට වන වාසාකරණ ප්‍රයෝගය සිංහල නො වළකනු යන අදහස දෙන භාපය (“හපය > ලෙස සලකමි, තබන්න එපා යන්නෙහි අදහස අර්ථය කිරීම වළකනු යනු යි.’’

ක නො නිපාතය "
වාවෙන් බැහැර වුව ද, එය යෙදෙන සැටි යොjග ව්‍ය විය හැකි නො වේ. මේ අර්ථ* උක්ත භාව කෘදන්තය හෝ අනුක්ත ප්‍රයෝගයෙහි භාව කෘදන්තයේ ප්‍රකෘති අනුකූල වේ. උදා :- කථා ව්‍යවහාරයේ පා’’ යන්න ග්‍රන්ථ වාස්‍යවහාරයට වඩා හුරු රූපය හා යැ, ය, නිපාතය එක් වීමෙන් මෙහි නිරුක්තිය අවිනිශේචිත යි. උගතුන්
තය හෝ අධ්‍යාහාරයෙන් සිටිනා වාකාරී :–මට එපා; බත් එපා. මේ කියමන් නිනො කතීබෘ පදය උක්ත විභක්තියෙන් , ඇත්තේ මීට සමාන කියමන්වල නෑ, බි දෙකින් පළමු වැන්නේ එපා යන්න දිය හැකි ය. දෙ වැන්නේ එ තැනට නෑ,
· ප්‍රතිෂේධ වාචක නිපාතය සෑම කල්හි කෘදන්තයක් හෝ) හා යෙදෙමින් එහි ආඛ්‍යාතයක් හා නො යෙදේ.
) වාචක නිපාතය යෙදී ඇත්තේ අතීතහෝ ආශීර්වාදාර්ථයෙහි හෝ වැටුණු අවසාන ක් හා නොයෙදුණු විට මිශ්‍ර ක්‍රියා, පූර්ව කාබෝ කෘදන්ත පදයක් සමඟ හෝ එය යෙදුම්භාව්‍ය ක්‍රියා නිපාත වේ. යළි කරත, } වේ.
ධය – V වැනි කොටස, 222-23 පිටු.
) නිපාතය ඉතා වැදගත් ය. කවර හෙයින් ද? යෙදෙන මේ පදය හමුවන ඉතා පැරැණි සථානය දාසයට අනුව පිළියෙළ කළ යුතු හෙයින්) යන 2ෂානයෙහි අසන්නට ලැබේ. එය යන්න එප,
සමාන ය. සීගිරි පදාරයන්හි එන තබන්න යන කාරාන්ත ක්‍රියා නාමයන්ගේ කර්ම පද රූපයක් එපා යන්න විධි ක්‍රියා රූපය යි. එය අර පැත්ත }ලස ගයිගර සලකයි. නමුත් එ වැනි විස්තරයක්
වේ. එය දෙමළයට සුදුසු ය. සංස්කෘතයෙහි *හපා > *හෙප > *එප) යන්නට එය සමාන තැබීම වළක්වනු යනු යි. කරන්න එපා යන්නෙහි


Page 68
UNIVERSITY OF
ඇතැම් භාෂාවල අභාව වාචක
වාකාරයන්හි යෙදේ. ප්‍රතිෂේධය, ප්‍රශනය වාකාසවල විශේෂයෙන් මේ යෙදුම දක්; (certainly hot) යන්න; සංස්කෘතයේ ''නේවය’’ යන්න උදාහරණ වේ. සිංහල දැයි විමසනු වටී. සිංහල ව්‍යවහාරය සංග්‍රි. වේ ද? මේ ප්‍රග්නය නැඟීම වඩාත් ෙය ග්‍රන්ථ භාෂාවේ ව්‍යාකරණය සංස්කෘත-ප වුණු සැටියක් පෙනෙන හෙයිනි.
ඉහතින් දැක්වුණු එකද තැනෙක අභාව හෝ සමඟ ඒ ආඛ්‍යාතයේ හෝ කෘදන්ත, නො යෙදිණ. අභාව වාචක නිපාතය සිය සිද්ධවූ කෘදන්තය හා සමඟ හෝ බැඳී ජ හෝ සිංහලයෙන් පැවැසීමට I/ව- ධාතුවේ ධාතුවෙන්) හෝ සිද්ධ වූ ක්‍රියා පදයක් න ඒ ක්‍රියා පදයේ හෝ කෘදන්ත පදයේ හෝ අ නිපාතය ද අවශ්‍ය වේ. නැත, නැති යන එන පදය හා සන්ධි වී පවතී. මේ පදය ල ඇතැම් විට 'ශෛනගා වේ’ යන අරුත් පැවැ වේ' යන්න ම මුත් නො– යන්න ප්‍රමාණ There is coconut at he me, () ric යන සරල වැකිය සිංහලයට නැඟීමේ දී, ගෙදර පොල් ඇත, හාල් නැත. යනුවෙන් පෙරැළිය යුතු යි. . එසේ ම,
This is a seer, nct a paravă. යන්න :
මේ තෝරෙකි, පරවෙක් නො වෙයි යනුවෙන් පෙරැළිය යුතු වේ.
පුරාණමිකේතාන්‍යාව න සාධු සර්ව මී යන සංස්කෘත වගාකන්‍යාය
පැරැණි යැ යි කී බැවින් ම සියල්ල යනුවෙන් සිංහලයට නැඟිය යුතු යි. ( යෙදේ. එය නැතුවත් අදහස සම්පූර්ණ හෝ ව්‍යවහාරයට හුරු ද වේ. එහෙත් යන ආඛ්‍යාතයක් නැති ව ම බැරි ය. අර්ථය අභාවත්වයට පමුණුවනු පිණිස ආ; සිද්ධ කෘදන්තයක් හෝ) අවශ්‍යයෙන් ද

CEYLON REVIEW,
නිපාතය, ආඛ්‍යාතය අධ්‍යාහාරයෙන් සිටීන }, තර්ජනය, විරෝධය යන අර්ථයන්හි වැටෙන නට ලැබේ. ඉංගිරිසියේ ’’සර්ටන්ලි නොට්' 'නහි නහි '', ''ෙනෙවම්’’ යන්න: පාළියේ සේත් අභාව වාඩක නිපාතය මෙම ක්‍රස් ශ්‍රේයෙද් }කාත - පාළි යන භාෂා ව්‍යවහාරයෙන් වේනස් 0ග19 වන්නේ, පුරාතන අවධියේ සිට ම සිංහල 9ළි භාෂාවල ව්‍යාකරණ රටාවට අනුව සකස්
) වාචක නිපාතය ආඛ්‍යාතයක් හෝ කෘදන්තයක් මස් හෝ අර්ථය අභාවත්වයට පමුණුවමින් මුත් 3ලු තැන්හි ආඛ්‍යාතය හා සමඟ හෝ ක්‍රියාවෙන් වත්මන් ය. නොවන බවක් හෝ නැති බවක් වන්, \පවත- ධාතුවෙන්, (සංස්කෘත \lඅස්\නැතහොත් කෘදන්ත පදයක් අවශ්‍ය වේ. තව ද }ර්ථය අභාවත්වයට පැමිණවීමට අභාව වාචක තන්හි අභාව වාචක නිපාතය එයට අනතුරුව හ} කට වහරේ පවත්නා නැහැ, නෑ යන්න හෝ සීමට යෙදේ. අභාවාර්ථය පළ කිරීමට 'නො වත් නො වේ. මේ අනුව ඉංගිරිසියේ
洽。
යහපත් නො වෙයි
ඉමහි සංස්කෘත වාකාස්‍යයේ ආඛ්‍යාතයෙක් නො වේ. එය නිවැරදි සංස්කෘත යෙදුමෙකි. සංස්කෘත සිංහලයෙන් එහි අදහස දීමට වෙයි (වේ.) නො-" යන අභාව වාචක නිපාතය වාකාස්‍යයේ ව්‍යාතයක් (හෝ වෙන යම් ක්‍රියා මූලයෙකින් පතයි.
66
ܐ


Page 69
සිංහලයේ අභාව වාදී
වාක්‍යයාර්ථය අභාවත්වයට පමුණුවන ආඛ්‍යාතයක් හෝ කෘදන්තයක් යෙදීම අවශ පැරැණි ගත් වහරේ එම නිපාතය ආඛ්‍යාතයක් යොන් යෙදී ඇති තැන් කිහිපයක් දක්නා ලැබේ. ක"-"ඳඊශයෙහි
’’ වනාන්‍යමුනි න ගෘහා, මෘගවා ඉහොම න දායාදව, යන පාඨය සියබස්ලකර කරුවෝ
'' වෙසෙන මෙම නො ගේ මොහු ගහහු මෙන මුව මුළු නො සිය බිළි මන නඳනේ එහි යි සිංහලයට නැඟුහ. සියබස්ලකරේ මෙ වැනි වැනි ගීයෙහි :
'' පිළිපන් දරුණු ළසෝ දලනිදු නො පෙන යන්න ද මෙයට සමාන වේ. ප්‍රතිෂේධාර්ථයේ යන්න තනිව යෙදුණු තැනක් සේ පෙනෙන වල් වූ පරිදි කියැවෙන පුවතෙහි එන මේ ප;
'' තෙපි මෙම ෙතකින් ය.
(
’’ යාටියා නො ව 'යි, 'යාටියා නො වව’ යි පාඨාන්තර දැක්වෙයි. ‘එත්තෙකෙන’ව ග පාඨයක් ද සඳහන් කොට ඇත්තේ ය. 'යමු! දක්නා ලැබෙන බව සංස්කාරක හිමිපාණෙය් ප; සංස්කරණයෙහි මෙම පාඨය ''ෙතපී මෙතෙකින් දැක්වෙයි. එහි ම පාඨාන්තර වශයෙන් දැක්ද ව’ යි යන යෙදුම පොල්වත්තේ බුද්ධදත්ත දී කරණයෙහි යොදා ගනිත්. (63 පිටුව). මෙයි: යෙහි නො නිපාතය සමඟ ව ධාතුවෙන් සෑදුණු කෝදාගොඩ ඥානාලෝක තෙරුන් තෝරා ෆෙ එන 'ව’ යන්න, වෙනත් පිටපත්හි පැනෙන ‘’ මෙහි ක්‍රියා පදයක් මුලින් යෙදී පසුව පිටපත් ඇතැයි සිතීමට ඉඩ ඇත. කෝදාගොඩ ඥ දැක්වුණු පාඨය නිවැරදි, පිරිසිදු පාඨය වේ නම් යෙදුණු තැනක් සේ ගිණිය හැකි. එහෙත් පාඨ මෙහි ක්‍රියා පදය සමග නිපාතය යෙදුණු බව නිදසුන් පාඨවලින් පෙනෙන්නේ අභාව වාචක
ܬܐ .
67

}ක නො නිපාතය "
අභාව වාචක නො නිපාතය හා සමග (ය වීම සාමාන්‍ය රීතිය යි. එහෙක් ඉතා හෝ කෘදන්තයක් හෝ නැතිව එකී අර්ථ
)3.
වාණජ්‍යතා නෙදර්යා න යොෂිත8 }–තන් මෙම නන්දති මානසම්
පිළි0 වරහනෝ 滔一 | තමා ’’ (II. 249). බි තැන් තව ද ඇත. කව්සිළුමිණේ III 35
9කිමිදියෝ ’’ "යන් වුව ද මීට මඳක් සමාන ලෙස නො යෙදුමෙකි, අමාවතුරෙහි කාලිඩ්ගාරණත්‍යය )ඨය :
3)
ගාටියාව නො කෝදාගොඩ ඥානාලෝක සං. 69 පිටුව).
} යනුවෙන් එම සංස්කරණයෙහි එයට වජිස්සථ තුම්මහ`ති’’ යනුවෙන් අටුවා මෙයහි නො දෙව`යි යන්න ද කිසි තැනෙක වසති. සොරත නා හිමියන්ගේ අමාවතුරු ක් යායටි නො වව’යි (40පිටුව) යනුවෙන් වෙන : ''ෙතපී මෙතෙකින් යටියා නො මහ තෙරණුවෝ ස්වකීය අමාවතුරු සංස්න් පෙනෙන්නේ මෙම තැන, ප්‍රතිෂේධාර්ථ1 රූපයක් කිසි පිටපතෙක යෙදී ඇති බවයි සාදා ගත් පාඨයෙහි 'යාටියාව' යන්නෙහි ව’’ යන ක්‍රියා පදය ම වන්නට බැරි නැත. ලියන්නවුන්ගේ වරදින් ඒ ගිලිහී යන්නට ;නාලෝක තෙරුන්ගේ සංස්කරණයෙහි මෙ තැන ද ක්‍රියා පදයක් නැතුව නිපාතය ආන්තර පිරික්සා බැලීමෙන් වැටගැහෙන්නේ යි. සියබස්ලකරින්, කව්සිළුමිණින් ගත් නිපාතය ක්‍රියා පදය රහිත යෙදුණු සැටි යි.”


Page 70
UNIVERSITY OF
*ෆාම් ජෙදෙයහි දැක්වුණු කරුණු අපට දී වි.ජ.මු. ලොකුබණ්ඩාර මහතා යි. මේ සම්බ
අපට අතිශයින් උපකාර විය.
නැති, නැත්, නැත
සිංහලයේ නැත. ආදි යට දැක්වුණු පද ල එයට එක් හේතුවක් නම් නො යන්න සේ දී සැටි උගතුන්ගේ විමැසුමට ලක් නොවීම , විම,සීම, එහිත් එහි ම වෙනස් වූ රූප සේ වටහා ගැන්මට මාර්ගය විය හැකි. ඒ ව පිළිබඳව ද තතු එළි වන්නට පිළිවන. මේ දක්වා ඇත. ඒ පණු සය ම නැත. (එසේ : විචාරලයන් තොර ව යමකුට පිළිගන්නට බලවත් හේතුවක් නම් ඒ පද සය ම සමාන: වුණු පළියට, මතු පිටින් රූපයෙන් සමාන්‍ය ඇති පද එක ම මූලයෙන් සිද්ධ විය යුතු ය. සතර වියත් ගත් වහලර් පවත්නා බවත් රූප තව ද වත්මන් කට වහරේ නැහැ, නැ යන
නැත යන්ෙන් තේරුම ඇත යන තදී මෙයට ඉහතින් ද සඳහන් කැරිණ. ඇත එකතු විමෙන් එය සෑදේ. ඇක යන්නේ ෙ 

Page 71
සිංහලයේ අභාව වාදී
යනුවෙන් යෙදෙන සැම තැන ම ගත් වහරේ න් වැකියේ අරුතට හානි නො කොට ගත් වහරේ පදත් කට වහරේ යෙදෙන පද වෙනුවට ගත් ගත හැකි වේ. එසේ වුව ද කට වහරේ යො යන්නට කිසි ද නෑ සබඳ කම් ඇත්තක්
මේ අරුතින් වැටෙන නැත, නැති යන ඒ වා ධාතු ප්‍රකෘතියෙකින් සිද්ධ වූ බවට සැ වරනැගෙන බවට ගත් වහර මෙන් ම කට වහ ත්‍රි ලිංගයෙහි ම වරනැහෙන නැති යන නාම ද දෙක්හි ව්‍යවහාරයෙන් සාක්ෂාප දැක්විය හැකි නෑ යනු පද වශයෙන් එ වැන්නෙක් නො වේ යක් වශයෙන් හෝ වරනැගෙන්නේ නො වේ. යුතුයි.
නිපාතයක් ලෙස යෙදෙන නැ යන්න සීගි '' –මා නැ බදනො [ස| ග් [ඉ]. සි.
(සග ඉසුර මා බදන්නේ නෑ.) මෙහි නිරුක්තිය නො+හ >නැහැ >නැ යනු අන් කිසි තැනෙක නෑ යන්න මේ අරුතින්
* නො යන්න නො යොදා අභාව වාචක න වෙනක් වාකාස්‍ය යෝජන ක්‍රමයක් ඇති බව මී නොව කට වහරේ පවත්නා බව ද සඳහන් ආඛ්‍යාතය වෙනුවට එහි ඇත්තේ කෘදන් දැක්වුණු වාග් විලාසය සාමාන්‍යයෙන් කට වහ ආගන්තුක වුවක් සේ නො පෙනේ. කෘදන් නිපාතය හා ආඛ්‍යාතය යෙදෙන වැකි අමාව අමාවතුරින් ගත් නිදසුන් පාඨ කිහිපයෙකි ලෙ
'' එ අත්බැවැ බෝසතාණන්ගෙන් දි
ලොවැ ඇත්තාහු නො වෙති. '' සිද්ධත් කුමර........ කිසි ශිල්පයක් , ’’ මෙහි මා කිසි නැ. කෙනෙක් ඇත '' ...... නිසි සිතක් ඇති කෙනෙක් ඇ බුදුහු, " මුහු දැන් මතු දැමුයෙම්
6
'' බමුණ, අනෙක් කළ මනා දෙයෙකු ** මව් මස්සක් නිසා හොත්තෙම් හෝ
6)

)ක නො නිපාතය
xහැත, නැති යනුවෙන් යෙදිය හැකි. මෙසේ | යෙදෙන පද වෙනුවට කට වහරේ යෙදෙන වහරේ යෙදෙන පදත් මාරු කරමින් යොදා දෙන නැහැ, නැ යනු නිරුක්තියෙන් නැත ' නොවන්නට පිළිවන.
පදවල වර්තමාන සවභාවය කුමක් වුව ද කයෙක් නැති. එය කෘදන්තයක් ලෙසින් ර ද දෙස් දෙයි. ස්ත්‍රී, පුරුෂ, නපුකාංසක යන 3දයක් ද තිබෙන බවට පුරාතන, වර්තමාන ය. එහෙත් කට වහරේ යෙදෙන නැහැ, ව්. එය නාමයක් වශයෙන් හෝ ආඛ්‍යාත
එ බැවින් එය නිපාතයෙක(යි තීරණය කළ
රි පදාපයෙහි එක ම වරක් දක්නට ඇත : රැ '' (169 පදාපය)
|වෙන් දක්වා තිබේ. පැරැණි පොත-පතේ
නො යෙදේ.
නැහැ, (නැ.) නිපාතය යොදා සාදා ගනු ලබන ට ඉහතින් දක්වන ලදි. එය ගත් වහරේ කරන්නට යෙදිණ. ගත් වහරේ යෙදෙන ත රූපයත් යෙදුණු ක්‍රියා පදයෙකි. ඒ |ෙර් පවත්නේ නමුදු ගත් වහරට මුළු මනින් ක්ත රූපයෙන් සමඟ අභාව වාවක නො තුර ආදී පැරැණි පොත්වල දක්නා ලැබේ. క్రై:
(ඳුම් ගන්නට නිසි කෙනෙක් මුළු තුන්
( 14 පිටුව) දන්නේ නො වෙයි;....... 39 ( 16 '' ) තාහු නො වෙති.''' ( 27 '' ) ත්තාහු නො වෙති ’’ යි කියා ( 29 '' ) නො වෙම්....... 9 (37 '') ම වන්නේ නො වෙයි.''' ( 54. '' ) }න් නො වෙයි '' ( 57 , ) බී ඇත්තෙ නො වෙයි.’’ ( 62 , )
2නයා වෙම් ’’ ( 72 s )


Page 72
UNIVERSITY OF
'' වෙස රක්නට නිසි අනෙක් දරුවෙ '' තමාගෙ ගුණයෙහි රැඳෙනු යො '' හෙ මෙ පමණ ගුණ ඇත්තෙ ** එ සෙ වන්නෙ නො වෙ '?'' දී '' සතුරහු බස් සබා වන්නෙ නො; '' ඇත්තෙ නො වෙයි, හදභ’’ යි කි '' ...... අස්වස් ඇත්තෙ නො වෙ '' පසුවුවන් සිටුනා අවකාශයෙක් '' දල ඇත්තෙ නො වෙයි.'''
'' පෙම් ඇත්තෙ නො වෙයි'
'' මඟ ඇත්තෙ නො වෙයි’’
'' . . . . . බුදු සස්නෙහි ධන පරිතාන්‍යා{
- - - - - - - - - 2) SoS S** මම් වනාහී තනා හස්තගමෙයම් (
92تG
යට දැක්වුණු සියලු තැන්හි කෘදන්ත පදයෙක් ඇත්තේය. හැම වැකියෙක ම , වන කතීබෘ පදයෙක් ද වේ. දෙතැනෙක හා වූ ආඛ්‍යාතයෙක් ම යෙදේ. මේ වාකාව්‍ය යෙදුම්වල වාකර් සවරූපයත් අතර දක්නට යෙදීමත් එහි ආඛ්‍යාතය නො යෙදීමත් කල්හි එහි කතීබෘ පදය අනුක්ත විභක්ති ගැනී යෝජන ක්‍රම වෙනත් සිංහල ගද්‍ය ග්‍රන්ථ සාමාන්‍යයෙන් දැක්වෙන්නේ මෙසේ ක% වාකාරී සවරූපය වුව ද ඇතැම් තැනෙක සවරූපය ද දක්නට ඇත.
ග්‍රන්ථ වාද්‍යවහාරයට වඩා හුරු වන කථා ව්‍යාවහාරයට වඩා හුරු සේ ගිණිය හැ තැන් සද්ධර්මරත්නාවලියෙහි ඇත.
'' එ බතත් වැළිත් තව පිළිගන්වන නියම කොට වෙන වෙන ම {
ගමක් බිමක් හැර ගත්තෙත් වාලක් සරකක් හැර ගත්තෙත්
(cô. Cố.-
මෙහි යෙදුණු නැත යන්න කට වහරේ අ වන්නට බැරි නැත.

CEYLON REVIEW
'යක් ඇත්තෙ නො වෙයි.''' ( 7.2 පිටුව) සදෙන්නෙ නො වෙයි.''' ( 97 , , ) නො වෙයි. ’’ (100 , , ) යි සෙ යි (162 , , ) ) වෙයි. ’’ (o ' ) * යැ. (204 , ) ε) δε. (216 , , ) ලාබෙන්නෙ නො වෙයි.''' (222 , ) (231 , , ) (242 , ) (244 , , ) ග කළාහු නැති (26l , ) ඇත් (26l , ) නො ද වෙමි. තා වශගෙයම් නා ද වෙමි’’ වදාළො. (298 , , )
) පදය හා සම්බන්ධ වන්නාවූ උක්ත කතීබෘ ආඛ්‍යාතයෙක් යෙදේ. ආඛ්‍යාතයෙන් උක්ත නැර අන් සියලු තැන්හි > ව—ධාතුවෙන් සිද්ධ සවරූපයත් මුලින් දැක්වුණු කට වහරින් ගත්
· ලැබෙන ප්‍රධාන වෙනස නම් මෙහි ආඛ්‍යාතය ය; මෙහි කතීබෘ පදය උක්ත විභක්ති ගන්නා න්මත් ය. මෙයට සමාන සවරූප ඇති වාකාස යන්හී ද දක්නට ඇත. ග්‍රන්ථ ව්‍යවහාරයෙහි තීබෘ පදය උක්ත විභක්තියෙන් තබා සාදා ගත් වරතමාන කථා ව්‍යවහාරයට ළං වන වාකාරී
නො නිපාතය සමඟ ආබාතය යෙදෙන තැන් :කි නැත යන්න සමඟ කෘදන්ත රූපය යෙදෙන
{ට නුවූ හෙයින් වහන්ද සන්තකත් නො වෙයි. පිළිගන්වා-පූයේත් නැත......... වහන්ද? සන්තක නැත. ගසක් කොළක් හැර ගත්තෙත් නැත. ' නැත. සෙසු කිසිවක් හැර ගත්තෙත් නැත.’’ ෂෂ්ටමවාරක සං – ජයතිලක, 40835-4098 පිටු)
ඡා නැහැ, නැ යන්නෙන් සකස් කැර ගත්තක්
7O


Page 73
සිංහලයේ අභාව වාදී
^ නැත යන්නේ සේ ම නැහැ, නෑ යන්නේ සලකා බැලීම මේ ලිපියේ සීමාවෙන් බැහැර වේ. පදනම් කොට ගෙන ඇති වූ සේ පෙනේ. : එය යෙදිය හැකි වේ. ඒ අර්ථ හොදයට ඉඟි කු දැක්වි.
3.
è
මම නැ.. (මම නො වෙමි. මම ව ට ඇත්තෙ නෑ. (මා සතු නූත මෙග් නැ බේඩාරු.
මට බැරි නැ.
යට දැක්වුණු විමැසුම අනුව, අභාව ව. කිහිපයකට එළැඹිය හැකි ය. :
1. එක ම නො යන්න අභාව වා නිපාතයක් ලෙස ද යෙදේ.
2. එය පදයක් ලෙස තනිව සිටින්ගේ
කල්හි පමණ යි.
3. අභාව වාචක නිපාතය වාකජ්‍යයේ හෝ පූර්ව ක්‍රියා නිපාතයට මඟ: වෙන යම් නිපාතයකට හෝ නි
4. විධානාඛන්‍යාතය හෝ ආශීර්වාදුර වාචක නිපාතය යෙදිය හැකි වේ. ඇදෙයි. පුරාතන ව්‍යවහාරයේ: මහම් යන ප්‍රතිෂේධ වාචක නිපා යෙදී ඇත්තේ ප්‍රතිෂේධ වාචක ස් ඇතැම් විට, කෘදන්තයක් හෝ හෝ නැති වත් එය යෙදෙනු අ වාචක නිපාත වෙනුවට දැන් ල ගෙන සිටින් මෙන් මෙය යි.
ඉතා පැරණි ගත් වහරේ දෙ තු විසින් අර්ථය අභාවත්වයට පමු පදයක් හෝ නැති ව එ ම නිෂ් පදය හෝ අධ්‍යාහාරයෙන් සිටින මනා ෙයදේ.
5
7I

වක නො නිපාතය
ක් ද සියුම් අර්ථ හෙද ඇත්තේ ය. ඒ වා ව්. ඒ සියල්ල ම එ ම වචනයේ මුල් අරුත තව ද නො නිපාතයට වඩා පුළුල් ලෙස කරනු පිණිස උදාහරණ කිහිපයක් ගෙන හැර
|ග කිව යුතු නො වෙමි.) ..)
}චක නිපාතය යෙදීම පිළිබඳ ව නිගමන
චක උපසර්ගයක් ලෙස ද අභාව වාචක
ඉන් අභාව වාචක නිපාතයක් ලෙස යෙදුණු
යක ආඛ්‍යාතයට හෝ මිශ්‍ර ක්‍රියා නිපාතයට j එය හා යෙදෙන කාලාර්ථ, ආවස්ථිකවාදී බිබඳ ඇදෙයි.
5ඛ්‍යයාතය හෝ යෙදෙන වාක්‍යයන්හි අභාව වේ. මෙහි ද අභාව වාචකය ආඛ්‍යාතයට ම හි මේ අරුතින් වැටුණේ නහම්, නහමක්, ත යි. පශේවාත්තන භාෂාවෙහි ඒ වෙනුවට එපා යන්න යි. එය කෘදන්ත සමඟ යෙදේ. ආඛ්‍යාතයක් හෝ අන් කිසි ක්‍රියා රූපයක් ඇත. මේ ගණයට වැටෙන අන්‍ය ප්‍රතිෂේධ 2යදෙමින් ඒවාහි තැන කථා වාද්‍යවහාරයේ
}න් තැනක හැර අභාව වාචක නිපාතය ණුවන ආඛ්‍යාතයක් හෝ වෙන යම් ක්‍රියා යොතය නොයෙදේ. ආඛ්‍යාතය හෝ ක්‍රියා x තැන දී වත්මන් කට වහරෙහි එය කැල ම
ආනන්ද කුලසූරිය.


Page 74
The Negative Parti in Si (The following is an English Sul) සිංහලයේ අභාව දි
HE negative particle coo-no unchanged from the time it It has two different usages particle it denies an assertion appe usage it negatives only the assertion sentence which contains a finite ve -kiyati = they say coyo 26.3%-no
**මිසක් කී
නො යෙදී නො සිටී නො’
misak ki no yē no sitī norisi
(Save to some approv He does not go, nor d
111 1121) මිනිහා මුදල් නො ගෙන miniha nudal nogena g the man went away the money.
(2) as a negative particle prefixed to or nominal derivatives of verbal ro existence and is always a part of a = 'not-man; oob8c32-nowiyat = = “not-looking. In both these us times undergo sandhi and its form in or consonant that follows it. e.g.- 2) es&—mīpadi for SzDo ca zaģ—mūs for G2) ceģ-1 3) geờêDzsis—nupuluvan for 25yz2)—nĉita for GO25Yo ĉe 2) — zs).ās — nāvit for Go i

Cle G 3)) (no = 'not ')
nhalese
inary of the preceding article entitled වාවක නො නිපාතය.)
meaning not in Sinhalese, has remained was first used up to the present day. in Sinhalese : (I) as an indeclinable aring in a principal sentence. In this of the verb and can only be used in a rb or a verbal indeclinable, e.g. 263c:36 kiyati = they do not say'.
තැනකට }රිසි විලසට
(කව්සේකර - 5.45) tänakata vilasata (Kav sēkara—5.45). ed place oes he stay er unbecoming.)
-
ගියේ ය. iye yа.
without taking (= not having taken)
nouns, derivatives from nominal stems ots. In this sense it has no independent other word. e.g. coloë2563-no-minis not-learned; Goa) Geziozi — nobalamē ages, the negative particle may somelay be modified according to the vowel
33-110 upadi = is not born. 'o-us - “not-tall'. coogeezi-no-puluvan = 'not able'. — no äta = “is not”. 5z–no ävit = having not come.
72
s


Page 75
THE NEGATIV
It is only the first of these two usages as an independent word, that will be d
This coho-no has again to be c particle of the same form. In Sinhal safe way as Sanskrit nanu and Latin ni surely:
e.g. තද් මෙන් සිත් ලියන් උන්
Tad men sit liyan un kell කිමිදා තුණිහීභූතොසි, නිහඬද Kimidam tuņhībhūtosi, 1 --Surely you are silent** . . . එක රජෙකුදු නොසිඟු Eka rajekudu no-siňguye
–"Surely even a sin
පුතල, මා හා නො බෙදෙණහි Putä, mā hā no benehi ni – Son, you do not sp
It would be interesting to compare this rogative particle in Sanskrit."
e.g. nan vahau te priyah — “S nanu ko bhavan - Pray
In the latter example it has no speci question with an interrogative prono Rg Veda where it has the sense of a s In the Brahmanas it occurs a few times assent (= nonne), not??; e.g. nánu śuś. point of difference between the Sinhal is that, whereas in the case of the two particle is used at the beginning to int. word occurs usually at the end.
l'. Vesaturu Dà Sanné-(Ed.) D. E. Hetti 2. Amãivatura—(Ed.) Ven. Kodāgoda Nār 3. Ibid-p. 136. C. f. also ibid. 162. Öge Es
t
73

VE PARTICLE
, where the negative particle occurs lealt with in this paper.
listinguished from the interrogative ese, this has been used in much the oil-fle, both meaning not? is it not?
කෙළි සෙයින් ව ද නො 2 (SG. W. 2 T3)
i seyin va da no 2 හි නො – නො බෙහෙණහි නො 21 nihaidahi no-no benehi no: –you do not speak?" (do you?) |ෙය නො 22
10 -
gle king did not beg?
G2-5323
02 eak with me, do you?"
s use with the use of hanu as an inter
urely I am thy beloved?'
who are you?'
al meaning except to introduce the un. Nánu occurs only twice in the trong negative = by no means, never. as an interrogative particle expecting ruma, have we not heard? (SB). А ese and the Sanskrit and Latin usages classical languages the corresponding roduce the question, in Sinhalese the
aratchi (Colombo, 1950), 94. Lāloka Thero (Colombo, 1959), p. 45. ජ් වන්ෙන මනමාලාව 2 යි සෙයි. se vanne no ve ? yi seyi
seems so, is it not ?


Page 76
UNIVERSITY OF
This interrogative coyo - no so. usage. But unlike the case of the ne changes to 5) — na only in Sandhi W Vowell 11, the change to 3) — nu in not determined by any Such princip,
නුඹ මට නො කී විරී තෙපු numba mața no ki vir
- Did you not tell අද නො දකිම් නු,6 Ad, - Today we shalls SINGSD3 5.7 Täveyi ni - Surely it will but
In all the foregoing instances, c) - replaced by coo - no without alter two words are interchangeable.
Where in the written languag (a) - illu) occurs, in the spoken one cooa) - novii and sometimes cotions of an earlier form like coyo indicate the possible etymological oi
(Nam) Ruwan Mal Nighantu va, language, listS SCD) — no, CYBOS) — 1 prevent'.8 These would be the nes G3)) — no is by far the most commc both prose and verse, and survives where sandhi takes place) up to the colloquial speech too. zhene - 11 two senses (II) prohibitive and (2) ni used most often with the imperative meaning to the Skt. P. prohibitive sita = P. mā cintayi (Dhag. 293, 22
4. Macdonell, A. A.-A Sanskrit Gra.
53.
Vesaturu Da Sanne-(Ed.) D. E. H. Ibad-478. Hibrid —551 6. Ruean Mal Nigantuva–(Ed.) D. P.

CEYLON REVIEW
metimes changes to 25 — nu in Written gative particle of the same form, which here the syllable following contains the the case of the interrogative particle is C.
ලක් කියහි නු,5 i tepulak kiyahi nu ? me something unusual? a no dakim nu ? urely not see?
# 。 n?
nu, the interrogative particle could be ing the meaning of the question. The
ze the interrogative particle coyo - no comes across the forms SSD pa) — nova; nē. These forms appear to be contracGO C3 — no ve yä which form Would rigin of the particle.
the classical lexicon of the Sinhalese ahama and 3) - na as particles meaning gative particles in Sinhalese. Of them, on. It is found in the earliest writings, unchanged (except in a few instances present day. It is found in modern ahan (v. na sma = be not) occurs in agative. As a prohibitive particle it is : or optative mood and corresponds in particle mā; e.g. SY VOŠ) ESzS) — naham (3); නහම් විස්වැසෙ – naham visvāse =
mar for Students (O.U.P. 3rd Edition, 1950),
ttiaratchi (Colombo, 1950), 66.
de Alvis Wijaya sekera, (1914), V. 732.
74


Page 77
THE NEGATIV
P. mā vissāsi (ibid. 5526); SIDEOS eses. (ibid, 61); නහම් හඟු මෙයි යෙහෙයි
Let him not think that this is good (S. - naham krodhayen pavatva = P.
no used with the verb form in the im a erb derivative in the injunctive, do not take' (S.G. v. 285). There is used with a verb form other than the i
කැනොන් නහම් ගත හෙජ ( känen naham gata heja mi
Though not listed in the Nam Rupan is much commoner and is frequently ti is the usual prohibitive particle used optative mood. Though listed in th particle, 2S) — na is not attested in li occur in the Sigiri Graffiti:
55 o oo3 - jivi na hey න හද්හයි කළ පින් කරය - - . . . because of havin
which (they) performe
It may be worth inquiring if this ha is no or whether it is a separate form corr No is often changed into na or nā whe vowel a or a. The second instance cit basis. Many analogous instances ma usage. This form does not appear else
Another prohibitive particle that - maham (corresponding in form and
ecoe 832 – maham sit නහම් පහට, මහම් පහරා
= P
9. Jāg. 39, 43, 53, 72, 102, 106, 130, 32,
Ves. Das. 49, 64, 98, 149, 150, 184, 25– Sad. Fat.
75

TE PARTICLE
6 — naham pahara = P. mācchupi — naham hañgu meyi yeheyi = G. v. HT8); නහම් කොධයෙන් පවත්ව mā muñca Jāg. I 4o). Where it is perative mood, it has been used with e.g. coc) &9 602) - naham ganu = a solitary instance where it has been Imperative or the injunctive. viz.
මන ගත්නි මුළුල්ලෙන්lana gatni mulullen (ibid. v. 313).
Mala, the form 25)3Szs — nahamak o be met with in literary works. 9 It with the verb of the imperative or le Nam Ru van Mala as a negative terature. Two instances, however,
i = Life is impossible (v. 23) - Ha hadhay kala pin karay g performed the meritorious deeds d without having had faith. (v. 522)
a relic of the normal negative particle esponding to na in Sanskrit and Pāli. in the following syllable contains the ed above could be explained on this y be cited from modern colloquial :Where in literature.
is not listed in the N. Ruin. is ecos) meaning to Skt. mā sma).
a = P. mā cintayi (Dhag. 22337) - naham pahara, maham pahara
macchupi (ibid. 6120) ! = P. mamarh nasayi (ibid. 4620).
l40, 14 i, 142, 153, etc. , 390, 39 I, 412, 458, 20712, 50l etc.


Page 78
UNIVERSITY OF
This word Corresponds in meaning, and is used likewise with the impera wide currency and is not to be met to find again, that, although this is th to the Skt. and Pāli mā Sma, it is Vedic form that occurs more frequ fined to the written language. Evel to have gone out of use after the Po
Although zooezii - nahanal prohibitive particle mā, the latter i Instances are to be found in Sinhale negative particle co - no has been
මා මඤඤතථ-නො සිතා - මා උක්‍ෂද්ඤවාසි – නහමක් අ{
(ibid. 130). මා ච මදයේද - මද නොමක
(ibid. 179)
Both these forms appear to occur are eventually replaced by the negat
The particle SSD) — no thus Cor cative expressions but in imperative prohibitive particles, zooe - nah, mahan found in early literary writ in meaning and usage not only to S mā as well. AS a negative prefix modified form of the Skt. Pāli negat to a-, the modified form of the pre Sinhalese it thus becomes a particle answering to a variety of situations.
coyo - no is the regular negati corresponds to Skt. Pāli na or nõ, former is the one to be more frequ non and English not. In compoun which are negated by it, it stands

CEYLON REVIEW
though not in form, to SIDENS) — nahan tive. It does not appear to have gained with in the later writings. It is curious he form that corresponds etymologically
the other form corresponding to the ently, Both forms, however, are còn– n in literature, Se) S — maham appears lonnaruva period.
2 is always used to translate the Skt. P.
s not always translated by the former.
se glossarial works where the ordinary
used.
— mā maññittha — no sitā (Jāg. IO2) වඥා කර හෙවත් අනාදර නො කර
a vajñā kara hevat anādara no kara
kara
less frequently, in course of time, and live particle Goo - no.
nes to be used not only in regular indiand optative expressions as well. The ahn, 2) coees - nahanak and e3eings is replaced by it. It corresponds kt. Pali na but the prohibitive particle it corresponds to Skt. Pāli an-, the ive prefix na, followed by a vowel, and Fix when followed by a consonant. In : that has a wide range of applications
7e indeclinable particle in Sinhalese. It (though of the two latter forms, the ently met With, in regular usage) Latin ds, that is in words of nominal origin as a negative prefix, the equivalent of
6
7
ہے۔
ཡོད།
ܚܡܫܝܢܠ


Page 79
هنر
THE NEGATIV
Skt. an-. As a negative particle it pr negatived. In both the above-mentio to za — nu or SS) — ne depending upon Where the following Syllable contains t to - nu, where the vowel is -ö -e, i position of ozoo — no, in this sense, is to coyo – no when it is used as an interroga the word indicating the question put, of the question.
Of the usages cited above, the use o
(I) indicative sentences ; an (2) expressions in the impera
will engage our attention. The use of c. tinues up to the present day in both t language. In modern Colloquial usage by the word 2S) — nā, by the adoption larly, in imperative expressions, ecoally given way to epa, in Colloquial usag ment, different to the classical usage,
pressions, the particle continues to be c.
The negative particle, in indicati verb, in the present and preterite tense the verb in any or all of the three perso
e.g. °සිද්ධත් කුමර . . . කිසි ගී . . . ඇපි අප දරුවන් නො Siddhat kumara . . kisi Si ... api apa daruvan no d - Prince Siddhat knows . . . we shall not give ou බුද්නු එ පා නො ගත්හු, 11 Budhu e pā no gathu.
- The Buddha did
10. A mãVatura-16. ll. Ibid.-33.
77

E PARTICLE
rcedes the word whose meaning is led usages, it is optionally changed the vowel of the following syllable. le vowel c, -u, it may be changed may be changed to c.2) - ne. The be contrasted with the position of live particle, in which case it follows and remains usually the last word
fe zoo-ho, as the negative particle in
tive or optative mood
zoo-no in indicative sentences conhe written and spoken forms of the l, however, its place has been taken of a new syntactical device. Simito as a prohibitive particle has virtuge. Here, too, a syntactical arrangehas been adopted. In optative exmployed.
fe sentences, is used with the finite 's. It occurs, without change, with ins, and in either or both numbers.
}ල්පයක් දන්නෙ නො වෙයි. ;
· දෙම්හ. '10 payak danne m0 veyi; emha.
no skill;
child.
(not accept the bowl.


Page 80
UNIVERSITY OF
· පැවැරු කෙමෙනකු දු . Päväru kenekudu - There was no
· රහමස් ගඳමල් ආදී . . Raha-mas ganda-1 - We did not gett Sweet flowers and . . . . ෙමෙලක් සිතින් ( . . . melek sitin (kuma - . . . Through pit
It is often used with the 3g2 5. kriya) verb derivatives, the forms Sometimes call present and preteri It is also to be found in several othe
origin.
Examples of the former usage arc:
නො බලමින් 15 –110 bal 93 G2) a 10 - 1muSu
and of the latter :
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
17.
8.
20.
2.
නො පියා-සිටි17 – no p} නො කට හැකි18 – m0 k **ඔහු කාම විෂය ඉක්ම( “ ohu käima visaya ikn Saying “Let him, not g **මෙ පලගින් දැන් නො “me palagin dän no nä Saying “I shall not ris එ කල්හි මාරකන සාවෝ
@ద్ర0 පැලැඹිය.( ଓଁ
Ibid.-44. Ibid.-71. Ibid.-82. Amāvatura.—6. Ibid.-12.
Ibid.-6. Ibid.-23. Ibid.-27.
Ibid.-3.
Ibid.-32.

CEYLON REVIEW
නො වූ හු12 no vihu. one who had undertaken. වළඳ කරනු නො ලදුම්හ. 13 mal ädi Valanda karanu 110 ladumha. to enjoy the meat and drink, ܢ ¬
so forth. කුමරු) නො මැරුහ. 14 ru) no märuha
y they did not kill (the lad).
jo (mišra kriyā) and gē 250 (pūrva of verbal origin which grammarians te gerunds and Sometimes absolutives.
r instances, negativing a form of verbal
amin -- not looking.
no va - not being mixed.
iya-Siti - having not given up. tata haki - (which) cannot be done.
නො යා–දුන මැනැවැ’ යි.19 lä no yā-duna mänävä” yi. go beyond the sphere of the senses."
ర) (96) මැනැවැ ’’ යි.20 Inga mänävä yi. e from this seat.'
. . නොඑක් ලීලාමයන් හාවභාවයෙන් පැරැදැ ගියො.21
78
ܕܐܟ݂ܝ `


Page 81
THE NEGATIV
E kalni nārakanyāvē . . . no päläirinbiya hī pär:
ག Then the daughters of m 宴* by various coquettish
In the examples cited above, the finite verb or any other verb derivativ
The negative particle is often emp or optative noods. This tisage is, as form to be met with in the Written lang It is attested in the earliest literary reco that G25)) — “11oo.. in this Sense, has been particle, inã of Sanskrit and Pali. “Thi to any imperative form; says Parana in our graffiti, no yan (no. 196), no bala need no comment.'22 Other examp cited :
ඒ කෙරෙණහි මැ මර දෙව්පිත E kenehi mä mara devpit ༢ Just then the god Māra se දෙදෙනෙක් එක් මඟින් නෙ Dedenek ek mangin mo y Let not two proceed in t ܡ . රට නො නසව.25 - Rata f. “පණිවා නො කට යුත්තෙ
මිස හසර නො සිරිය, ද්‍ර යුත්ෙත යැ රහ නො බී Paņi vā no kața yutte yä, a no siriyä yutte yä, m: yutte yä.
Life should not be take taken, evil conducts not be uttered, intox
Parana, Vitana, S. — Sigiri Graffiti — Vol A navatura-l'9.
Ibid.-36.
Ibid.-64.
Ibid.-67.
79

E PARTICLE
no-ek lilāyen hāvabhāvayen dä giyo. ira . . . not being able to tempt him
gestures, fled defeated.
negative particle is attracted to the : which is negatived by it.
loyed in sentences in the imperative was pointed out earlier, the regular guage especially of the classical texts. rds in Sinhalese. It may be recalled employed to render the prohibitive negative particle no can be prefixed Titana, “examples are Very Common (no. 523), no van (no. 3O4) etc. They les from the classical texts may be
ක් . . . නො යා, නවත''යි කී.23
. . . no yā, navata” yi ki. lid . . . “do not go, halt.” 10 යව.24
2W2.
he same direction. to nasava - Ruin not the land. යැ, අයිනාදන් නො ගත යුත්ෙත යැ. යුත්තෙ යැ, මුසවා නො කිය }ය යුත්තෙ යැ.''29
yinādan mo gata yutte yä, misa hasara Lusavā no kiya yutte yä, raha no biya
l, what is not given should not be hould not be indulged in, lies should
licants should not be taken.
. I, p. cxliv. 466.


Page 82
28. 29. 30. 3. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 4.
27.
UNIVERSITY OF
නො සෙසාස්, නොවහස27- 110 $C eo Gz) o8-mata nodah තො ඔහු කරා නො යා39– to ol Gizon). 325a) 30 — no siltava — this ජීවකය, මා නො නස81 –Jivak
මහරජ, නො බව.32 – mahara
නො කට යුත්ෙත යැපී3 – 11O kal නො බව , මහරජ, ෙනවා බව මහර — no bava, maharaja, no bava,
Be not afraid, Your Majesty. නො වෙ ව යි.35 - no veva yi - නො බසිත්ව යි.36 – no basitua • eszno 25) oĉj37 — no karava — D ගහට නො වෙ ව යි ඉටුහනැගී8 – g: Resolved: “Let there be no ගී නො කියව, නො වයව, නො 2 Gi no kiyawa, no vayawa, no na Saying: “Sing not, play (mu මෙම සත්හු නො නසිත්ව ’’යි.40
o me sathu no nasitva" yi
Saying: “May not these bei මෙම බඹ මුල් පිළිසඳට නො යෙව` me bamba mul pilisandata no (The Buddha) resolved: “Le
conception.'
Ibid.-75. Amāvatura-80. Ibid.-96. Ibid. - 9. Ibid.-23. Ibid.-30. Aηναυαίμγα- 132. Ibid.-38. Ibid.-162, 164, 179. Ibid.-235. Ibid.-244. Ibid.-246. Almávatura-277.
Ibid.-300, 301. Ibid.-302.
8O

CEYLON REVIEW
is, no vahasa-Grieve not, be not weary. ava - Do not be angry with me. nu karā no yā — Go not to him. nk. not. aya, mā no nasa — Jīvaka, do not kill
11:16, ja, no bava - be not afraid, Your
Majesty. a yutte yä — (it) should not be done. රජ, මෙම දැන් කිහිඹියකු දු දිවි නො ගළවයි.34 maharaja, me dän kihiṁbiyaku du divi no galavayi ... now he does not harm even an ant. Saying “Be not so." yi - Saying “Descend not." O 11Oί. ahata no veva yi ituhä.
99
21111. 5)○○"3.39 atavaʼ yi. sic) not, dance not.'
ngs be destroyed.”
'යි ඉටුහු.41
yeva yi ituhu. t not this Bamba go to the first


Page 83
s
THE NEGATIVE
මෙ බඹ ලො වැසියො මා නො දකිත්,
me bamba lo väsiyo mā no dakitv
This Bamba resolving: “Let not
නො වෙ වා කෙරෙණක්හි දු - පර වැඩ
no ve va kenekhi du-para vāda
Т. мау not my efforts be, even f others.
The prohibitive particle SzS)ɔ— no ha Just as it came to replace 2s) be - nahal - maham as the prohibitive particle in spoken language, it has been replaced Though a discussion of this word is stric yet a few remarks regarding its usage m epa, in this sense, is usually employed w case of a verb-noun (bhava-kirdanta). Th more with the written usage, e.g. coe while in ordinary colloquial language epā = do not drink, would be more nata ending in — za — nu plus the indeclina form. The etymology of this word is have, however, been offered by scholars.
It is interesting to note that ecoments, with the finite verb or the gramm e.g. oo easo – mata epa - I (c 62 easo-bat epa - (I do
This use is very similar to the use of zo; in similar expressions. 2) – nä or (23
42. Ibid.-302. 43. Ibid.-304. 44. c. f. Paranavitana, S.—S.G. v. I, p. cxliv
** The prohibitive form of exhortation in no the sentence epa unhi tabanna disi we have the ea has now, in effect, become the prohibitive parti epa (for the words have to be so taken in prose ord among the Sinhalese today, and exactly correspo enna epa, karanna epa etc. Tabanna in our gra in such phrases appear to be accusative forms of and epa has thus to be taken as a verbal form in be e paha that aside'; but the syntactical arre interpretation is foreign to Sinhalese, though it take epa to be equivalent to Skt. *hapaya <(*hap epa would thus mean, literarly, avoid placing a
8I.

PARTICLE
)'342
а уі. the beings of the world see me." | මුත් පියො මා.43
mut piyo mā. or a moment, but for the good of
s had a strange history in Sinhalese. n, 2S) to Szas — nahamak and SÐ BOÐ the written language, so, in the
by another particle easo - epa. tly outside the scope of this paper, ay not be inappropriate easo - ith the nominative or the oblique he uninflected form would accord Česɔ — bonu epā = do not drink, the form SadozSzS) eÒesɔ — bonna 1ral. Or it may be the verb noun able C3 or c3 (yä or ya) in a bound
uncertain. Different explanations 44
epa is also used in indicative statenatical subject understood. lo) not (want). (lit. “not for me.) ) not (want) rice.
— nä, C) SD — õnä, and Q) — bä - onă could be substituted for
, 466。
39 a is, however, of great interest; for in brliest known instance of the use of what ble in Sinhalese. The expression tabanna, r) may be heardin ordinary conversation, inds to such homely phrases as yanna epa, fiti and yanına, enna, karanna, etc., used the verbal nouns in -nu (see above 345 g) the imperative mood. Geiger takes it to ingement which is assumed by such an may be appropriate Tamil. I would Jaya < *hapa < *hepa epa) “avoid.” Tababna nd karanna epa 'avoid doing.'


Page 84
UNIVERSITY O
ëso - epa in the two instances gi first one. This negative particle imperative or injunctive sense, and
In all the instances cited so far a finite verb in the indicative, imp not been used with a finite verb, it origin, Such as the gerund (absolut indeclinable particle of verb origin. - karad-di, zoo. 2 - karata) a කරතොත් – karatot, කෙළපොත් – ka
In many languages, the negat Verb remains Unexpressed or unc in Statements of denial, in reply te tions made. Certainly not in En 11e1 atị1 in Pali are examples. It wo negative particle is employed in this usage show any departure from the and Pali ? The question is all the written language, from the earlic pattern of Sanskrit and Pali.
In none of the instances cited without a verb or a verb derivat negative is always attracted to th 'no', 'not or even nothing in S to be or to cxist and the negat the Word 2) 2) – näta 2):3 – nät tained in a boilind form. This \ 25. Pot - nảhấ, 2): - nẵ is Sonnct Sinhalese with the negative part (3 250 b) no veyi (no ve) - it i never left unexpressed. Thus a si
There is coconut at will have to be rendered by
ගෙදර පොල් ඇත, හා(
Gedara pol äta, hāl n and This is a seer, not a

R CE Yi ON FREW JEW
ten above and or - bi too for it in the always negatives a verb noun, in the not a finite verb.
the negative particle has been used with rative or optative mood. Where it has has been used with a derivative of verb ive), present of prict crite, or some other Verb forms denoting time (e.g. 2) og? nd Condition (eg. Zoo 2 – karata, lot) are forms of the latter kind.
(ve particle is employed where the finite erstood. This is especially to be found questions, or emphatic denials of asserglish; na hii na hi, naivain in Sanskrit and uld be interesting to inquire whether the nanner in Sinhalese. Does the Sinhalese 3 usage of the classical languages, Sanskrit more pertinent because the Syntax of the est times, appears to have followed the
Carlier has the negative particle been used ive, which the particle negatives. The e verb or the verb derivative. To say inhalese would require a part of a verb ive particle to negative its meaning. In i meaning it is not, the negative is Conword or, in colloquial usage, the Word imes used to say 'no'. To say 'no' in icle, one would have to say czno ca)3 s not. The finite verb in this usage is 1mple sentence in English like
nonne, no rice
.නැත ہیں۔ dita. parava
82
 ി


Page 85
HE NEGATIV.
will in Sinhalese be
මේ මෙ තjරෙකි, පරවෙක් නේ më tëreki, paravek mo vey The Sanskrit expression
Puranamityeva na sadhu s All does not become good m be translated into Sinhalese in such a m: පැරැණි C5. 3 23 බැවින්ම සිය Päräini ya yi ki bäivin ma :
The original Sanskrit expression does n correct and idiomatic Sanskrit without into Sinhalese without the verb ele3 - – no would appear to demand, of ne
verb) to be negatived.
There are, however a feνν insta where the negative particle seems to h; or any other verbal form performing Siya Bas Lakara II. 249 and Kap Silu M ples. One of the variant readings to in Athlavatura p. 69, may possibly be a
නැත් - nat., නැත - nata, නැහැ - näl
Theuse of3)2) – näita and its varia Still, a few remarks on their use are re the negative 325) - no. 25). 2 - nata ; in the sense of oz)) ca)3 - no veyil-'i reply to a question or to express an em age the form 2) to - naha and 2) - forms. The use of all these negative te than the use of c25) - no. It could be where the ordinary negative particle wo
A solitary instance of 2) - na as a Sigiri Graffiti.
මා නැ බදෙන [ස|ග් [ඉ . . . ܀
mā näi badane ||salg [i]sirä The splendour of heaven
83

E PARTICLE
නා වෙයි. 饪,
Sa Vail
erely because it is old will have to
alle aS
ල්ල යහපත් නො වෙයි siyalla yahapat 110 veyi.
ot have a finite verb. It is perfectly
it. It could not, however, be put – veyi. The negative particle (33) cessity, a verb (or a derivative of a
nces in the earliest literary works ave been used without a finite verb 2. the same grammatical function. fina III. 35 may be citcd as examo, of an expression which appears similar case.
25)2S – täti, 3) St. – tätä, 1ӑ, 25) —nä
unts in Sinhalese is very complicated. levant to a discussion of the use of and 2) 25 - nati are sometimes used t is not. It is used to give a negative phatic denial. In the spoken langu- nä are commoner than the other rms is, however, much more varied
employed in a variety of contexts ould not suffice.
a negative indeclinable occurs in the
]€3ö. (v. I69).
does not hold me.


Page 86
UNIVERSITY O
This is explained etymologically a — no, it is not. With this excepti
2) - nå in colloquial languag few examples may serve to bring which the word occurs :-
es. 25); - mama ni- I මට ඇත්තේ ත නැ - mata මෙග් නැ ෙබාරු - magi SO Q) 5 SD — Imața bär 23)2) – näita and its vari "it is not. In this use, they are tr cally as being connected with Skt. are conjugable forms and the emplc - natat, they demonstrate that the is sometimes a substantive which C declinable in all three genders. As having and (2) the condition of 1 form means 'the state of not being the two distinctive meanings of 'no of being employed in a large variet
On the basis of the foregoing tions could be made with regard to
I. The same particles cano -
as a negative indeclinable r
2. It has the independent statu in the latter usage as a part
3. This negative particle is a sentence in the indicative 1. as the present gerund (ab the preterite gerund (ab temporal or conditional in
4. The negative particle is
optative moods. In these the finite verb. In the ea

CEYLON REVIEW
deriving from no + ha > nähä > nä on, it is not attested in literary usage.
e admits of several different usages. A out the different shades of meaning in
ܓ .
(am) not; not I. atte nā — I do not have. i nā boru — I have nothing false. ị nã – (It is) not impossible for me. ants occur in the sense of there is not, eated as indeclinables. Viewed histori— nāsti and Pāli — matthi both of which oyment of Conditional forms like 25 2925 may be of verbal origin. 2:6 - nati ould also be used as an adjective. It is a substantive it means (II) a person not not being, having. Its neuter singular g', 'falsehood'. As the word occurs in ot being, and not having, it is capable y of contexts.
discussion, a few concluding observathe use of the negative particle:
no is used both as a negative prefix and meaning 'not'.
is of a separate word only when it occurs icle of negation.
lways attracted to the finite verb of a nood, or any other verb derivative such ɔsolutive) — Sg2 6.c3ɔê) — miśra kriyāva, solutive) — gē 3Ja pūrva kriyāva, declinables etc., with which it is used.
1sed in sentences in the imperative or
cases, too, the negative is attracted to tlier language, alternative forms such as
84
---


Page 87
THE NEGATIV
නහම් - maham, නහමක් - are found in these construction — epa is used as the prohibitive of verbs (verb nouns). This h; negative particles which were u. and has come to be accepted a modern colloquial usage.
The negative particle is never e in classical writings without , form which the particle nega with the verb or verb derivati
85

E PARTICLE
- nahamak, and SÐEINS) — maham ls. In later language the word easo : particle with secondary derivatives as practically replaced all the earlier sed in constructions of this category, s the regular prohibitive particle in
mployed, except in a few rare cases a finite verb or some other verb tives. It is not employed alone ve unexpressed or understood.
ANANDA S. KULASURIYA


Page 88
Dhag.
Jā.
SG.
Sad. Rat.
Ves. Da S.
UNIVERSITY
Al
–Dhanpiyä Atuvä Gätapada, —Jātaka Афил:ä Gätapadaya—
-—Sīgiri Graffiti-S. Paranavi
— Saddha jronia Rett nānyaliya—(c.
— esatur l}ā Sarē-(Ed.)

7 OF CEYLON
obreviations
a-(Ed.) Jayatilaka, D. B. (Colombo, 1932).
-(Ed.) Jayatilaka, D. B. (Colombo, 1943). | ہے
tana.
d.) Jaya tilaka, D. B. ܢ ̄ Hettiaratchi, D. E. . ܕ ܗ
f
ീ
86


Page 89
冀
ད།
܂ ܐ ܝ .
An Index Guide to a La Nii-nighanduva or the
as it existed in the
Kandlyan K
of inheritance and the differents
the Kandy period, the Niti-Nigh mode of living of the people of the Kand towards life, in general. The appraise viewpoint has been done by scholars em purpose has been to make a few prelim of that work and to present in alphabhe found therein, and which could form the
B throwing much light of
Although Niti-Nighanduva is saic material older than the time of composi which it is couched is strongly reminisc not seem to be very much older. It con not often found in earlier writings, එකගෙයි රක්ෂා වෙනවා, එකතුපාදාව, උප, දුහිමිය, ලත් හිමිය, වදාහිමිය, දීග පෙළවාසිය, න පැටවී, වසීරුව, සමඟි භායයීයාව, සමඟි විවාහය seemingly Sanskritic, have developed (begetting father) and CoG S53) (for SoG: mentioned with reference to a woman, c of degrading one's high birth by marr the Niti-Nighanduva the term öÖOGenç "distinctions of caste'. zoonoosge) in cla and zooa) gigge) is a woman who of her husband”. But in this work til have acquired quite different connotatic below. Some of these new connotati Kandyan provinces.
87

nguage Study of the ; Vocabulary of Law Last Days of the (ingdom
the laws and customs, the modes ocial distinctions of people during anduva provides side-lights on the yan Highlands and on their attitude all of that work from the lawyer's inently qualified for that task. My inary observations on the language tical order various terms of interest 2 basis of a valuable semantic study.
to present a collection of legal tion of that work, the language in ent of the Kandy period, and does tains certain terms and expressions,
e.g. අසරණියන්‍ය, අසරණීය, ආස්තිය, කාර විඳිනවා, උපසංග්‍රහ, කුල දරනවා, ¥වාසිය, භායයීයාවියක් පවත්වා ගන්නවා, 5. Through usage certain words, along nev lines, e.g. šo 22)CO) Zoo). The term case ovg usually ccurs in earlier literature in the sense lying a man of low birth". But in is used in the ordinary sense of ssical literature means widowhood’
has been widowed by the death he terms කනවළන්දුමී and කානවන්දුම් ons, which are set out in the index ons are still to be met with in the


Page 90
UNIVERSITY OF
Different types of marriage, polygyny, are referred to very වෙනවා, සමඟි විවාහය, සමඟි භායයීයා across expressions like ozooc)3 zo: Getting married in 56 to two w to as Sçebe 25 5-é, a)ếSzS)êDɔ. The te destitute by the wife being separat rarely found in earlier writings.
Words like QvGG (bitch), Ovec already feminine, have been made word-types ending in -i by adding thus changed to DGG, Que&E anc a number of new feminine forms Gea Gasoö seems to have been derive
Incidentally, the influence of T අන්නප්පට්ටු වෙනවා, ඉට්ටන් කරන තුවක්කු, සිල්වාරම් and හන්නාලි.
I have prepared this index of sc that it will form a handy list of ref the semantic development of those I have made occasional reference to Kandyan lore.

CEYLON REVIEW
particularly polyandry, and very rarely euphemistically, e.g. ÖZD GCO3 ózsa33 a). In other similar contexts one comes නවා and දෙතුන් දෙනාට බත් උයා දෙනවා. pmen in two different places is referred rm a 3e3ozi ca)2)2)2 i. e. to be rendered ed from her husband, is an expression
> (she-cat), co ĉe oz.)<€56 (nun) which were to conform to the commoner feminine 2, one more feminine suffix, and were | Gooc)-35. Likewise, through analogy like පරදාරාවි, පුද්‍රචාවි, බැදවි, භායයීයාවි and :d and used in the Niti-Nighanduva.
amil is clearly discernible in forms like නවා, ඉලන්දාරියා, උරුමක්කාරයා, තුරන්දු,
me terms of special interest in the hope :rence to those who would like to trace : terms. For purposes of comparison,
other works, most of which deal with


Page 91
Armour :
Barnett :
Codrington :
Denham :
Dissanayake :
Doyly's Diary :
Hayley :
Modder :
Ralph Peiris : Sawers :
AN INDEC
Books C
Grammar of Kandyan Ata-da-Sanyaya, edit Rev. N. Sominda, 195 Alphabetical Guide Sources by L. D. Barr Glossary of native, fi W. Codrington, Colo Ceylon at the census ( I9I2. Kandyan Law and B Dissanayake and A. B. Diary of John Doyly the Royal Asiatic S Number). A Treatise on the Law F. A. Hayley, I 923. The Principles of Ka Edition, London, I914 Niti-Nighanduva pub Colombo, 1879. Niti-Nighanduva or in the last days of th C.J. R. le Mesurier ar Rajavaliya edited by F Sinhalese Social Orgal Digest of the Kandya A Sketch of the Cons Sir John Doyly, 1929.
89

X GUIDE
onsulted
Law by John Armour. ed by Rev. M. Wimalakitti and 4. to Sinhalese Folklore from Ballad lett, Bombay, 1917. oreign and anglicized words by H. mbo I924. of 19II by E. B. Denham, Colombo
uddhist Ecclesiastical Law by T. B.
Colin de Soysa, 1963.
- Journal of the Ceylon Branch of Society, I9 I 7. Vol. XXV (Extra
is and Customs of the Sinhalese, by
ndyan Law by Frank Modder, 2nd
. lished by Panabokke Tikiribandara,
the Vocabulary of Law (as it existed e Kandyan Kingdom) translated by id T. B. Panabokke, Colombo, I88o. ev. W. Pemananda, 1923. nization by Ralph Pieris, 1956.
Law by Simon Sawers. itution of the Kandyan Kingdom by


Page 92
UNIVERSITY OF C.
ĉi:Sê)—granary I. 3 I. ge 2522 - belonging to, pertaining to අතපැන් වත්කරනවා – to pour water O goes.G ogoeg - to pay in cash IV.I. egzisizē Solo — grand-mother III. IT IT I ; g egzisizoco — grand-parents III. II, 9; IV. eges82 (eesee) – immaterial (prop incorporeal (property) Dissanayal අධිකතර උරුමවාසිය - a larger share ( a zoo &oe) - law, order III. I.4 2. goesoe), eacozzo – legitimate (chil
I 2, 4, II, 56; IV.4 L 8. අන්නප්පට්ටු වෙනවා – to pass on to
become alienated; III. 8 epe; gö302) – the proprietor’s share (
IV. I 53. ĉe3e3ɔ — father IV. I 7. age3.coccozi - through displeasure, against the wish III. 6 I, 6; III.7 2 (92) - reservoir, dam II. I 4. අමුතුගම් S.V. ප්‍රවේනි ගම් aeace - "halting shed', resting pla e C3 - persons, I.2 I, 2, 3; CC30G per
Dissanayake, p. 6. අය කරගන්නවා – to recover V.T. 2. ĉ. 36êDɔ83c3 — claim, right and title III. ĉióEOS@Dɔ — to take away, remove, III. ëóƐDɔ CO2SizS)êDɔ — to redeem III. 6 I 3 IV. 4 I 7; to take away, remove, c අලාභහානිකම් කරනවා – to cause dam ecob&op25c - loss, damage, injury 1.3 acce3 G838) - to be neglectful III.9 de GCO 2Oớ2560 - “to take no pains OV. qGGCô - bribe I. I 5. ope) 5.338) - misconduct III.4. 6; III. I.4. 38e062000&sc3 - marriage contrary t geesozo (gobo) - illegitimate (child) ce)&ozzocco.) - illegitimate children I Hayley, p. 2O ; Dissanayake, p. 1 අවනඩුව - injustice, අවනඩුවෙන් unla
9.

EYLON REVIEW
I I 3 ; V. 1 23. in the hands of I.A. I.
grand-aunt III. I 2 I 7.
erty) II. I I ; Modder p. 9O $7o. - се р. б. f inheritance) III. I2. T.
d) II. 2 I, 2; III. o I; III. TO 8; IV.
the hands of others (or strangers), to 8; III.9 29; III. i 2 I 6; IV. I 36. of the produce (of a land) III. 9 Io;
because of dissatisfaction III.6 I; ; ĉi gĉ325š25Y25) Goezio in displeasure III.7 I.
ce II.I 4. التي Sons L. I II (page 2); I. 2 T 8; III. I 4.
کz__
IΟ Ι2, IV. Ι Ί 2: TV. 4 22. I I I, 2; IV. I 48. ; III.8 25; IV. I 28, 42; IV. 3 T 5; leprive of III. II, 4, II; IV. I 52. Lage I.3 I ;
9; III. I H I 2.
24.
er III. 9 I2.
I.
o custom II.2. 3.
III.2, II, 3; III.2, I, 2; IV. I 3, 5ó;
28. Modder p. 390 ff. $ 226;
78.
wfully I. I 5, 9.
)


Page 93
ܐ ܢ .
AN INIDEX
e;8&oococo - improper wedlock II.3 2. e83d 2002)2)2 - to obstruct, seize V.I. Gēšabloco ao cácę — infidelity IV. I 54. Gregó 5.c3 — helpless Woman, one in lov deó é53 – helpless IV. I. So; Cecco-é5C5) its60 (0a2c25cco) -- disposal (of the celedge - bringing under (paddy) C cultivation as a field, IV.4 49. Se erőc39zi GözY8) – to bein Want, to bele. IV. I 23, 33, 34, 5o, S2, 59; IV.2. I Dissanayake p. 168ff. අහිමි කරනවා - to disinherit; අහිමි ම
III.т.4 2, 4. GiấSŠC3 — disinheritance III. I4 2. Gaga — including, together with IV. I ආචාරි – Smith 1.2 17. Goče-SS — illustration, example IV. I. I 2. ආයිත්තම් ජෝඩුවක් — a suit of clothes l Յacco (c > >) — the arms (belonging t occo coec – during the last days, ආස්තිය — property, estate. III.6 1, 2 II; III, I2 I 7, II 8; III. I 3 4; IV. I I, 6, It 36, 37, 39, 48; V.I. I, 2, Io, 2, 7, 8, ආලිස්සම් කරනවා – to neglect III. 11 T2 ඇතිවේනි කරගන්නවා - to bring up III. ඇත්වල පණික්කයෝ - I.2 2H. ඇඹලැට්ටයෝ - 1.2 22. GÓēcɔ — having been separated, bein (පෙලවාසියෙන්’), 33 (දීගපෙලවාසියේ cilvēç, Svēç — having visited IV.3 3; IV categies 225 ceeo - maternal aunt III ĉevalovčičcio 20):25Yo — female cousin by a m cated to Oc,53 – direct cousin, motl sister's daughter, IV.2 30; IV.4. To gettico ozoo - nephew by onc's siste citate53 ecc33)o - cousin of the first aunt III.3 3; III.8 II ; III. II, 6; IV. estatese. Oneo - maternal uncle III. II ඇවැස්සය) - cousin III.8 T.T.
9I

KI GUHDE
2.
v circumstances III. 8 I T.
2 poor I.3 3. dead body), funeral IV. IT I 4. ultivation, land lately brought under e Codrington, p. 4. ft destitute III. 9 T 8, 19, 2 I, 22, 28, 29; 9; IV. 3 I4, I, 5; IV, 4, 28, 34.
&ced to lose right of inheritance
57.
II. I 4.
o the lands) III. I 3 8.
during the last illness IV. I. I.4.
3, s III.8 II, 2, 3, IO: III. TO 4, 8, 9, 5, 4, S5, 61; IV, 4; II, 8, 9, 2 I, 32, 35,
2O.
I2 5.
g divorced from IV.I. 24.
325i) IV.2 I, 8, 18; IV.A. 23, 28.
.4 37.
T2 s; IV.4. 2 I, 48; V. I 4, 18.
aternal uncle IV.4. 46.
her's brother's daughter or father's
45.
r IV.4, 4.
degree, male cousin by a paternal
4 37, 46; V. I Ió.
).


Page 94
UNIVERSITY OF
ÇOSS 2D ÓSOɔ — to set (a slave) a
a certificate of freedom. I.4 I. FC3SiçõC3ɔ — youth III. Io 7. ඉසදිය වත්කරන මඟුල – the cerem
III. I 4. (p. 2o) උකස් කරනවා - to mortgage III.6
උකහට දෙනවා IV.9 17; උකස් ග ocs debt due on a mOrtgag property mortgaged III. 6 13. Č*ÐS Sê)2S)êDɔ — to die III.9 8; IV. 3 ce5263d 8825)83 - 'to receive assistal IV. I 62; IV. 2 Io; IV. 3 I3, I7; IV ČeS2O)ɔõC3 — assistance, IV. I I 6. ce526,368) 3325)2)2 - to render assistan ce503.oge). 26) o25)8) - to render assistar ce3e3eg) eo ēS)ƐDo — to receive assistai
IV.428. (p. Io7). ce3e322)ao 2 ozoa) - to render assist උපසත්කාර විඳිනවා - to receive assist Cótếò G2O3ẽcò0C0C3 – inherited share I Cotozozooo26 - right of inheritance උරුමක්කාරකම් කියනවා - to claim ri corescoeocos - "by the laws of
IV.4 2.Ι. Cote936).Cô - right of inheritance II
III.I4, II, 4. covebo&c.3 - right of inheritance Il
III. 9 7, II, 3o; III. Io 3, 6, 7, IV. I 4, 6, 2O, 2 I, 35, 54, 64, 67; 7, I3, IS, I8, I9. ÖzDzeboçD 35 — lived at peace with II එකගෙයි රක්ෂා වෙනවා - to join ii common wife, live together, IV. එකගෙයි කෑම, දෙතුන්දෙනාට බත් උර p. 33O;එකගෙයි හිඳිනවා Rajavaliya 7O, 7I. esco o zooooo - to lump together ÖSozD S — needlessness, dislike III. 6 I7 66eod - I.222; See Denham, p. I9C 2639 - boundaries, I.2 Io.

CEYLON REVIEW
liberty, liberate I.3 I4. good alocs
iny of pouring water on the head
7, II, 3; III.8 25; C2) eổ c2S)êDɔ IV.3 , 5; & the land mortgaged III.9 I7; ! III.8 25; පථග්‍රව (=ගම්පෙගුව)
I6. ce from’, be ministered to III. IO IO; /.4 28, 37, 44; V.I I2.
ce, to be of service IV.446. ce III. I 2 7, Io, II. ce from III.8 22; III.9 5; III.I2 2, 9;
ance V.I. I3.
ance III. I 2 IO.
V.4, 32.
III.9 26, 3o; III. I 2 I 4. ght of inheritance III. Io 3; IV. 2.
inheritance' III. I2 18. IV.3 22, 23;
I. 9 Io, I 3, 24, 28; IV. IO 8; III. I 2 2;
. I I; III.2 8; III. 3 2; III.2, 3; III.8 II, 2; 9; III. I 2 TI ; III. I 3 7; III. I 4 I, 3, 4; IV.3 3; IV.4 T9, 2O, 3 I, 36, 43, 46; V.I
I.8 26. in associated marriage, maintain a
2, 2, IO; IV. 3 Io, I6; IV.4. II, 3; I. cf. 30 SO Modder, p. 49 $ 29; Denham, i Ed. Rev. W. Pemananda, 1923, pp.
V.I 4I.
D.
|-
is


Page 95
- ܐܔ
AN INDEX
2DzS)ê)2SigÐ — an un married daughter
III.9 26. (p. 44). zoza).25ige - (I) remaining unmarried IV.4, 47, (p. IIs); V. I II ; (2) li III.9 25; IV. I 25; IV.2 8; (3) not concubinage with someone IV. 18o, 181 ff. Hayley p. 346 ff. - කරාවෙනෝ - I.2 22. 25) Gzoố 3ẽ2YêDo - to live, behave III. I. zoã63 – Caffres, I.2. 22. 25. e3 zos) — daggers II. I, 5; the short Si p. 27. - zoodes 2) - a formally executed deed I2; Cf. Zodieszi Geo occurrin Wimalakitti and Rev. N. Somind; are etée - food and clothing III.6 I කිට්ටුවන්ත (නැගෙයක්) – near relation II කින්නරු - I.2 22. 265e eeɔ — grand-father III. III II; IV. soareea — grand-mother III.8 2: IV.4 a3a ecsec. - 'white cloth III. I. 4; කුට්ටම්වල ඇත්තෝ – 1.2 21. becoacacead – "younger uncle' IV.4 කුරුපසලෙක නැඟු පස් - “clay thrown t කුලය දරනවා, කුල දරනවා - to disgrace lower caste, I. 3 I; II.3 2, 3; III.9 2 කුණම් මඩුවේ ගමයෙj - I.2 2I. SzaĝG GOS) — fisher villages I. I 3. ක්ෂත්‍රිය වංශය - I.2 16. cozzoo - I.2 2I; people of high Ca
offence committed by them. See cOS) — lands III.8 II, 4, 9; III.9 I9, 27; 2o, 22; V. I 6. See Ralph Pieris, ගම ඇතිරාල(=මුල්ගම හිමිවූ ගල්ලද්දු) – coo50 - "property", "lands” III.8 I2 2: IV. I 7, 46 (ගමක් බිමක්); (coeae); V.I. 18, 19. coee epogga - the arms belonging to t coe etzsizio – “landed proprietor' III I3, 63, 70; IV.24; IV.4 26, 28, 43
93
 

K GUIDE
(who has had a child illegitimately)
| (and bringing forth a child) II.3. I;
ving divorced from the husband being properly married and living 2 I 7. See Modder, p. 3 Io ff. $ I 79,
4 I.
inhalese curved sword, Codrington
surrendering one to slavery I.3 II, g in epogeozoico ed. by Rev. M. a, I954, p. I22.
9. I.I I I I ; V. I I 5.
I ÓO, 64; IV. 4 48; V. I 3, 22.
23, 37, 48; V. I I3. Dissanayake, p. 54.
48.
1p by ants' I.7. (p. 4).
one's caste by going with a man of 4; III. I4 4.
ste degraded on account of some Denham, p. 193; Codrington, p. 18. IV. I 8, I 2; IV.2, I2, I3, I7; IV.3 I9, p. 39 ff.
IV.4. 49. 2; III.9 2, 3 o; III. II I (GOSĐ5©) ; III. [V.4 12, 15, (ගම්බිම්) ; 2O, 22, 24, 43
he lands III. I 3 8. ,8 2, 5, 6, II; III. Io 7; III. I 2 8; IV. I ; V.I 3.


Page 96
UNIVERSITY OF
coe cocco - right of inheritance
34, 4 I, 42, 44; IV.3 7; IV.4. 2, , coezoboco - "the landed proprietor
3, 4, 14. cos) czooccòococo - a portion of the 1. 46, 47; IV.3 I.2, I3, I 5, I6; V.I cos ego -landed property, portic IV. I, 6; V. I I 5. See Ralph Piei coe coco - a transfer of land execu
III.8 I , III. IΟ Ι2. coe casioco - division of lands IV.I Oecez58)ớt - “the landlords of Vill Index. p. XXVII. cf. gamladdā pp. 6 I, 66. ගල්ලත්ගම - V.1 23. - coccas - 'the lord of the manor" Goeiểe:Oossa) 25a)ɔ — to miscarry IV. I 5. ගහල බෙරවායෙය් – 1.2 22. Ce. Den Corgia, 3525 Szo) - the Bini married fema ගෙදර පදිංචිව කල් ඇර හිටිනවා - to pa
in associated marriage. IV.3 2 I. ecogge - 'resting bench II. I. A. GCO3S) CO — “family”, “rank”. II. I 5 ge ecog - distinctions of Caste I.2 2 as eleco - rank', high birth II.2 7. có922) có{ecô – “blood right” II. I
8 260 ff. Dissanayake p. 172 ff. 63 ZOZOICO) — the begetting father II. I (ජාතක අය, “පියානන්); III. I2 ||6; IV. I Sɔsê) j — Malay S 1.2 22. ඤpතිභින්නක සරණය - a 111arriage C( තනාගෙන හිටිනවා – to bring up (a cl තිඹිල්ලෝ - 1.2 21. zozig zoozshop - to separate, get rid QÓZsig sê)2S)ê)ɔ — to Separate, part, be III.7 8, II, 3; III. 8 T, HO; IV. I I7, 6 I ; advo - non-contracted liability 1.3 zooe)o - until, up to, as far as III.9 2êD25$2D — guns II. I 5. 556) z5z5 – three kinds of law I. pag good Ceco - nocents I.2 24; adults p

CEYLON REVIEW
n (father’s) lands III.9 25, 3O; IV. I 26,
, 14.
III.9 26; IV. I 7, 5 II; IV. 2, I6, I, 7; IV.4
inds III.8 7; III.9 25; IV. I 2O, 24و 141 و
3. in of lands III.6 4; III.8 II ; III. IO I 2;
is, p. 39. Icd, deed of transfer of land, III.6 II;
8. ages V.I. 23, See Doyly's Diary, recipient of the 625$ çG) S), Ralph Pieris,
IV.4. 49.
ham p. 193; Codrington p. 17. les V.I 6. SS One's days at Somebody's house, i.e.
; III.2 6; III.8 5; IV. I 26; V. I I9. 2.
6; See Modder p. 97 $ 77, p. 485
6, II.2 I, 5, 7, 8.
56; IV.4. 47.
antrary to the ties of relationship II. 23. hild) IV. I 54.
of divorce III.8 I2; IV.3 23: IV.4. 24. divorced. III.68, II, I2, IA, I5, 19;
IV.2 I, IV.3 5, 8, IS, I7, I9; IV.4, 23.
O.
9; IV. I, I, 3; IV. 3 II ; IV. 4 I2, 25.
C T -
6.
94.


Page 97
ANI INDE
ç5 c5 Sc3 — filial right Ill. II I ; I Armour p. 84. Ch. V. 6, 8; Moc 8 293; Codrington p. 12. Dissa gó geía ocaj - children and grand. çado — husks, chaff H.2, IO. tecos - slaves I.2 3, 5: I. 3 A. (geocoa
nayake p. 6. - ge:Oeco 3 — slaves I. 3 I; Sec Modder p. g3©CO — procreate rights II. I, 6; III.2 I IV.3 9, 43; V. I, 4; See ArmC p. 96, 97 8 77, p. 365 S 2 Ι6 H. Γ දැනමිති තැනැත්තන් –''elders';1 T (p. 1); Geo.3 - female slave I.3 IO, IS: I.A. I. (a)ića, — dowry I.3 I 5; IV. I 42, 44, 4 35 25.023) edo — to curse III. 14, 2., Cf. & ico toe - Diga premises (of a daught o Có eco - inheritance by a Diga m: o coe, — Diga village III.9 19, 23, .
IV.4 20. co o gz)öo – to give in Diga marriag IV.4 28; 35; V. I lo; See Hayle දීග පෙලවසකට දෙනවා-tO give in Digal
I, 6; III. I o Io; III. I 3 7; IV. I 3 o, “දෙවනවා III.4 3; දිග පෙලවස්වලට III. Q I 5. දීග පෙලවසකට යනවා – to Contract a J 59; IV.3 19; IV.4 2O; දීගෙපලවස්ව) දිග පෙලවසක හිටිනවා - to live in D; 13;IV.4 27, 28, 3O, 35; දීග පෙලව I6; දීග පෙලවස්වල පදිංචිව හිටිනවා ! දීග පෙලවාසියකට යනවා - to Contract දිග පෙලවාසියට දෙනවා - to give ill
III. 7 I 3. දීග පෙලවාසියෙන් ඇරෙනවා – to be div ଝୁଏ) පෙලවාසියේ පැවතිලා හිටිනවා - to co ĝ5) CO — Diga marriage IV.4. 37 (p. II IC c) CozinJo - to contract a Diga marria c) 3 e - contracting a Diga marriag e) êeDoesozo) - Diga married III.9 2 I, IV. I 3 O, 4O, 5 I, 63, 65; IV.3 9, T
9
 

KI GUIDE
I. I 2, 6; IV. I, 3; V. 4 22, 23 ; See der p. 97 $ 78. p. 5OO $ 263; p. 53 I ayake p. 183ff. children, descendants I. 3 3.
) , 9, I, 3; I.4 L (ÇÃOČộ3) ; III. I 3 Q. Dissa
8o s 63; Ralph Pieris p. I 88 ff.
II. I I ; III.8 2; III.I4 I, 4; IV. I 7O;
ur, p. 49 Ch. IV ș I, 2; Modder
issanayake, p. 18, 140 ff.
III.I 4 (p. 2O), (“අය, පුරුෂ කෙනෙක්)
(ÇCA)&&) ; III. I 3 9.
5.
52go Barnett p. 22 ff.
er) III. I 2 8.
arriage, IV. I 25.
28, 29; IV. I 22, 34, 52; IV, 2, IO;
e, marry in Diga III. I27; IV.3 2 I; y p. I93 ff. Dissanayake, 52 ff. I56. marriage, marry in diga Ill. 99, 12, 39, 64, 69; IV.3 I3, IS, 2I, IV.4. 6; දෙනවා IV.3 7; දිග පෙලවස් කර දෙනවා
Diga narriage III.8 I9; IV. I 22, 24, ල යනවා IV.2 19. ga marriage III.9 29; IV. I I 4; IV.2 ස්වල සිටිනවා, හිටිනවා HV.2 H2; IV.4 [III.9 I 5; IV. 2, H4; V. I 8. a Diga marriage III. IO 8. n Diga marriage, marry in Diga
prced from the Diga marriage IV. I 33. ntinue in the Diga marriage, III.7 I4. ). See Modder p. 229 $ I 27. ge III. 9 II. -
e III. I 3. 29; III. IO I F.; III. I 2, 9, I, 4; III. I 3 7;
; IV.4 27, 28; V. I 4, Io, 16.


Page 98
UNIVERSITY OF
36) öaococ3 – Diga marriage III. I
IV. I 25, 57; IV.3 I 5; V.I. I. CO CSÓ-SHó — Dīga marriage III. I 4 (p goeāzoo - distant IV.2 6, 29. G case26 S-56825)83 - to be married abo 2545.5 - "Sacred Law" I.I. (p. I zogcoa26.22583 - to litigate, appear i zoecoe) - 'the name and lands' II.2. 2) cozoe), 25)(32died - liability, debt IV.1 9 (නයක් තුරඟකට). See M 2.33ceed - "in discharge of the d zoa)2)ege) - "honour II. I. I (p. 14) zoozsgaiolo co - goldsmiths l.2 22; XXI, No. 62 pp. 22 I-253. 232)3032 cos: - while lying on de I 5, II, 8; IV. I. I4; IV.4 I 8; V. I 2 I zot:5zoocöz525)óz5)ë).) – to squander V. 25,833.3 - relationship I.3 I4; II.2 3 I, 3; IV. I 6 (p. 8 I); IV.3 9, IO; IV SDze325 SeO268c3 — relations, kinsfolk III. 25geoggs - 'the free' (as opposed
Dissanayake 6. Z6zsgcoe – IV.4 49 (p. II6); V. I 2 Hayley p. 237 ff.; Codrington p p. 299 ff. 25cco zooco - having made an absc instructions, III. I 3 8; 253C02DC32.55 ( කරලාම IV.L 48. නියතයක් නොකොට (නොකර) නසිනවා settlement (of the disposal of ol IV. I 55; IV.4 2I, 22; V.I. I 2. *S IV. II, 3; IV.4 23, 48; V. I II 8; IV. I II ; V. I I. 25cce) geococoa - a slave proper I.3 4. 25c esoga) - IV.449 (p. II6); "land
the muttettu or performing oth proprietor, grantee, or chief of a නිලමක්කාරයෝ - I.2 21. 25G G2ao - to recover title to (or III.I I 17; IV.4 21 ; නිල ලා ගන්න IV. I Io, 2I.

CEYLON REVIEW
I, (3); III.4 3; III.7 5, II; III.9 3o;
2O); III.7 8; III. I 3 7; IV. I 19.
in Bini in two places IV.2 II. 一、
in court III. III I 3, I9.
8; III.8 II, 5. s and liabilities. I. 3 I, 7, II; III.63; odder, p. 72 $ 48.
ebt' I.3 12.
artificers, Codrington, p. 39; JCBRAS
ath-bed, I.4 I; III. I I Io, II; III. I 2 6;
(p. 126).
I I9. ; III. 3 2; III.8 6; III. IO 9; III. II, 2, II,
/.49, IS, 37, 46.
3 I ; III. II, 2; IV.4 49; V. I 23.
to slaves) I.2 4, 6; I.3 5; I.4 5;
3 Cf. Doyly’s Diary, Index p. LX; 2. 4o; Ralph Pieris p. 6off. Dissanayake,
olute settlement, having left definite කොට IV. I 46; නියත වශයෙන් කෙලවර
— to die Without making an absolute ne’s properties), die intestate III. IO 9; 83 32S)ê)ɔ III.8 3; III. I2, 6, IO; III. I 3 6 උකුත් වෙනවා III.9 8; කාලක්‍රියා කරනවා
possessed on condition of cultivating er menial service or both, for the
village, Codrington pp. 40, 63.
of) a land, come into possession of êDo III.8 8; III.9 I 4; III. Io I, 2; III.I4 5;


Page 99
AN INDEX
653 esçSzs — a suitable quantity IV. I I9. 26e325G258258) — without disturbance III. 646 — law I. I I; see Ralph Pieris, p. I4 නොදන්නා අය – innocents I.2 24. Dissa czooz6C32) e epoc3z5co – the intestate estate නොවෙිරුප් – improper II.2 3; III.4. 2 (p. coo36s 80ozoo — wedlock contrary to escogó2 - arrangements III. I 4. sa Seoệ — III. I 3 8; Pața-tahadu by wil
preserved, Modder pp. 94-95, 73. පට්ටිවල අය - I.2 21. esē — stipend I.3 3. secco)eo - to make presents of V.I 2 esse Sdzssza) — transaction, disposal of ( පන්නයෙහෝ – 1.2 2O. පයිඩෙප්රුව – 1.2 2O. edó ee3e3 — Step-father III. IO 4, 7; III. I I පර දරුවා — step-Son III. To 4, 7, පරදාරවි, පරදාරාවි – adulteress IV.2 3O.
| පරවෙණි — See පිය ප්‍රවේණි and මව්පිය ||
Ι85, IS8. පලියෝ – 1.2 22. පල්හොරු පදුවෙයෝ – 1.2 22. ese02ssaO3 gO2os2SYa09 — to live With a wom; look after, preserve; marry; II.2 3, 4 (p. 16), 6; III, I2 3; පවත්වා සිටිනවා ! III.2, 2; III. 7 I 3; IV. I 2, II; IV.3 4 esêDzsia) o GCO2S) á55z5)ƐDo to live in associa යෙහි මාන්නය ද පවත්වා සිටියේනම් if $ caste V.I. I9. See est8)3225)8).o. egoc good coast - a slave of one's family co8&c.) 80ococo - sinful marriage III.3 I. esoce E52558) ce — guardianship III. III I 4; IV sɔGEIHCI) — guardianship, taking care III. I පාලණයා (පාලකයා) - guardian III.11 12,
69; IV.4 22, 24; V. I 22, 23. 50Š - woman I.3 I3.
.esia)25) éÖSYSDɔ — to be descending from II ܓܰܐ
97
 
 

GUIDE
2.I.
f hayake, p. 6. IV. I I; V. I I. 23). custom III.2 I.
ich family designation or title is
a land) IV. I 52.
S; V. I 9 (p. I2I).
gseé Dissanayake, 26, п7 ff;
an, cohabit, maintain (as) a wife,
·; IV. I 54; IV.3 H; පවත්වනවා II.2 5 [II.2 1; පවත්වාගණ සිටිනවා (හිටිනවා) (p. 92); IV.4 31 ; , Cf සමඟි විවාහය ited marriage IV.43 I, evoc codehe preserves also the dignity of her
1.3 4.
4 22.
I I2; V.I 22.
I4, I5, Ió, I7, II 8; III. I 2 I 5; IV. I
1.8 II.


Page 100
UNIVERSITY O
පැවතෙනවා, පවතිනවා - to contin
විවාහයෙන් තුරන්දුව පුරුෂයාගේ E33Gc3 5. 259 on the dissoluti woman continues to live on t while he is alive, III.8 II. 80es zoo acz)83 - to make over 8o2 cớtecô - paternal right II. I 6;
p. I40. 8C& Có 9298) - III.9 28; See Mo පිය පාරුසේ නෑයන් - relations on 1 පිය පේරුවේ නෑයින් - relations o
(p. II6). 8ccelouce coe - the paternal lan 35, 39; IV.2 I9; IV.4 28; V paternal lands IV.4. I9. 8c3 geSē) é a GOS) — the ancestral la 33, 34, 37, 44, 47; V. I I8, 2O paternal lands IV.4 28; 8c3 ges 8e3835 GE) — madness III. I 2 I I, 46. 8&es - clothes (and) vessels H.I goêDaỗ — a woman III.,4 3,8. Geo6c) -high treason III.6s. SecƏeộ — marriage III.7 III; III.8 II එවැනි නොසරුප් පෙලවස්හි උපන් becoming-marriages, II.2 3;c. | 1 ; දියණි. තොම පෙලවසක දුන්න given in marriage III.4 2. Cf පෙල වාසිය: දීග සරණ නම් පෙල වාසි
· වාසියෙන් ඇරවිලා හිටින දියනියක් cancelled IV.I. 24; @ e36i 2& C5GOzsdes) ĉD3 — to divide amoj
ගමඹිම ඔහුට ම පේරු කරගත් කව්රාලගේ පේරුවට භාර කරග Dingirala dies, his lands will his share, and Kawrala and ch inheritance in them, IV.3 8. Geote) - one's share; division; t care; line of relationship (-ch ලොකුරාලත් කුඩාරවාලත් දෙදෙනම දාව පුත්‍රයෙක් හා දියනියන් තුන් දෙදෙ ඔවුන්ගේ ගමඩ්මත් වෙන් කරගෙ

F CEYLON REVIEW
ue to live III.4 3; 3CO S2SDoS soos 55. ජීවිතාන්තය දක්වා භායයීයාව ඔහු ලඟ පැවතිලා on of a Bini or Dīga marriage, if the he same premises as her former husband -
, transfer, I.3 I 5; IV. I I9. 一ー
III. I 2 I 8; IV. I 7O (p. 82). Dissanayake,
dder, p. 97 $ 77; p. 365 $ 217. he father's side V.I. Io. In the father’s side III. I 2 I 8; IV.4 48
ds III.9 2o, 21, 22, 23, 25; IV. I 23, 34, 7. I Ió; o GOSāS) IV. I 67; og Sê) és GɔS) the
inds III.9 29; IV. 4 IÓ, I 8, 2ó, 28, 29, 3o, , 2I. 8c3 goeë, 58.26 any of the Sécɔ paternal lands IV. 4 2 I.
.
2; Ill.9 9; IV. I 64, 68; IV.3 6; IV. 4 I4, 23; çóGEĐở the children born of such unbee)eš said to contract marriages III.4. 2325 egg after the daughter has been
· පෙලවසකට දෙනවා.
C. - Diga marriage, Ill.I. 4 (p. 20), o ec is a daughter who has had her marriage
ng, share: ඩි. ගිරාල නැසුනේ වී නම් ඔහුගේ දරුවන්ටම හිමි වෙනවා මිස කව්රාලටවත් ත් දරුවන්ට වත් එහි උරුමයක් නැත . If be inherited by the children that fell to ildren that fall to him have no right of
hat which one is entitled to; one's liefly paternal or maternal); (3Geoggo
සමඟි විවාහය පවත්වා හිටිනා අතර ඔවුන්ට }නක් උපන්නෝය. ඉන් පසු විරුද්ධයක් වෙලා }න දරුවෝත් බෙදා ගනිමින් ලොකුරාලගේ න
98 ہیے ۔


Page 101
ج
AN INDE
පේරුවට පුත්‍රයා සහ දියනියෙකුත් : දෑලා දෙදෙනා භාරවෙලා හිටිනා අතර කල පුරුෂයාගේ පේරුවට භාරවුන ගැ; to the care of the father at the t III.7 II ; ඒ ගම අපේ පේරුවේ පුවේ property of ours, III. III 3; 8ce se side, III. I 2 I 8; Sē) GeoőG8Dzs SDoS): ලොකුරාලගේ පේරුවේ උරුමක්කාරයි දියනියක් විසින් නැසී ගිය ඒ පියානන්ගේ කොට්ඨාසයක් වෙන් කරගන්ට ඕනෑ පේරුවට නඩුහබ කියන්ට to appe III.11 I3; දරුවාගේ පේරුවට කිසිව claim to any right of inheritance
seg o SEDzS)ƐDɔ — to come to the share c
go&25coe - ancestral lands, II.2 s;
III. II, 3; III. I2 I 4 (c) SD) ; III (ගම); IV.4 2, 25; V.I 2O (පිය පුද 46; V. I 2I. ܢ adêDeo GeSCSở — I.2 22. See Codrin ae) elega)28)0 - to be barren IV.2 29. aOQSega — goods III. 6 I2. aeace&co - I.2. 20; a term used in the of descent, Codrington, p. 7. බත්ගම් පදුවෙj - I.2 22. See බත්ගම it බත්ගම් බේරවායෙලෝ - 1.2 22. as 5c - expenses for food IV. I 12. බලිබත්ගමයෝ - I.2 21. atc.5 - cousin III.3 2; IV.445. See atcGee)o - menial service I.33. 5. SEDɔE3c) — portion of land III.9 3; III. 5-é, go Sc3ɔ — Bini husband III.9 28. 5és 6825Y83 – to contracta Bini marri
2o; III.9 27, 3 o; III. Io 6; IV. I | (දෙපලක බීණි බැසලා); IV.3 I4, I : 5-é5588)ocozzo - Bini married III.4, 6; III.
III. I2, 9, Io; IV. I 8, 2o, 2 I, 26, V.I. Io, I6. බීණි විවාහය - Bini marriage හායයීයාව, ඉඩමකට පුරුෂයා ගොස් එහිදී පදිංචි is one in which the husband col
9.
 

X GUIDE
කුඩා රාලගේ පේරුවට අනික් දියනියන්IV.3 7 (p. 93). දීග විවාහයෙන් මුදනලද F) çou Sê) za a female child committed ime of divorce from the marriage, 5 g (oecs that land is an ancestral oueê) 25):325) relations on the father's G2G 2)2, a maternal uncle III. I2 18; 250 to the heirs of Lokurala III. I3 4; හි උරුමය ගැන ගමඹිම බෙදා ඒ පේරුවට ය කී කල IV.1 8 (p. 65) ලදරුවාගේ ar in Court on the child's behalf, ද, උරුමක්කාරකම් කියන්ට – to set up a : on behalf of the child, IV. 2, ... . of, devolve on, be entitled to, IV. I 8. III.7 I2 (‘කාරයෙක්); III.8 6;21, 28; I. I 3 7 (c)©); IV. I 56; IV.2. I9 වේණි වූ ගම); ප්‍රවේණි ගම බිම IV.4
gton, p. 6.
Kandyan country to signify nobility
n Denham, p. 192; Codrington, p. 8.
ඇවැස්ස බැදවිය.
[ I Ió; IV. I I 5 (p. 67); VII.4 49.
age III.3 2; III.4 4, 5; III. 7 I 2; III.8 5, 3o, 39, 43, 4ó, 47, 62, Ó4; IV.2. II, ; IV.43; V. I I (p. I I7), 4, Io.
7 I, IIIo; III. 9 Io, II, 27; III. II, 7, 9; 7, 43, 46, 49, 68; IV. 3 I 4; IV.4 8;
ගො ගෘහයට නොහොත් ඇගේ පව්ලේ êe Sé5à, aëëe, co... A Bini marriage tracts to go and live in the wife's


Page 102
UNIVERSITY OF
house or in any family residen III.9 2o; III. Io 9; III. III 8; IV. I : V. I II (p. III7), 4. See Modder p. Dissanayake, p. 52 ff., 16I (52582 5.66366 – Bini marriage III.9 Io, 28
V.I 5. Gazsi Dc3 — division III. IO I 2; IV. I I8 tsɔɔc5àɔēSc3 — wife III.5 II; III.7 I 3; IV. I gas 256cco - right by possession I.43. භුක්ති විඳගෙන හිටිනවා - to remain in භූමි පර්පටක නම් සතු ජාතියක් - a kind egg e2) - festal dish III. I 4 (p. 20); SOợco e3e3 — the five customary festi pp.5—6, Ch. II $ 3; Modc Modder pp. 248-249 $ I 36. Dis eẹ cớte 835363 - Small share of inher මල්කරුවෙj - 1.2 21. Sa ców Sc3 — maternal right II. I 7;
Dissanayake, I77. Sē)8c3 gesê) éSICS — ancestral lands IV.4 &egejoe) - (relations on) the mother 88-52si 8eozscesco - monks, bhikkhu &oeseea - Name of mythical king. ee esoé - (land) thathas become unt and extinction of the Paraveni pr V. I 23 (°eOŠ) es o gêD) IV. 4 5 ( Ch. VI. S. 9; Doyly's Diary, In rington, p. 33. easio 202525) - titles and honours III easioco - dignity V.I. I9. e32s63c - compensation for the trout
22; IV. I I 4. s625)83 - to set aside, cancel, III.7 Il
dissolve, III.7. I4. (58)oeoco 96.82s, scoezooooo - the original proprietc SGS%SSS – entirely III. 13 5. SEGÐe5ē) — the whole, in entirety, III. Seeờ &De3S) — III. 9 2o. C30 KKSD — request, entreaty, III.7 2.
Ot

CEYLON REVIEW
ce of hers. III. I 2; III.7 2; III.8 II, 2O: I4, 20, 34, 57, 62, 65; IV.2 6; IV, 4, 28; 232 ff. $ 128; Hayley p. 167 ff, p. 193ff. )).
, 29; IV. I 26, 34; IV, 2, 3, 8; IV.4 47;
, 4 I; IV.3 III. | 53; IV. 2, 2; IV.3 8, I2, 2 I; V. I 4.
possession of IV. I 2o. of mush-room I.28. Dissanayake, p. 54 vities III. I. 4 (p. 19). See Armour, der-Introduction pp. xxviii-xxxiv; Snayake p. 55.
itance III. I2 I.
Modder p. 97 $ 78; p. 5OI $ 2Ó4;
I4. ’s side III. I 2 I 8, V. I 2o. is I.2 23.
See Barnett p. 53 ff. enanted in consequence of the death oprietor; IV.4 49. (°GS S200Öc:2Sc3); ). (50833c.) See Armour p. IOO, dex p. L; Modder p. 94 $ 73; Cod
..I38.
ble taken or a service rendered, III.8
[; III.8 16; (විවාහය ...මුදා) ; මුදවනවා to b).
or IV. 2 I 7; IV.4 I 8, 47.
) I 7; III. IO 8 (p. 48); IV. I 22.
אל־
4 ܓܬ݀


Page 103
AN INDEX
3285.3 - justification, legality V.I. 2, Is cc36 -niece, III.9 I9; III. IO 5; III. I2 2. Sc30253 25 — moormen I.2 22.
dózseSpƐ) — maintenance IV.2. (°GG5)2S)Ɛ
Goziz)&a to claim); IV.3 2, Iz ජ (රක්ෂාවට සෑහෙන පමණක්). dezoccod - washermen, I.2. I7. රදල - I.2 2O. dea-washermen I.2. I7, 22. 6ɔeśzÐőveH508) — royal favour II. I 8. cốoeś25)ɔõca — services, IV. I 36. See Ha
95 ff. oacázózsco - royal law I.I. (p. 1). onese:25 oz. c6283 - to become the pro goo&oad - I.2 22. See Doyly: A S
Kandyan-Kingdom, p. 74 ff. Geococo-e6 3325)83 - to have near one Il ceo 3325)83 - to be near a person I c 25écs - the right of acquisition II.2 Modder p. 96 $ 75; p. 99 $ 8I; D Gqozo&j-infants I.2 24. cage) - the share received (or entitled ecoz8683 - the elders, parents 1.3 I2. ec326, 255c - "traditional law” I.I. (p. 8-aco – 'caste' I.2 16 See Hayley p. 80258Doşa) — a period of time III. I 4. ĐệośSēc3 — parturiate or maternal righ
III.I4 I, 4; IV. I 52; IV.4 43. See Dissanayake, p. 18; 177 ff. වනම් - I.2 22; II, I 5; Cf. වනන් ඉන
8DzS) SO Ibidem—Index p. LXXXII; 825&cs - penalty, compensation, I.3 I, ade ce2s)&o - to grant permission, be 88ove) - small-pox III.8 I5. Đe3zą8) — property, II. I I; See Modde a)eog) esces)oa) - “suit of clotheso III. -DozSS) — IV. I 8 (525° if it be little). &oGo cq25)83 - to offer or sell as a slav êDoc est Gue3S) — slavery, I.3 I, 4, 7, 8, I Đɔ83c3 — right III.6 I7; III. 8 I; III.9 25;
(p. 98); IV.4 8, 9; V.II I 8; Cf. c.
IO

GUIDE
IV. I 6 I ; IV.4 7, 33; V.I I4, 18.
la to receive maintenance, °đCô2O có |, I 5; (රක්ෂාවට නිසි දේ); IV.4 T4
yley p. 226 ff.; Ralph Pieris, p. 46,
perty of the crown, V.I. 23. ketch of the Constitution of the
I. I2. I, I4; IV.446;
II. I2 I. 6, 8; IV. I. I6; See Armour p. 9o; Dissanayake, p. 18, 98 ff.
to) IV.435.
I)
I46 ff.
nt II.I 7; II.3 2; III.I I; III.I2 2; Armour Ch. V. Ş I.
S3 Diary of John Doyly, p. II, 5.
Modder, p. 79 $ 63. II, I2; IV. I 9; V. I II.
permitted I.4 2, 3; III.4. I.
r, p. 90 $ 7o; Hayley, p. 218 ff. 5 I S.
e, I.3 6.
II; see Hayley, p. I 33 ff. II. I 2 I 7; III. I 3 4; IV. I 7, II, 5; IV.3 2o රුම ° නෑ ° විවාහ °.


Page 104
UNIVERSITY OF
වැදිවල ශය 1.2 2O. 523 e5 25, 202s) a)2 - to sell, alienate, I.
IO; III. II, I, 4, I5, I7; III. I 3 I, 45; V. I 2, 4, I I, I8. 625262oooooo - "claimant', 'disputal 8755.32s, 26c825)2)2 — make a plea, sta 6ziz a Coè 6C32)a)o – to claim, sue
III. II, 8, I, 7; IV. J. J 3, 19, 48; IV 6a)oco co83co – marriage right, III.88 ĉĉjo&) ĉ3c5:e5625$ 25Yo25Yĉjo — to marry IV
Pieris, p. J95 ff ස්ථාර – extent: වැඩියෙන් විස්ථාර වූ aide occa) (50c)oo - to live in intimac III.2, 3; III. II, 8; IV. I 2, 54; IV.2 විස්වාසව පවතිනවා -III.6 17; විස්වාදී
lV. 4 37. විහාර දේවාල ප‍්‍රංගුව – V.T. 23. Cf. J වීර මේස්සර ගොල්ල – 1.2 21. ĉu 35 geoc3jc) esc3253 — by pcrsonal cxie) e»a)25ñ — like, si1milar to, such as IV.4 sazna) – through, by III. I2 II (де by the brother); IV. I 57, 59, 6 S, I4, 2 t., 3 S, 37, 43, 47, 48; V. වෛශාඛ්‍යාකමට පවත්වනවා – to keep a වෛශ්‍යපාවී ෙකාට පැවතිලා - after liv
IV.2 Ι7. cze) (2:3) öajos)(3 – unlawful cohabita Geë)(233 (33 – concubine, II.2, 4, 5: e cêCASO COoeso - concubinage, IV.2 êD38) BOpÓ g2s868 — “customs” I, I, II. gnë)2) 3933 - son who has become ශ්‍රී සන්නස - IV.1 6. C36).56) - honour III. 144. C3ễDges)ê) — assistance, service IV. 3 I 7 cos)398) - seventy I. I. 3. සන්දිය - time III.6 H2; (තුරෙන්දු වේ e325&c.3 - time, occasion, instance. I (p. 32), 4, 16, 27; III.9 г., 15, 29 2, II; IV. 4 I 7, II, 8; V.I. J. E32538) ÉSc3 — relations (collectively) IV

CEYLON REVIEW
3, 7, I 4; III.6 II; III.8 22; III.9 9; III. Io 6; IV. I, 6; IV. 3 I2, I, 4; IV.4 2, I2, 2I,
nt’” III. Io I, 2, III. I T I 7. te a claim III. 8 IO; IV. I 9. III.8 22, 24, 28; III.9 3, II, 7; III. IO 7; .3 6, T 5; V. I. 3, } 8.
, 13, IS, 21, 26, 27; III.9 22: IV.4. 23,27. 3 4, 9. Sec Hayley p. 174 ff. Ralph
larger in extent V.I. 5, 6. sy with, have intercourse with. II.3 I; 2 3O. ය වෙනවා II.3 2: III.9 26; IV.3 3, 4;
Dissanayake, p. 298 ff.
rtion, II. I, 8;
44; V. I I8. වහjදරයාට වෙනුව උපන් පුත්‍රයෙක් a Son 2; IV. 2 Io, I, 7; IV.3 I, II, I, 8, 19; IV. 4 I 7, 14, 17, 18, 22. LS a concubinc, III.2, 4. ing in concubinage (with Sonne onc)
ation III. 9 I 8.
III.9 24; IV. I. JI I ; V. I II (p. I I7), 4. I7.
a monk III. o 2.
7.
52s) coziaco at the time of divorce).
.(p. I) 2; III.2, 5, 7; III.6 7, I, 3, 19; III.8 II 1; III. Io II ; III. II, I, I, 5; IV. I 2, 47; IV.3
/.4 49.
O2


Page 105
AN INDEX
eczeci - deeds II. I. 5; See "Sannas, M CSS soos Spa) — common wife, IV. 3 I 3. සමඟිව එක භායයීතාවියක් පවත්වාගෙන - IV ese a éases soco.08) - common Wife,
IV. 3 I2. cease oc - associated marriage, III.5
See Modder, p. 4 I $ 25; p. 43 $ 26; Denham, pp. 328—33O. සරණ (“කරනවා, °ගන්නවා) - IV. I 64; IV ca) eaches - to acquire a prescriptive ri Estretos — legitimate IV. I 2. Sce Hayle seo. See-5, da CNS) — ancestral lands III.2 සහයක් කර දෙනවා, “කර ගන්නවා – to fi III. IO 2, 7; IV.3 3, 4, I, 9; V. 1 I 4; CO 8: Modder, p. 97 $ 76. cos 3 crooo - “in the presence of witnes coeco32 g occo.25 - a blood relation \ coaezoe) - sufficient wealth, sufficiency, සින්නකොට සේන්දු කොට - having made සින්නක්කර විකුණනවා - to make a tran: IV.4 23; °සේන්දු කොට දෙනවා IV, FR5s ĉeDaeoco — proper wedlock II. 3 2 (p. 3ce - in place of III. IO I2. සිල්වාරම් - a little I.4 4 (“කලක්); IV. I , Egot goez)é) - to disrobe oneself III.9 22)e ca)2)2)2 - to spend much time ove ecểz5*ệ 25)ó cệ2550 - to transfer, bequeatl coz5$g G62)8)9 — (I) to pass on to, bec III. 6 I 2; III.8 2I ; III.9 7; III. IO 9, 12 to, live with, cohabit with: zoeloc has rejoined his family IV, 4, 9; galov cohabited with a man, II, 3; II; V. I I. cioe) - all, entirely III.8 21. ස්ථිරව අයිති වෙනවා - to become absolut EncodēS — II.2, 22; Modder p. 79 63 (Jag Erzsizsɔɔ6 — tailors I. 2. I 7, 22; See Codi celene 3903 - horoscope III. I A. Baada — dispute, law suit III.7 6; III. III I හය හතර තේරෙන ප්‍රස්ථාවට - when a cl
III. III2.
סר
IO3

GUIDE
odder, p. 94 $ 73.
'.3 8, 17, 20, 22.
a woman in associated marriage,
I, 2; IV.2 IO; IV.3 I, 7, I5, 3 I.
p. 386 ffs 225; Hayley, p. 170 ff.
/2 2; V.I. 21. Dissanayake, p. 52 ff. ght. l. 4, 3; IV. I 46.
y 2OOff.
6. nd a wife for, contract a marriage, )ය පිහිට වෙනවා, සහය කඩවස වෙනවා
Ses I.4 T.
/...I 22, 23.
, III.8.2; III. 9, 22; IV. 2, 4.
an absolute transfer IV. I 4T. sfer IIh.6 7; °දෙනවා HV.T. 44, 47; I 43.
p. 17, 18).
46 (බඩු සිල්වාරමක්); 1V.3 3 ( දවස්).
6.
· III, II 14; “මාන්සි වෙනවා III, II, I7. ne III. I 3 6; IV. J 41; IV, 4; II; V.I. I. ome the property of II.2 8 (p. 17): ; IV. I 24; IV, 2, 2; V. I 18; 2 to go up ග් පව්ලටම සේන්දුව සිටිද්දී when he ක්‍රියෙක් කරා සේන්දු වෙලා සිට having
e proprietor of IV. 3 I 6; IV.4. I 2. gereros). Cf. Codrington, p. 2O. ington, p. 2O.
hild is of sufficient understanding,


Page 106
UNIVERSITY OF
80626) 3 coziz)83 - to acquire (prop III.8 23 (මිල මුදල් හරිකර); I] I2, I9, 25, 47; V. I 4, I2, I 9, 2( enedo 266 cozizé)3 - to lay claim to හස්තගත වෙනවා - to pass on to
III.8 2; III. Io I, 2; IV. I Q, I, 2; IV. II, 6; V. I 3, 6. e, boogia boto — master I.3 (o; I.4 4. හාලි - I.2 22. හින්නාවෝ - I.2 22. $o - prisoner I.2. I9. 3o - wife IV.2 I7. හුනුදුරයි - I.2, 22. G&GC3 - cloth III. I. 4.

CEY LON REVIEW
erty), earn II.2 5; II.3 2; III.6 8, Io; I. I 3 I, 7; IV. I T 8, 56; IV.2. II, 3; IV.4 )
(the lands) IV. 4 I 7. 2 the hands of, come in possession of zoo Gozizé)3 take possession of, acquire
D. E. HETTIARATCHI
IO4. سے ?


Page 107
The British Governme States ( | 8
the British authorities towards th
last shots had been fired, and long had been issued, reappraisal of British which received the immediate and mos ment was that of succession to the gadi any male heir. As early as July 27, 18 cern at the policy of annexation by lap Parliament. 1 The Governor-General, mischief created by the annexationist "overscrupulous in doing anything whi predecessor'.2
TE Mutiny brought about far-re
The first case involved in this char. This State was held under Sanads grant and successors in 1804 and 18II. In 18 years old and having no legitimate heir, to recognise Rattan Sing, the son of his heir. This request was complied with gadi in 1834. The Political Agent, Sleet escheat on the death of Rattan Sing, Governor-General reserved final decisio: although he doubted whether even if F right to the State, since Rattan Sing him
২
In 1857, the Rajah, being in poor h recognise his son as his heir. Before Mutiny broke out and a change occurred The Governor-General, therefore, decic Sing had been allowed, "it hardly admi was not restricted to Rajah Rattan Sing
1. G. E. Buckle. The Life of Benjamin Disraeli
2. J. Martineau. The Life and Correspondence 3. India Political Letter No. 2 of 9 February, 185
iOS

'nt and the Indian 57-62)
aching changes in the attitude of e Indian States. Even before the 2 before the Queen's Proclamation policy had begun. The question it serious attention of the Governwhen a ruler died without leaving 857, Disraeli had voiced grave conpse in a three-hour long speech in Canning, also wanted to undo the policy of Dalhousie, but he was ch can look like a reflection on his
ged policy was that of Chirkaree. ed to Bijaya Bahadur and his heirs 322, Bijaya Bahadur being seventy requested the Government of India illegitimate son Ranjit Sing, as his and Rattan Sing succeeded to the man, however, wanted the State to if he had no male issue. The n until the contingency had arisen, Rattan Sing had a Son, he had any self had no right whatsoever.3
ealth, requested the Government to any decision had been taken, the l in the attitude of the Government. led that as the accession of Rattan tted of dispute that the recognition personally, but signified besides his
, Vol. IV, 89.
of Sir Bartle Frere, I, 373.
8.


Page 108
UNIVERSITY OF
accession ... his admission to all rig the Sunnuds”. Hence, the recogni the right of his heirs... to succeed to of the Political Agent, Sir Robert E
In January, 1857, the ruler off his nine year old nephew; but Han In June, the Mutiny having already of India that in order to dispel the the request be granted. The Gov. I 858 on condition that if a Son W. adoption, the adopted son should per month.
Another important instance w I855, Edmonstone had informed F. and the State being of rather recent Sing in 1807,-it should be anne referred to the Court of Directors, nature and extent of the rights of B the Sanad was granted. At this st
was done. 6
During the Mutiny the widow recominended the restoration of create a great impression in BuInd. no steps were taken, Hamilton a further recommended that the Rai the illegitimate son of the late ruler.
Shakespear, who succeeded H course. He drew the Government fallen the State and declared, "It is present time, refuse to allow an adop Apart from the question of political
Hind. Pol. Let. No. 2 of 9 February, 1858
Ibid. Collection to India Political Despatch N
Ha1unilion-Edmonstone, 14 July 1858, Ib Hamilton-Beado11, 7 February 1859, Ebi 9, Shakespear-Beadon, 11 August 1859; 30

CEYLON REVIEW
hts secured to the Rajah of Chirkaree by tion of Rattan Sing necessarily involved the Raj'. So, over-ruling the objection Hamilton, the request was granted."
Dewas had asked for permission to adopt nilton had given a non-committal reply. started, he suggested to the Government tension which prevailed in Central India ernment gave its Sanction on 28 January as born to the ruler subsequent to the be given a life pension of Rs. 4,000/-
as that of Ajayagurh. On 23 October, Hamilton that the ruler being childless, I origin, having been granted to Bakht 'Xed on his death. The matter being they ordered an enquiry into the origin, akht Sing's family as they existed before age the Mutiny intervened and nothing
bd Rani stood firmly loyal, and Hamilton the State. This, he believed, would elkhand and help its pacification." As gain reminded the Government, and
ni be permitted to adopt Ranjoor Sing,
8
|amilton, also recommended the same is attention to the ruin which had bemy duty to state that we cannot, at the tion without recurring serious danger.'9 expediency, there were other material
lo. 74 of 22 December 1859, pp. 13—4. id, p. 3.
d, pp. 5—7. | August 1859, libid, pp. 9—12.
TO6


Page 109
চিত্র
ܓܠ ܐܚܝ .
ീ
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT
considerations for such a step, as Shakes tends to extend our territory in Bunc a pecuniary point of view and it is my clothed and their land better cultivated M any portion of the British poss
province." to
Ranjoor Sing was, therefore, rccc The Secretary of State not only approv this had not been done earlier. 12
Yet another case was that of Hind died childless, the succession was disput brothers, who claimed that the jagir w; rendered during the Gurkha War and whether legitimate or not by Och decided against restoration but on the in recognition of the services rendered should be continued in perpetuity and should be equally divided among the successors remained loyal.
In the meantime, a change had occ ment, both at home and in India, an mooted. John Lawrence, the Chief against it, but he suggested that in case the state, the second brother Ooggu Government taking into account the and also the Hindu Law which did ni cession, restored the state to Ooggur S.
When Tufazzal Khan, a jagirdar the Assistant Commissioner of the disi the Division recommended the reject
10. Shakespear-Beadon, 20 September 1859, Col.
pp. 15-6. 11. Beadon-Shakespear, 9, September 1859, Ibic 12. India Political Despatch, No. 74 of 22 Dece 13. Petition, 18 January 1857. 14. Edmonstone-Lawrence, 12 July, 1858; Ind
India Political Despatch, No. 37 of 9 Sepi
March, 1859.
IO

AND THE INDIAN STATES
pear pointed out: any policy which lelkhand will be found injurious in duty to say that the people are better in the native states of Bundelkhand essions which I have yet seen in the
bgnised and installed as the ruler.11 'ed of the measure but regretted that
oor or Nulagurh. When the Rajah ed by his three elder but illegitimate as granted to their father for services
was guaranteed to his descendants terlony. 13 The Governor-General
recommendation of Lawrence and by their father, agreed that the jagir in addition the jagir of the Rani also m, provided the holders and their
surred in the attitude of the Governd the possibility of restoration was Commissioner of the Punjab, was : the Government decided to restore Sing should be recognised. The prevailing practice in the Hill State ɔt debar illegitimate Sons from Sucing.4
in Thaneswar, died childless, both trict as well as the Commissioner of on of the claims of his illegitimate
to India Political Despatch (74) 22 December 1859
, 13-14. hber 1859.
ia Political Despatch, No. 51 of 30, August 1858: ember 1858; India Foreign Letter No. 24 of 8


Page 110
UNIVERSITY OF
son Barkat Ali and the recognition ( accepted by the Government of Ind pointed out that Mohammedan Law and unmarried wives. 15 The impor no attempt was made to escheat the but merely a jagir.
Following the new policy, the of Nungklow in March 1858 and had elected by general consent as had circumstances in Cossya Hill States. a violation of the local law. 16
Allen, a member of the Board of the instruction, suggested convoking a elect a new ruler from the collatera he regretted the restoration as the territ settlers. The Lieutenant Governor restoration on the ground that the pl pean troops. He also felt that if rest be retarded. 17
The Governor-General, therefor further information and to suggest wh new Rajah. He also wanted to knov disinclination for British rule. 18
Allen reported that British rule withdrawal would be harmful to the spective candidates he considered to suggested that the selected chief shoul under the general control of the P further proposed that the Governme the ruler, if necessary, and to establis waste lands for European colonisation 15. India Political Despatch, No. 37 of 9 Sept.
16. Ibid, No. 10 of 3 March 1858.
17. Allen-Young, 31 May 1858; Young-Allel
II, 11—15.
18. Offg. Secy. Govt. Ind-Secy. Govt. Being 19. Allen-Young, 3 November 1858, ibid, 19.
II (

CEYLON REVIEW
f his brother as the ruler. This was ia although the Chief Commissioner made no distinction between married tant thing to note is that in this case territory although it was not a State
Directors had ordered the restoration directed that the new rulers should be previously been the practice in such
Annexation they conceived to be
Revenue, being ordered to carry out in assembly of all the powerful chiefs to l branch of the late Rajah, although ory was admirably suited for European of Bengal, Halliday, was also against ace was particularly suitable for Euroored, the progress of the State would
e, asked the Lieutenant Governor for at restrictions should be placed on the v whether the people had shown any
: had been greatly successful and its e progress of the state. All the probe cqually unsuitable. He, therefore, d be given limited power and placed olitical Officer at Chera Punji. He nt should retain the right to remove
h civil and military posts and to keep
19
ember 1858.
n, 24 June 1858; India Political Collection Despatch
... 2 August 1858, Ibid, 17. -25.
8


Page 111
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT
Halliday thought that election wo and therefore recommended that the st
Canning, therefore, referred the n Company having been abolished in The Secretary of State refused to reve ordered the restoration to be effected, th borne by the state.2
The Rajah of Dutya had died du 1857, leaving no legitimate son; but be the jagirdar of Bhasma. Hamilton, th recognition of the adopted son on the to a Minute of Metcalfe, one of the adoption. This was accepted by the G
During the last stages of the Mut restoration of another escheated State, India delayed carrying this into executi now replaced the Directors, ordered the haste. As nothing was done, perempto any further delay. The Secretary of S is difficult, if not impossible, for Her discharge the functions imposed upon t responsiblities vested in them by the I mitted by them to India are not prom afforded of the reason why they are no
The policy of restoring escheated backs. Where the state had been un it was inconvenient to reopen the qu further enhanced where new interests value of tenures had increased in con as a result of enlightened British rule. in the case of Baghat which the Governi
2) Minute, 20 November 1858 India Political C 21. India Political Despatch No. 17 of 14 Ap. 18.
22. Hamilton-Edmonstone, 19 January 1858, I Edmonstone-Hamilton, 11 March 1858, India
23. India Political Despatch No. 52 of 27 Octob
IO9

AND THE INDIAN STATES
uld be a matter of bargain and sale atus quo should continue.2o
latter to the Secretary of State-the the meantime-for reconsideration. rse the late Directors' decision and e cost of European supervision being
cing the Mutiny on 19 November, sfore his death had adopted a son of 2 Political Agent, recommended the ground that Dutya was, according states which possessed the right of Overnment.22
iny, the Directors had ordered the Dhar. Since the Government of on, the Secretary of State, who had state to be restored with all possible ry order was sent to effect it without State on this occasion observed, "it Majesty's Government efficiently to hem and to acquit themselves of the legislature, if the instructions transptly carried out or any explanation : complied with'.23
states, however, had serious drawder British administration for long estion; and this inconvenience was had been acquired in land and the sequence of improvements effected These difficulties were encountered ment wanted to restore. One Major
oll. Despatch II, pp. 26–28. 59.
ndia Foreign Control 104 of 27 August 1858;
Foreign Control 106 of 27 August 1858.
er 1859.


Page 112
UNIVERSITY OF
General Innes had acquired and imp Government suggested that the p him the undisputed possession of the pointed out that no such arrangem who had similarly acquired and im equal claims on the Government an lity be seriously compromised by th not to reopen the question.24
Although the Government of I were determined to undo, as far as po of lapse, and the Queen's Proclam: the British Government wanted no had not laid down any general policy anxiety still existed among Indian the real intentions of the Governi feelings among the Princes was tes Bartle Frere. It is impossible," he rate the evil of this state of uncertaint of the states that have best reason to keenly that we have no fixed policy greatly on the character of the Britis or indolent Political Agent may turn and good service." Once, when administration of a petty State, he V young chief has no children. It is adopt. So everyone scrambles for
thing to be had.'25
The initiative for a clear enunci During the last stages of the Mutiny, stood Staunchly loyal, preferred certa Chief Commissioner, Lawrence, whi them with the Maharajahs of Patiala
Their first request was that the punishment on their own subjects of the British authorities, a privileg
24. India Political Despatch No. 35 of March 25. Frere-Clerk, 14 June 1860, Martineau-Bal 26. Temple-Edmonstone, 16 June 1858, India

CEYLON REVIEW
roved certain lands in that state and the roblem could solved by securing to ose lands. But the Home Government ent was possible in the case of Indians proved lands in the state and who had i whose interests would in all probabia restoration. They, therefore, decided
India as well as the Home Government ssible, the mischief created by the policy tion had categorically laid down that further extension of territory, yet the for the future and great uneasiness and States, especially the lesser ones, about ment. The wide prevalence of Such tified to by no less a person than Sir wrote to Sir George Clerk, to exaggey. Even the most intelligent Ministers be assured of our goodwill, feel most regarding them; that their fate depends Agent at their court, and that a harsh the scale against generations of loyalty
Frere expressed regret at the malwas told 'What can you expect 2 The not likely that he will be allowed to what he can get while there is any
ation of policy came from the Princes. the rulers of Cis-Sutlej States, who had in requests to the Commissioner. The le marching through Ambala discussed
and Jhind. 26
y should be allowed to inflict capital without obtaining the prior approval : which they had been deprived of in
1861. tle Frere I, 373.
Foreign Control 84 of 3 June 1859.
ΤΟ


Page 113
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT
1847. The Chief Commissioner recor that during the existing crisits, they v. than the British officers. 27
Secondly, when an infant succeed formed consisting of old, competental of Strangers and relatives. This, als Commissioner.28
Thirdly, they requested that on given the right of adoption from a common ancestor. The Commission right had not been granted to the ruler there was no reason why an exceptions Moreover, if the request was grante excluded from all escheat. He, how that whatever rules of Imperial polic apply equally to these states also, and if come under review and if any adop should be levied as nasarata. 29 Thus resulted in the grant of Sanads of Ado'
Fourthly, that women should b the affairs of state and no complaints fr families should be entertained. The f Chief Commissioner but as regards til as a rule the Government did not ir might arise in which common huma this right he wanted to retain. 30
As regards the sixth request that interefere on behalf of relatives, conne Chief Commissioner recommended th existing practice.3
27. R. Temple-Edmonstone, 16 June 1858, Indi 28. Ibid. 29. Ibid; also G. C. Barnes-R. Temple, 26 M. 30. As No. (2).
3լ լիid.

AND THE INDIAN STATES
mmended its approval on the ground Vould use this power more sparingly
ed, a Council of Regency should be ld trusty dependants to the exclusion ), was recommended by the Chief
the failure of natural heirs, they be mong the descendants of Phool or er was of the view that since such a s of Nagpore, Jhansi and other states, hould be made in the present instance. d, the paramount power would be aver, agreed with the Commissioner y in this respect were made should questions of escheat and lapse should tion was allowed, a year's revenue was set in motion a discussion which ption.
2 excluded from all participation in om the female members of the chief's irst proposition was agreed to by the he second, he thought that although terfere in such cases, yet, occasions Inity would dictate interference. So
the British Government should not rtions or dependants of the chiefs, the at no change should be effected in the
a Foreign Control 84 of 3 June 1859.
y 1858, India Foreign Control. 84 of 3 June 1859


Page 114
UNIVERSITY OF
The next request, that the Gov chiefs under the seal and sign manua and their lineal male heirs, their ter) sidered highly politic and acceded to.
The last request was that claim ascertained in British courts. The action had taken place in British ter. the Commissioner, both, were of th far worked well due to the objection to be maintained.32
When the matter was referred to the Governor-General-in-Council ag the one regarding adoption. They vations in the custom which had a territories and cannot be sanctioned. that the Government did not desire to been always customary in the family : into any special engagement on th Governor-General decided to refer th
But the Government having fo of State without any comment, the la earliest possible opportunity on the re granting the petitioners as well as oth As regards the sanads, the Secretary applications for them ought to be and if approved by him would be Governor-General had rejected the of State felt that in view of their grea be conceded to them. So they were General with a list of the existing de revised; and the Government was t every case of adoption or sanction.
32. Barnes-Temple, 20 May 1858; Temple
June 1859.
33. Beadon-Davies, 28 May 1859, Ibid. 34. India Political Despatch No. 64 of 1 Dece

CEYLON REVIEW
rnment should grant a Sanad to the of the Queen, guaranteeing to them tories, the Chief Commissioner con
against state subjects should not be unjab Code allowed this when the tory. The Chief Commissioner and ; view that this provision had not so of the chiefs, but yet they wanted it
the Government of India for decision, reed to grant all the requests except observed, these are important innoways prevailed among the Cis-Sutle The chiefs were, therefore, informed interfere with the custom which had und did not think it necessary to enter is point'. As regards Sanads, the e matter to the Secretary of State.33
rwarded the requests to the Secretary utter wanted the former's views at the quests and also about the propriety of er faithful rulers the same concessions. of State was of the opinion that all made through the Governor-General granted through him. Although the equest about adoption, the Secretary i loyalty and as a special case, it might to be asked to supply the Governorcendants of Phool, to be periodically levy a year's revenue as hazarana in
Earnes, 16 June 1853, India. Foreign Control 84 of 3
her 1859.
2.
¬


Page 115
ఛా
ܬܐܵ
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT
The Governor-General, however issued by him only. As regards the el died childless and without adopting as careful to provide a successor of his on dying his life, it appears to me quite r established relations between the para that the Succession should lapse to til doubt that the Goverment would in establishing the chieftainship and in itself, but I am certain that the selectic judiciously and disinterestedly made b ation of kindred chiefs, and I believe th as palatable to the people'.35
But as the Secretary of State had Canning proceeded to give effect to it held at Ambala in January, I860, he p the grant of a Sanad confirming to perpetuity and all the privileges, and failure of direct male heirs to adopt a But as regards the issue of a Sanad of he protested to the Secretary of State should be encouraged to look for the i. in anything that is done for them. It Government of India which is immed they may at any time be called upon the fullest powers of representation . British Government will admit. I sti think that when any substantial act of force and Sanctity will be given to t than by its being done by the Quec were also other objections, viz, if the could it be refused to others ? The s of Sindia and Holkar and would be for the request had reference not only to hereditary possessions. This diff smaller jagirdars whose states had bec General's Sanads. Canning, therefore
35. Canning-Wood, No. 9 of 28, Jan. 1860.
II

AND THE INDIAN STATES
insisted that the Sanads should be action of a new ruler where the ruler on, he declared, 'if a chief is so little wn choice as to neglect to adopt one asonable and in accordance with the mount power and the native states he British Government. I have no almost every case act wisely in reforebearing to take the territory to pn of the new chief would be more y the Government than by an associat a selection so made would be quite
ordered compliance with the request, without further delay. At a Durbar romised to Patiala, Jhind and Nabha each and his heirs his possessions in the recognition of their right on the successor from the Phoolkan family. perpetual guarantee from the Queen, : “I do not think it politic that they Intervention of the Queen's own hand hink it very much wiser to invest the iately before their eyes, and to which zo shew deference to obedience, with and admonition which the forms of tongly deprecate leading the chiefs to ustice or favour is done to them, more he act by its being done in England sn's representative in India. There request was granted to Patiala, how anne question would arise in the case attended with still greater difficulties, to territory granted recently, but also culty will also arise in the case of bn lately conferred by the Governor2, recommended that "the Cis-Sutle


Page 116
UNIVERSITY OF
chiefs be answered to the effect that ughly secure under the guarantec an with such repetition of the estimatic are held by Her Majesty as Her Ma Governor-General was also opposed the event of one of them dying child would create a precedent which w anywhere. Moreover, it might be
families. The levying of nasarana,
tasteful, not only financially but als make between the Cis-Sutlej chiefs . adopt without any such payment. 36
In view of the strong opinions c. State agreed that the selection shou surviving chiefs, but wanted them to Government had no desire to aggran Governor-General had informed the t would not be levicd, the Secretary o ordered its levy in other cases. 37
The assurance which was give gradually extended to others. Whil Central India and Upper India, he t declaring in open Durbar that the Brit those States which had helped it duri Kashmir and Cis-Sutlej states it was pli be allowed in accordance with law a at the effect produced by his anno "expressions of joy like those on the Resident that "a cold wind had been b from which he was now relieved.' 39
The Secretary of State, while Governor-General that Indian Princes act of reward, while those who did not
36. Canning-Wood, No. 9 of 28, January 1860 37. India Political Despatch No. 32 of 18, Apri 38. India Political Letter, No. 43A of 30 April 39. Torrens-Empire in Asia, 395.

CEYLON REVIEW
their possessions and rights are thorohand of the Queen's representative, in in which their loyalty and services esty's Government may see fit. The to selection by the surviving chiefs in ess and without adopting an heir as it is not recognised by the Goverment used by them to aggrandisc certain he thought, would be extremely disbecause of the distinction it would ind others who have been allowed to
(pressed by Canning, the Secretary of ld be made in consultation with the be distinctly informed that the British disc itself on ground of lapse. As the hree Cis-Sutlej states that the nasarana f State approved of the measure, but
to the Cis-Sutlej States was now c the Governor-General was touring ook every opportunity for formally lish Government desired to perpetuate ng the Mutiny. To Holkar, Sindia, iblicly conveyed that adoption would hd usage. Canning was astonished uncement which was received with birth of a Princc.” Sindia told the lowing on him increasingly for years,
ully approving of this, Warned the would regard this merely as a special receive this guarantee would become
1860. 860; India Foreign Letter No. 46 of 10 May 1860.


Page 117
"
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT
suspicious and perturbed. 40 The G posed that a more general measure of final settlement of a question, which of opinion and some inconsistencies o mind. To every chief "above the r. ow territory, no matter how small i situated, or whence his authority ove assurance was to be given that the para of territory at his expense and that on allowed to adopt a successor according so long as he and his descendants rema fully observed the treatics with the B. of State approved of this but ordered no departure should be made from th ruler was childless. These decisions W. ruler separately. In case of jagirdars 1 in special cases. "The distinction, th ween territorial rights of ancient date held by favour of the Government of generally granted only for a limited in
intelligible. You will reserve to the P
with such cases as they arisc; and that y in a liberal spirit is the wish as it is the C
G. G.
ment. Further, "It is not by the ext manence is to be secured, but by the c tories already committed to our care a1 we are as willing to respect the rights taining our own.'
Thus originated the Sanads of Ad to Chiefs and Princes. But the Sanads adoption, explicitly stated that no succ nised by the paramount power, which normal succession by the natural heir w before it could be valid. This was an in and practice. The Company, while paramount power had never claime demanded allegiance from them. In f
40. India Political Despatch No. 59 of 26, July 1. 41. India Political Despatch, No. 59 of 26 July 1
III 3

AND THE INDIAN STATES
overnor-General, therefore, proassurance should be given "for the has long excited cotinual conflicts f practice, disturbing to the native ank of jagirdar, who governed his t might be, or where it might be it might have been derived,” an mount power desired no extension failure of male heirs he would be to the law and customs of his race, ined loyal to the Crown and faithritish Government. The Secretary that in case of Mohammedian states e law of primogeniture unless the ere to be notified to each individual to assurance was to be given except e Secretary of State observed, "betand independent tenure, and lands the day, as reward for Service and umber of generations, is broad and 'aramount state the right of dealing our recommendations will be framed onviction of Her Majesty's GovernIension of our Empire, that its perharacter of British rule in the terrild by practically demonstrating that of others as we are capable of main
option which were separately issued
while giving the rulers the right of ession Would be Valid unless recogin other words meant that even a ould, in future, have to be sanctioned mportant departure from past theory
exercising all the prerogatives of sovereignty over the States nor act a commercial concern could not
860.
860.


Page 118
UNIVERSITY OF
do either. Although the Compan in regulating succession when its int that normal successions required i stressed in the Queen's Proclamati by the Sanads of Adoption.
In this place, it must be pointec issued not merely to reward the Pril a hint of the real motive was given General. "The safety of our rule maintenance of native chiefs well aff India shall be threatened by an ext England elsewhere may require tha than ordinary risk, one of our mainst
Canning was more explicit a1. to Sir John Low. "I was not able to been public, all the reason that conc mended...
"A war in which France and R an internal convulsion of the most in order while there is yet time. A treat our native fellow subjects and inducement to intrigue against us, to to gain, but much to lose, by ever India, and so to bring them into th connes, we may safely throw the r maintaining their fidelity with a n army.
"When the day of danger com to do outside India. 43
The staunch loyalty shown and Indian rulers during the Mutiny a cognition by the Government. No of the Mutiny reached England the
42. Minute, 30 April 1860. Torrens-Empi 43. Ursula Low-Fifty Years with the John

CEYLON REVIEW
I had, on various occasions, interfered rests demanded it, it had never asserted S sanction. The new relationship as in was thus given practical expression
ܪܵ”
out that the Sanads of Adoption were ces or to rectify a past injustice. Only in the official minute of the Governoris increased, not diminished, by the Cted to us. Should the day come when ernal enemy, or when the interests of ther Eastern Empire shall incur more lys will be found in the Native States.”42
d frank in his private communication put into a despatch, which might have uce to the policy which I have recom
ussia should be against us would bring perilous kind, unless we set our house nd the Surest Way of doing this is so to the native Princes as to give them no convince them that they have nothing y change in the Paramount Power in at temper in which, when the danger sins on their necks, and trust to their ninimum of support from an English
es, our English army will have enough
the signal services rendered by various lso called for some sort of special resooner had the news of the suppression in the Directors had on 28 July, I858.
re in Asia, 358. Company, 401-2.
II6


Page 119
|-
"
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT A
asked the Governor-General to furnish whom the Government was indebted, . rewarded. But before the Government ceased to exist and the Secretary of State O in addition, reports about th The home authorities were anxious to any undue delay less it would create mis
Meanwhile, Queen Victoria herse question of bestowing honours on th Government and the assumption of par. States, whose rulers were henceforth to Crown, had in theory created a new Company had exercised all the rights o the Indian Princes as protected vassals, y composed of British subjects, it could r sovereignty as the Crown did, nor cou honours on chiefs and Princes of India. wrote to Canning "for the foundation of means of gratifying the personal feelings princes, binding them together in a cor a personal tie to the sovereign'. This sh she takes a personal interest. The St she thought, might be similar to those St. Patrick, the number of awards being r was to be the Grand Master and the Q The Viceroy was to invest the recipients personal homage. When a new memb done on the anniversary of the assumptio –all the other existing members Wert further wished to Confer honorary knig the Shah of Persia, the King of Nepal a
influence over them.45
Canning thought that since honou ciated with substantial gifts in land or bestowal of titles would be appreciated. question and found much diversity of
4. History of India. 45. Queen-Canning, 18 May 1859; Theodore M
II 7

ND THE INDIAN STATES
them with a list of the Princes to und to suggest how they should be 's reply arrived, the Company had : now asked the Governor-General ne Nizam, Sindia and Salar Jung. express their appreciation without trust.44
lf had become interested in the e loyal Princes. The change of amountcy by the Crown over the be loyal in their allegiance to the situation. Because, although the if a paramount power and treated et being a Company of merchants ever assume the same position of ld it claim the right of bestowing So as early as May, I859, the Queen i a high Order of Chivalry” as "the of the chief number of the native fraternity, and attaching them by e declared to be "a subject in which atute establishing the new Order, of the Garter, the Thistle, and the estricted to 20 or 24. The Viceroy lucen the Sovereign of the Order. in person and they were to do him er Was invested–Which Was to be in of the government by the Queen 2 to be summoned. The Queen hthoods on Eastern potentates like ind others as a means of extending
rs in India had hitherto been assomoney, it was doubtful if mere He consulted leading men on the opinion. He, therefore, suggested
artin-Life of the Prince Consort, IV, 438-9.


Page 120
UNIVERSITY OF
that a high Order of Knighthood as the Sovereign to which the Prin should be admitted. Twenty he Princes being made honorary in distance, mutual jealousies, risk o difficulty of satisfying ceremonial assemble existing members togeth He also suggested that Englishmen on a limited scale as that would h Indians.46
In this last suggestion Canning Outram, a member of his Coun elevation of Indians to peerage an prepared to go so far.
Meanwhile the matter had bec1 The occasion was provided by the sioner of Oudh for the conferment thala, especially as he possessed a hi a knowledge of English language of English honours. The Goveri gestion was of the View that a K.C. Prince. The Secretary of State al but in view of the importance wh bestowed by the Crown and being asked the Government of India to S
The Governor-General replied closely to the precise Titles already think it advisable ** to attempt to inv and value of old ones'. He also de rules as the same title meant differ current in certain parts were unkn he observed, “as regards native Titl be understood to assume to itselfth trust heretofore claimed by the E
46. Canning-Queen, 4 July, 1859; Martin47. Minute, 28 June, 1859; F. J. Goldsmid 48. India Political Despatch, No. 54 of 8 N.

CEYION REVIEW
should be established with the Queen ces and Chiefs of high distinction Only considered a sufficient number, foreign hembers. He, however, thought that f quarrel among the retainers and the courtesy would make it difficult to er for the admission of new members. should be admitted to the new Order elp to raise its dignity in the eyes of
was fully backed, if not influenced, by cil. Outram had even advocated the d baronetcy.47 But Canning was not
taken up officially by the Government. recommendation of the Chief Commisof K.C.B. on the Maharajah of Kapurgh degree of Western culture including and institutions and a high appreciation nor-Gencral, While favouring the SugB. could not be conferred on an Indian so disapproved of the recommendation, ich Indian Princes attached to honours desirous to keep alive that feeling, he uggest how best this could be effected.48
that "it will be the best policy to adhere in use throughout India'. He did not est new Titles or to modify the meaning precated the introduction of any general rently in different parts and some titles own in others. "All that is necessary, es is, that the Crown of England should le authority and to invest itself with the imperors of Hindoostan, over all their
-Prince Consort, IV, 440.
—James Outram, II, 348-9. ovember, 1859.
II8
3ܢܓ
-- ܓܠ ܐ
-
ܐ ܢ .


Page 121
ܨܠ
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT
subjects and vassals, whether Mahomm should be exercised by the Crown's F has always been exercised by the Govel of all the rightful holders of the Titles of dia. In short, that as little chang practice which is already established exc formal and authoritative record of Ti than any which at present exists.'49
Canning was against hereditary princely families and the absence of a also opposed to attaching land or mc intermixture of Eastern and Western hoods (unconnected with any order) Ba which are adapted to the Laws, Governi will not be grafted into our Indian sys 'Sir' and "Lord' will not be prefixed to of the incongruity of the conjunction, to denationalise India, and assuredly to class, would wear the appearance of would be a 'sounder course, and more people at large, if the Crown of Engla and shews respect for Titles, and designa and under various dynasties, prevailed til its representative, to make manifest th their dignity under the Crown's direct and justly dispensed'.50
Canning wanted the rules to be as view of the Governor of Madras that tization. He also accepted the suggest should be awarded with the previous This was not meant to be a check on recommendations were likely to be acc desirable that all titles should be deriv source 'should be as near to the fountain provided'.51
49. Ibid. 50. Governor-General-Secretary of State (For.) 51. Ibid.
II 9

AND THE INDIAN STATES
edan or Hindoo; but this authority epresentative in India, as in fact it nor-General and that an official roll should be kept by the Government e as possible should be made in the epting in the preservation of a more tles actually recognised or granted
itles, because of the decadence of ny law of primogeniture. He was oney to titles, and hoped that "no Titles will take place, that Knightronetages, Baronics and other Titles ment and Social condition of England tem, and that the English styles of Indian names.' 'To say nothing he added, "it is not our true object create a new aristocracy, or titled desiring this.' He believed that it : consonant... with the feeling of the nd as the Paramount Power accepts tions which have for many centuries hrough India, and is careful, through at these Titles shall lose nothing of rule, and that they will be worthily
few as possible and agreed with the there should be no over-systemaion of Trevelyan that all local titles sanction of the Governor-General. the provincial Governments, whose epted in all cases, but because it was red from the same source and that of all honour as can be conveniently
No. 27 of December, 1859.


Page 122
UNIVERSITY OF
He, therefore, recommended Knighthood, ofa single class, limite to a fixed rule, between Englishme the Queen, who by good and loyal in India had deserved well of the 'should consist of I2 to Is Indians more than 1/3 of the English memb time. This was necessary to guard; at once, the result of which would conditions of service, all the Europe there would be no Englishmen left ir death among those who had return to be avoided as far as possible an Englishmen holding the same honc only persons of the highest rank sho
Besides the more important P. ministers and officers of States, w whom also recognition had to be recommended the institution of a s but only after the higher one had b. would be diminished and it would cheaply given. This lower Ordet grades, the number of each being Europeans alike. There was, how to any of them.53
The Queen objected to giving matter. The highest dignities and proceed directly from the Crown "where Princes (as we may hope wi become Christians, the hereditary held'.54 The exact title of the new Sir Frederick Currie and Sir John L. of experience suggested "The Star "The Eastern Star of Honour.” Wood that it was necessary to cor
52. Governor-General-Secretary of State (F
53. Ibid.
54. Queen-Canning, 9 February, 1860; Lc
493–4。

CEYLON REVIEW
the establishment of "a high order of in number, and that divided according in and Indian subjects, or feudatories of
service rendered to the British Empire Crown.” “The Order,’ he suggested, and not less than 12 Englishmen. Not ers should be serving the Crown at any against a filling up of the whole number i be that in a few years, owing to the an recipients would have left India, and the country until vacancies occurred by ed home with such honours. This was d the chiefs were to have before them ur. Canning was also of opinion that
ould be eligible for the title. 52
rinces, there were other chiefs, officers, vealthy landowncrS and proprietorS to
extended. So, the Governor-General eparate order of a more general scope, een well established; otherwise its value be thought that honours were being was to be divided into at least two limited and being open to Indians and aver, to be no pecuniary award attached
the Viceroy "illimited power' in this
titles, she firmly declared, "ought to ” She also expressed the view that ill be the case sometimes hereafter) have nature of honours should not be withOrder created a good deal of difficulty. awrence after consulting leading Indians of Honour of England and India' or Canning pointed out to Sir Charles me to a quick decision on this matter.
or.) No. 27 of 24 December, 1859.
"tters of Queen Victoria, Ed. Benson and Isher, III,
2O


Page 123
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT
At this stage Prince Albert became ir referred the question of designation to
The Prince preferred the latter but coged from the French Legion of Hor preciate other British honours. Napo Honour for an aristocracy which the meant it to be the only honour for Fr. gested were the denominations of the the Order. He suggested having Orde had an Order of the North Star. This he explained: "The Eastern Star precec when they did homage to the Infant Ch. of dawning Chritianity.” Further, peculiar to that portion of the Middle A with Easter custom in the Crusades. A and it is in the feelings of those days ( India) that we must look for inspiratic of the model and how the new Orders to be included as 'Emblem of Peace while he ruled out the Lotus as exclusi by the Mohammedians.50
Canning objected to the designati Hindusthani eduivalent of Eastern Star, and Poorbeah was a generic name for the eastern part of India and during mutineers. But the main objection was from the east, the less was he respected paragement. Frere held the same view
So, a battle royal raged over the nal like Western Star, Celestial Star, The S suggested only to be rejected. There w; of India and England, but the Lord Ch; ground that this would exclude Scotla unfair to Dalhousie and many others.58
55. Wood-Prince, 15 May 1860; Martin, IV, 1C 56. Prince Consort-Wood, 16 May, 1860; Mart
57. Canning-Wood, 3 November, 1860; Ibid, 58. Martin, IV, 10-4.
2I

AND THE INDIAN STATES
terested in the subject and Wood im.55
felt that both seemed to have been our. This, he thought, would de
leon had intended the Legion of Revolution had abolished and he inchmen. Further, the names SugDecoration rather than the name of of the Eastern Star, just as Sweden had a special attraction for him as led the Three Kings or Wise Men, ist and may be taken as the emblem "The Orders of Knighthood are ges, when Christian chivalry mixed ll later Orders are mere imitations, not inapplicable to our position in ons.” The Prince also gave details hould work. He wanted the dove (for us, that of the Holy Ghost)." vely Hindu, and not acknowledged
on suggested by the Prince. The he pointed out was Poorbeah Sittara, Sepoys, most of whom came from the Mutiny was used to designate that in India, the further one came
, and Poorbeah was a word of dis
57
me of the new Order. Alternatives tar of Peace and British Star were as general agreement about The Star incellor, Campbell, objected on the nd and Ireland and that would be
1. n, IV, 101-3. 04.


Page 124
UNIVERSITY OF
The selection of a new name Prince in despair wrote to Wood, and name of a house at Toplitz—th against a rock, with the title of “Ti
At last on February 23, 1861, India' was established and most regarding its insignia were accept knights, both European and Indian, Sovereign as the Grand Master. T on I November 1861, the recipie Clyde, Sir John Lawrence, General
Apart from bestowing hono rewards was also taken up. The l the Durbar held at Benares, were g enjoyed before. But it was disti granted personally to them and Wol or representatives. The Secretary observed, "It is desirable that all tra though it would be ungenerous ta the offences committed by their kiu as policy in prolonging the existen than you are necessitated to do so E
To reward Sindia for his loya mutineers and perhaps to soothe the adopted, the Government of India Jhansi. The Government also wal to lay down the basis of a new a were03 to provide against the neces: to make such exchanges and transf reward for him and at the same time
59. Prince Consort-Wood, 9 January, 1861 60. Martin, IV, fun. 104. 61. Martin, IV, 441.
62. India Foreign Letter, No. 2 of 20 Dece
March, 1860.
63. India Foreign Letter, No. 2 of 20 De
March, 1860.
64. India Political Despatch, No. 16 of 8 Fe

CEYLON REVIEW
became so difficult that at one stage the "I might be inclined to give it the sign e sign bearing gilt figures of men rowing he Golden Impossibility."59
The Most Exalted Order of the Star of of the suggestions made by the Prince 2d.60 The Order was to consist of 25 exclusive of honorary knights, with the The first investiture was held at Windsor ints being Maharajah Dalip Sing, Lord
Pollock and Lord Harris.61
urs, the question of offering material oyal members of the Imperial family at iven the same privileges which they had inctly understood that the favour was ld not be continued to their descendants of State, while fully approving of it, ces of the Imperial House pass away and o visit upon the unoffending members, smen, there would be as little humanity ce of this fiction of royalty a day longer
by a consideration of existing claims.'02
lity, even after his army had joined the resentful attitude which he subsequently decided to fra J) sfer to hju)) ferritorje:S ju) Inted to take advantage of this occasion rrangement with him. The principles sity for annual adjustment of accounts," 2r ofterritory as shall provide a suitable give him what he could administer in full
; Ibid, 104.
imber, 1860; India Political Despatch, No. 31 of 2
cember, 1860; India Political Despatch, No. 31 of 2
bruary, 1861; G.G. s. For. Let. No. 4,1859.
I22


Page 125
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT
sovereignty and provide both parties \ boundary, leave to the British Gov. to provide military protection to Sindia the character of such obligation and the O Bhe place of their location or the limi to depend upon the general arrangem treaty on these lines was accordingly ations to replace the existing one conc to increase his force to 5,OOO cavalry, 6, wanted Gwalior back; but this was not troops could, if they so wished, threater however, promised its return when th
With Sindia the arrangements wer materially rewarded were not asked to of Kapurthala was given a Khilat of guns, given a freehold garden and tw honorary titles were increased.69
The Nizam got back a large slic hand over to Dalhousie in 1853. Besic and Shorapur. His debt amounting remitted. In addition, he was prese diamond ring. His ministers Salar Ji given gifts valued at (3,OOO.70
The rulers of Balarampur, Ram got shares of the confiscated territories
The Maharajah of Patiala was g Choicest Son, and Mansar Zaman or ruler of Jhind was greeted as the Mc
65. Thornton-Life of Meade, 89. 66. India Political Despatch, No. 16 of 8 Febru. 67. Thornton-Life of Meade, 89. 68. Ibid, 115. 69. India Political Despatch, No. 54 of 8 Nove 70. L. J. Trotter-History of India under Quee 71. Ibid, 117.
I2

AND THE INDIAN STATES
with a well-defined and convenient ernment only a general obligation and his territory without specifying number of troops to be maintained ts of their employment, which were ants of the paramount power.06 A concluded after protracted negotiluded in 1844. Sindia was allowed OOO infantry and 36 guns.67 Sindia complied with, because from it, his the British post at Morar. Canning, is could be safely done".68
te of a reciprocal nature. But others give anything in return. The ruler Rs. IO,OOO, sanctioned a salute of 16 to forfeited estates in Oudh, and his
e of territory that his father had to les he got Naldrug, Daraseo, Raichur to half a million sterling was also inted with a jewelled sword and a ung and Shams-ul-Umara were each
pur, Benares and many Sikh States
7
iven the titles Farzand Khas or the
the Conqueror of the World. The st Cherished Son of the True Faith
ary, 1861; G.G.s. Foreign Letter, No. 4,1859.
mber, 1859. In Victoria, II, 114-5.
3.


Page 126
UNIVERSITY OF
and had his salute of guns raised; the Noble Son of Good Faith and allo rulers also got a share of the confi 2 lacs a year.72
The abolition of the Imperial ti by the Queen necessitated a change still went on having the Mughal e1 the Company itself had been resp Mughul Supremacy and had even is emperor until 1835. While the Mi been taken up by the authorities i. officiating Political Agent to Bhurt Agent to the Governor-General to r Delhi from Bhurtpore coins and ment,73 Lawrence was willing, b Governor-General before carryin expressed the view that owing to the authority of the Political Agent it is very necessary that all acts of at the Durbar. He, therefore, direc willing, the reform could be carried
Nixon had also drawn attentior and he was now asked 'to bear in no right to give order in this matter by its agents in regard to the prerog. States of Rajpootana and Central Indi. its purpose, other changes besides : Native States, are very desirable an be led to adopt them willingly'.7 happened before the assumption of a
72. Ibid, 114.
73. Nixon-Lawrence, 27 January, 1858; Inc 74. Lawrence-Nixon, 3 February, 1858: Ibi 75. Edmonstone-Lawrence, 20 February, 185 76. Edmonstone-Lawrence, 20 February, 185:

CEYLON REVIEW
ruler of Nabha was given the title of the wed a salute of 9 guns. Each of these cated territory, Patiala's share yielding
---
le and the assumption of administration in the coinage of the Indian states which nperor's name on their coins. In fact, onsible for maintaining the fiction of ued their own coins in the name of the Itiny was still raging, this question had 1 India. In January 1858, Nixon, the pore, had asked the permission of the emove the name of the 'arch traitor of substitute that of the British Governut Wanted to make a reference to the g it out.74 The Governor-General the minority of the chief of Bhurtpore, is greater than usual in that State, but 1thority should be done in unison with cted that if the state authorities were Out.75
to the same state of affairs at Dholpur mind that the British Government has , and that any assumption of authority tive of coining which the independent a so jealously maintain is likely to defeat change of device in the currency of it is important that the chiefs should It must be remembered that this dministration by the Queen.
ia Foreign Congress, 147 of 24 September, 1858. d, 148.
8; bid. 149. 3; India Foreign Congress, 149 of 24 September, 1858
24
الترح


Page 127
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT
The Government of India, how Rajpootana and Central India to find ( ror's name on their coins and how the
Similar enquiries were also made from bag S
Lawrence, the Political Agent in under his jurisdiction, with very few name, but he thought that they would name of the British Government,79 F he reported that he had consulted the all agreeable to the proposed change. of the coin the name of the state and ol the British Government wanted.80
The Government, however, info) communicated directly with the ruler claim no right to give orders in this me submit the proposal to the several chie to determine the device which the f bear and the time when as well as the current coin.'81
The Political Agent at Jaipur had rajah and the latter expressed a desire recoin them either bearing on one sic and on the other his own name and re I858 and on the other his own name Agent, thought the latter would suffi would be to leave the choice to the ru General's approval.83
77. Edmonstone-Agent, Governor-General, Ra
gress, 69 of 9 April, 1858. 78. Ibid-Agent, C. I. Ibid, Ibid, No. 70. 79. Lawrence-Edmonstone, 26 March, Ibid, Nc 80. Ibid, 20 May, India Foreign Congress, No. 81. Edmonstone-Lawrence, 29 July, Ibid, 163. 82. Eden-Lawrence, 28 January, Ibid, 146. 83. Edmonstone-Lawrence, 20 February, Ibid,
I2

AND THE INDIAN STATES
rever, asked its Political Agents in but how many chiefs used the empey would take the proposed change.77 the Residents at Baroda and Hydera
Rajpootana, reported that the states exceptions, retained the Emperor's | readily agree to replace it with the He was asked to submit a report, and Vakeels of the rulers and they were They wished to have on one side the ruler and on the other whatever
rmed Lawrence that he should have s and that “the British Government utter, and that the most it can do is to tfs leaving it to them, if they consent lture currency of their states should means by which they shall call in the
a private interview with the Mahato recall all the current coins and to le the impression of Queen Victoria gnal year or on one side simply A.D.
and regnal year. W. F. Eden, the ce and suggested that the best thing ler.82 This met with the Governor
pootana, 18 February, 1858; India Foreign Con
152.
159.
49.


Page 128
UNIVERSITY OF
In the meantime, the ruler of Jai Victoria on his coins,84 and the r. willingness to do the same.85
The Nizam's minister, when th he anticipated no difficulty to effect
The Political Agent in Central to remove the name of the Empero new coin. Bhopal also readily agre
The Rao of Cutch, who had of carly as I 845, now expressed his det
The Resident at Baroda repo discontinue the Emperor's name ar. future.89 He also forwarded to th approved.90
The Secretary of State warmly: that this opportunity had not been of the Queen's name and thus an occ the Sovereignty of India was veste wanted an attempt to be made to of uniform value and to withdraw a
In matters of etiquette, the Gov the wishes of the Princes. When pressed a desire that the two karbare be given the compliment of a salt stationed at the Residency gate, the
84. Lawrence-Edmonstone, 14 June, 1858; 85. Ibid, 29 June, 1858; bid, 161. 86. Davidson-Edmonstone, 6 March, 1858; 87. Hamilton-Edmonstone, 11 April, 1858; 88. Trevelyan-Anderson, 12 October, 1858: 89. Shakespear-Edmonstone, 13 March, 185 90. Ibid, 28 March, Ibid, 89; Edmonstone. 91. India Political Despatch, No. 39 of 15 SI

CEYLON REVIEW
pur had substituted the name of Queen tler of Bikaner had also signified his
2 proposal was put to him, replied that the change.86 ܐ ܢ ܐ
India reported that Holkar had agreed r and had given him a specimen of the ed and forwarded a specimen.87
Fered to substitute the Queen's name as crimination to do the same.88
rted that the minister had agreed to ld to use the Gaekwar's name only in e Government the new die which was
approved of these changes but regretted taken to suggest to the Princes the use casion had been missed of denoting that d in the Crown of England. He also introduce as far as possible a currency ll debased ones.91
ernment of India tried to accommodate during the Mutiny, the Gaekwar exes, Govind Rao and Ganesh Pant, should te of presented arms from the guard Resident recommended to be authorised
India Foreign Congress, 160 of 24 September, 1858.
India Foreign Congress, 96 of 6 August, 1858. India Foreign Control, 164 of 30 April, 1858.
Coll. to Pol. Desp. Vol. 6 pp. 2-4. 3; Índia Foreign Control, 88 of 6 August, 1858. Shakespear, 29 July, Ibid, 90. ptember, 1859.
26
ܗ
~)-_
ܢ¬.


Page 129
བ་
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT
to inform the Gaekwar that the reques a formal written application, for he strengthen his hands "at the present C. as well as show respect to the chief demonstrated an anxious desire to mec
pridence and foresight he mainly depo
In matters of interference in the in a change in British policy. Early in 185 Political Agent at Bhopal accusing the Meer Omar Ali Khan to dismantle his The Agent found the accusation exagg if the explanation sought was not satis
Soon a change of policy came. one or half a year's salary from his offi accession and two European officers Resident Sir Richard Shakespear abou that this step should not be taken wi General. The Government of India the Resident that it was too much for applicable to all public servants, India sanction of the Governor-General, all to deter the Durbar from an impositic
When the Maharajah of Bhurtp Major Morison was appointed to Co minority of the ruler Jeswant Sing. it should be a native administratio friendly advice of the Political Agent out to Morison that it would be his c as a good enlightened native ruler wo kindly advice train and bring up the principle of good government so that should endure'. He added that 'un
92. India Foreign Congress, 14-18 of 31 July Foreign Letter, 18 of 22 March, 1858.
93. India Foreign Letter, No. 2 of 9 January, 1
94. India Foreign Letter, No. 2 of 9 January, 1
I2

AND THE INDIAN STATES
I would be complied with if he made thought that this would greatly ises” and also gratify the Maharajah functionaries of the state who had t the Resident's wishes and on whose inded. This was approved.92
ternal affairs of states, there was also 7, one Batoor Khan had petitioned the regent Secunder Begum of ordering house and of taking possession of it. ;erated but promised to afford redress factory.93
When the Gaekwar decided to levy cers as nazarana on the occasion of his in his employ complained to the t it, the latter informed the Gaekwar thout the sanction of the Governor
on hearing of it, communicated to him to declare, that a general measure ns as well as Europeans, required the hough he should do all in his power
on so unjust, unusual and odious.94
pre died in 1853, the Political Agent nduct the administration during the The Governor-General ordered that n' controlled and influenced by the Sir Henry Lawrence also pointed luty "to carry Out the administration uld do, and by personal example and chief and officers of the state in the he beneficial effect of our interference der a different System what might be
1857 and 52-55 of 25 September, 1857; India
58.
58.


Page 130
UNIVERSITY OF
in itself very good, would be as un good effects of the administration un the departure of the British Political
Major Morison, however, dis. recommended its withdrawal. He work "with his own instruments'. i.e. if the Indian agency failed, he v through Indian officers and makin necessary and always bearing in m the ruler when he came of age. B prove satisfactory, the Agent to ti asked to report. Lawrence reported in good faith, "he had been the can adviser". He distrusted every memb to bring Indian officers from British officer a 'rogue,' yet had succumbe Syfoollah who had been sent to hi hearing with his ears'. Although should be assigned some particular v voice in Durbar matters, yet Morisol and given him control over all the C regarded the restrictions on spending various public works without sanctio house for the Deputy out of public House, Hospital, Jail etc. had not ye been done to improve jail conditions his attention for the past three years.
In addition, Morison's ways we the influence of the Deputy, he ha crops to be destroyed by new road same means, while no prompt an although he had been emphatically
In judicial matters, Morison pl would be heard when a law court was still in existence. He resisted t
95. India Foreign Letter, No. 2 of 9 January 96. Ibid.
97. Ibid.

CEYLON REVIEW
alatable as unintelligible and at best the der the minority would pass away with Agent from Bhurtpore.'95
pproved of Indian Agency and even wanted to have full authority and to Later on, he agreed to a compromise, tas to administer the state himself, but 2 no change that was not absolutely ind that the state would be restored to ut, as the conduct of Morison did not le Governor-General, Lawrence, Was that though Morison intended to work filling censor rather than the friendly er of the old government and wanted territory. He considered every Indian d to the influence of the Deputy Agent S assistance, 'seeing with his eyes and Lawrence had advised that the Deputy vork and not be permitted to have any n had put him in charge of the treasury fficers. Morison had also utterly disput upon him and had been building in and had even started building a large : funds, while the much needed Poor it been completed. Nothing had also
although the Agent had been drawing 36
te harsh and uncompromising. Under allowed houses to be pulled down, , wells to be cut off from fields by the liberal compensation had been paid rdered to do so.97
t off suitors with a promise that they as established, although the old court e Agent's suggestion and opposed the
1858.
ܥ܂
1 2 ܠ


Page 131
ད།
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT
appointment of the old Dewan as the c magistrate and the appointment of an even when he could not find better su furnished no adequate general or judi to do so a long time ago. Under th Har Sewak, the only officer of the old a rogue, he had opposed every meas although all the other officers of the olc Lawrence, therefore, on his own aut] revenue settlement in a part of the state 14%-15%, but Morison disdainfully d on sacrifice of state revenue. Lawren settlement to Captain Nixon, but Mc also found guilty of irregularities in ke senting Lawrence's views and instructi that he was unreservedly condemne therefore, recommended that Morison of a Collector and Magistrate and that Durbar officials in discharge of his duty and his services Were placed at the disp
A similar case occurred in Alwar set aside the authority of the Regency stration in his Own hands. Although t instruction, Impey went on in a dictatc of the minor ruler, took over his duti
disapproved of this and ordered the ap
This policy of non-interference was ment refused to entertain a complaint relation of his on the ground that th territory, and this was fully approved
But non-interference had its lini British authorities had to intervene. to keep bad company and the adminis Agent expelled the chief of the und
98. Ibid.
99. India Political Despatch, No. 46 of 25 Ma 100. India Political Despatch, No. 76 of 29 Sep
12

AND THE INDIAN STATES
hief judge, the restoration of the old other in a similar capacity to Deeg, bstitutes. Moreover, Morison had cial reports even when called upon e influence of his Deputy and one Durbar whom he did not consider ure of financial relief to the people Durbar urged its immediate need. hority, carried out a summary land at a reduction of the government by escribed it as a deliberate and wantce entrusted the completion of the prison opposed him. Morison was reping official records and misrepreons. In short, his conduct was such d by all his superiors. Lawrence, 's power should be reduced to that he should be directed to consult the As a result, Morison was removed osal of the Commander-in-Chief98
, where Lieutenant Impey virtually Council and took over the adminihis was contrary to the Government's orial manner and dismissing the tutor es himself. The Governor-General pointment of an Indian tutor.99
s further illustrated when the GovernI against the Rajah of Gharwal by a e ruler was independent within his py the Secretary of State. 100
its and there were cases where the When the Rajah of Mundee began tration began to suffer, the Political esirable companions, Shib Shunkar,
rch, 1861. tember, 1860.


Page 132
UNIVERSITY OF
and his sons and ordered the dismiss improvements in administration. T this but observed that the British G the improvement of the Rajah's cha extent of his temporary removal fr bring it about.'101
The Rajah of Moleem, Hazar S. in Chera Punji, while the administr oppressed the people. The Benga the ruler to go back to his state and that otherwise British protection v comply with this order, and the chic ASSistant Commissioner for his depo who had to accept certain condition price of his elevation to the gadi. nasarana should be levied from him.
When the Rani of Chinhoree, to interfere in administration, she produced no effect, she was removes
Similarly, the ruler of Serohi Sing, due to age and infirmity. 104
Although the Smaller and unim summary manner, the larger ones ha consideration. This happened in th remained Staunchly loyal during the troops, his attitude had become r sovereignty by the Queen. He, so of his state directly and dismissed h governed the state ably in his name. to fulfil the obligations undertaken was under tutelage on the ground th
101. India Foreign Letter, No. 130 of 22 Aug
November, 1861.
102. India Political Despatch, No. 139 of 16 I
103. India Foreign Letter, No. 91 of 8 July, 18
1861.
104. India Foreign Letter, No. 135 of 7 Septen

CEY LON REVIEW
all of Wazir Gosain if he failed to effect the Secretary of State not only endorsed overnment could not be indifferent to tracter and that "no means even to the om Mundee, should be left untried to
ing, instead of residing in his state lived ation was neglected and his underlings 1 Government, therefore, called upon attend to his duties, and Warned him would be withdrawn. As he did not pf inhabitants of Moleem petitioned the Sition, he was replaced by Malay Sing, Slaid down by the Government as the
The Secretary of State ordered that 102
who had been appointed regent, tried
was at first Warned. But when this 1.103
was replaced by his eldest son Omeid
portant states were dealt with in rather d to be treated with greater caution and e case of Sindia. Although. Sindia had Mutiny, in spite of the defection of his esentful after the assumption of the on after, took over the administration is minister Dinkar Rao, who had long He also showed some unwillingness by his government while he, himself, at he was not a free agent.
gust, 1861; India Political Despatch, No. 129 of 29
December, 1861. 361; India Political Despatch, No. 121 of 31 October,
ber, 1861; India Political Despatch, No. 132 of 1861.
3O
ち


Page 133
ས།
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT
Meade, Agent to the Governor-G Sindia's attitude and expressed the appr the promises made after the recovery Amjhera state as rewards to Dinkar Rao faithful. The would-be beneficiaries excusing himself by saying that he was himself was getting from the British Shakespear advised them to wait unt Governor-General. 105
But Meade feared that Sindia's o altogether and this was to be the first undertakings. The Governor-General Sindia very kindly but very firmly that would seriously compromise him. T pudiated. Believing that a ruler of S by the fear of losing the respect of th the Agent that "strongly averse as he is a Native State, the Governor-General the disregard of promises which were the Government of India if such disreg:
Soon after, Mcade reported that that Sanads for Amjhera jagirs should as soon as the territory yielding 3 lak promised to him by the British was ni was a grantee wanted this to be done q any further excuse. Meade, howevel sentiments to Sindia, who as was expe bitterly complained that since 1844 - I lakhs of rupees in jagir and as he by conquest, the proposed grant wi Soon after, Sindia in an open Durbar : The amount was the same but was beneficiaries. 107
105. India Foreign Letter, No. 174 of 19 Novem
106. India Foreign Letter, No. 174 of 19 Nover
April, 1861. 107. Ibid.
I3

AND THE INDIAN STATES
neral, drew the latter's attention to thension that he was trying to evade f Gwalior to assign jagirs from the and other officers who had remained often complained that Sindia was waiting to see first what reward he or his services. The acting Agent 1 after Sindia's interview with the
bject was to repudiate the promises of a scrics of repudiations of other , therefore, asked Meade to inform I repudiation of formal engagements hey might be modified but not reindia's character must be restrained e British Government, he informed to interfere in the internal affairs of is not prepared to pass over in silence made under the encouragement of ard become open and persistent."100
Sindia had Stated in a private Durbar be drawn out and possession given ths of rupees a year which had been hade over to him. The Vakeel who uickly, so that Sindia might not have r, conveyed the Governor-General's cted, agreed to fulfil his promise; but he had give away territory yielding was not able to extend his territories ould only impoverish him further. granted Sanads for lands as promised. divided among a larger number of
ber, 1860. mber, 1860; India Political Despatch, No. 55 of 8


Page 134
UNIVERSITY OF
The question of Dewanship s would have liked the reinstatement that one Hurnath Rao was intrigui feared that if he succeeded, he woul be fatal to Dinkar Rao's system whi the payment of the stipulated amou from any further demand. 108
The Secretary of State, howev. light. He expressed pleasure that stration and informed the Governor every reasonable encouragement t affairs of his principality... Her M. with great dissatisfaction the mainter minister, however great his ability, t of his own master. The very worst encourages the officers of the Durb: sentative of the British, to regard th a puppet or a name."109
Meanwhile the Agent, realisin former minister, had informed him t reinstatement, but would like his d manner as would demonstrate that Maharajah. Sindia in return had a Rao to be near him and would const Dewan Balaji Pant Chimnaji was t and although old and not particular with Dinkar Rao's system of admir likely to maintain it. He, however, the administration in his own hand for Sindia's unwillingness to have Di he would have dominated the state a share in its government. 110
When informed of the new ; expressed the view that the matter ha
108. Ibid.
109. India Political Despatch No. 16 of 8 Febr
110. India Foreign Letter, No. 174 of 19 Nove
April, 1861.

CEYLON REVIEW
till remained unsettled. The British of Dinkar Rao. But Meade reported ng to become Dewan himself and he reintroduce nazarana and this would ch was based on the principle that on int, the landlords would be exempted
r, viewed the Situation in a different Sindia Was talking interest in admini-General, “In affording the Maharajah O interest himself personally in the jesty's Government will ever regard ance of a policy tending to induce any D look beyond the legitimate authority description of interference is that which ar, secure in the support of the reprecir own sovereign as little more than
g how intensely Sindia disliked his hat he would not insist on the minister's lismissal to be made public in such a I his services were appreciated by the ssured Meade that he wanted Dinkar ult him when necessary. The Deputy hen appointed to the vacant position ly able, he was thoroughly acquainted listration and more than any one else became merely a puppet as Sindia kept s. This was undoubtedly the reason inkar back, Since, if he was re-appointed ind Sindia would hardly have had any
arrangements, the Secretary of State d been settled in a manner "least likely
uary, 1861. mber, 1861; India Political Despatch, No. 55 of


Page 135
ད།
THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT
to cause future embarrassments' and fluence of the British agent' it woul prosperity of the State'.
Another aspect of British policy British jurisdiction in Indian states. T trate how British policy Was relaxed ii in 1857 claimed jurisdiction over one o with assaulting a follower of the Politic resisted the Rajah's claim and reported reply, he was informed that if the accus the Political Agent was wrong in resis follower of his, then he could claim juri
In 1857, when the Mutiny was at asked the opinion of the Government objectionable publications that might states and in reply they were informed any such publications except to seize th British territory and to punish the in India had no objection to the Princes publications.
The policy of Canning, during W British policy took place and who was explained by his successor Lord Elgin, hit diplomat, having served in turn as Gove of Canada, Envoy to China and lastly a terms: '-like most wise administrato rather than the abstract-Canning neve bit into their mouths, or to lose his hold them with a loose rein, but the pace wa time, that it took the kick out of them were all that was required. His policy native chiefs was a means to an end-be Raj in India; and when the means and likely to do so, the former went to the
111. India Political Despatch, No. 55 of April, 186
112. India Foreign Letter, No. 32 of 17 May, 1858
113. Ibid. 114. W. J. Walrond-Letters and Journals of Jame
I33

AND THE INDIAN STATES
oped that "aided by the good in
l conduce to the tranquility and
remains to be considered, namely, Wo incidents would suffice to illusI this respect. The Rajah of Rewa his subjects who had been charged al Agent, Lieutenant Osborne, who the matter to the Government. In 2d was simply a subject of the ruler, ing his claim, but if he was also a sdiction over him.112
its height, the Madras Government of India about the suppression of be issued from presses in Indian that nothing could be done against nem when they were brought into nporter. But the Government of
being requested to prevent such
hose administration the change in intimately connected with it, was mself an eminent administrator and brnor of Jamaica, Governor-General Viceroy of India, in the following rs, Canning dealt with the concrete r intended to let the chiefs get the | over them. It is true that he rode s so killing during the whole of his and a light hand and silken thread of deference to the authority of the ing the establishment of the British ends came into conflict, or seemed wall. 114
1.
, Eighth Earl of Elgin, 422-3.


Page 136
UNIVERSITY OF
It must also be borne in mind Went on. In the early stages, i.e after it, when he tried to undo the doubtedly more liberal attitude to a later stage when the British Gov enough to tighten the reins which was demonstrated in his policy t Chinhoree and to some extent to W.
The change in British policy pr among the Princes. The Queen nouncement of the changed policy the chief minister of Hyderabad, to rights on the Native Princes, alt Resident. 115
But the new Order of the St. accepted by the Princes. Some C them, especially to the Mahommed by some of those first selected for th perturbed. Sir Henry Durand, til borough on this occasion, "It was chiefs seem to think that they confe accept the Order.” Ilo Before the f Sindia adopted a rather hostile attit and was in such a bad temper that part of a day between Lord Cani thawed, and he went away in the b
The liberal policy pursued by unusually pretentious attitude amon even resented the issue of the Sanad reignty, while some others claime equality with the British Crown'. went so far as to express a desire to tionate friend and ally’. 118 Need
suppressed.
115. Sir Richard Temple and R. C. Temple116. H. M. Durand-Life of Major-General S 117. Martineau-Bartle Frere, I, 378, f.n. 378. 118. Durand-Durand, I, 300.

CEYLON REVIEW
that Canning's policy stiffened as time 2. during the Mutiny and immediately mischiefs of the past, he showed an unwards the Indian Princes than he did at 'ernment found itself once more strong policy had dictated it to loosen, and this owards Serohi, Mundee, Moleen and ards Sindia.
oduced reactions, not always favourable, 's Proclamation, the first official pro, was hailed by them. Sir Salar Jung, ok the view that it "conferred additional
though this was denied by the British
ar of India was not, at first, graciously of its conditions were not palatable to an Princes. Objections were also raised he honour, so much so that Canning was he Foreign Secretary, wrote to Ellenvery nearly a misfire, and a Scandal, the r rather than receive a favour when they irst investiture Durbar was held in India ude, put forward extravagant demands
Sir Bartle Frere had to spend "a good ning's tent and his’. Ultimately, "he est of hunnours”. 117
Canning in the beginning Created an g some of the Princes and some of them is of Adoption as a sign of British soved 'something very like a position of One of the Central Indian Princes even address a letter to the Queen as "affecless to say, this tendency was firmly
D. P. SINHA.
--Hyderabad, Sikkim, Kashmir and Nepal, I, 104. Sir Henry Marion. Durand, I, 287.
34


Page 137
།
The Port-Capital C
A Geographical
has a very favourable external le
routes of the Indian Ocean. Its in is focal, the result of an historical proces its productive hinterland by road and rai colonial enterprises, especially the Britis is the fact that Colombo, although not q global air circulation, however, is linke portation pattern through agreement Corporation, Trans World Airlines, in the Moscow-Jakarta air service, CC Stat1On.
C) is well known as th
The Site (Plate I)
The present site (defined by the mu 8,957 acres. It is elongated in shape ex and has a maximum width about 3 mile been the Fort area. From its core, it h; Mutwal, Maradana and Colpetty. Du cipal boundaries of I865 extended easts of Kelani Ganga flood plain up to the the southern boundary. About 19IO, I919, areas east of the Baseline Road . were included. In 195I, Kirillapone ar 3 Ist ward. The proposed extension ( addition of Mahawatte area, 1 west of th area. (Fig. I)
A part of the surface is either about contrary to the idea of a flatlandscape, in Ellie House (Mutwal) and Maligaka flat between IO-3o feet in elevation; so
1. Ceylon Sessional Paper, III-1957.
I35

'ity of Colombo:
Interpretation
e port-capital city of Ceylon. It Dcation astride the commercial sea ternal position, although eccentric, S, that of integrating the port with ilway development, reminiscent of sh (after 1833). No less significant uite along the great circle routes of d with the international air transwith British Overseas Airways Qantas and Air Ceylon. Even olombo is an indispensable transit
inicipal boundaries) occupies about (tending about 9 miles north-south es easti-West. Its historic kernel has as spread out encompassing Pettah, 1ring British times, the first muniwards excluding the swampy lands Baseline Road. Bambalapitiya was Wellawatta area was added. By as far as the river-canal-cla system ea projected South eastwards as the pf the site in 1959 considered the e Mahawatta Ela and Dambagoda
sea level or little below it. Quite there are heights more than 60 feet nda. Most of its surface is almost me areas undulating between 3 I-40


Page 138
UNIVERSITY O.
GfR O WITH of S 1 TE
ቋ Ö ፪ፕ #g!8
露臀言臀磊等
sās 翰墨
9g.
sess
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

F CEYLON REVIEW
l. Modora,
2. Mutu wol
4. Kohena.
6. Kochchikgde. -- 7. St. Petti's క్స్ప్రెນີ້ Grandpgga 9. New Bazocr. f0. Au 9 h kodig.
. Sin Sebatkan #2. Paቶ$qአ. lå Fr.
4. Slawe la kand. 3 VÅs konka, B. Hunຍpiyg
|8. Márééging. 19. Suduyeq. 29. oligakanda 21.5emüÑñයුද්ඝ 22. Kuppiyavata. 23. Boroia. 28.CHĂãoN eA Rogns 25TH MBIRGAsyaya. 2SCOPETTY: 27. BAMBALAPTYa. 28. HAVELock town. 29. E LAWATTA North 30. WELLAwAtta soum||
31. KRL LA PONA.
WᏡᎪ Ꭱ2os -- ᎥᏄ58
SSS
3.
මිණි 9 Proposage
SXogije beble site of aelia ** TTL z MSF
IG. I.
136


Page 139
University of Ceylon Review Vol. XXII No. 1 & 2 A
AN AERIAL VIEW
Scale
 

pril & October 1964 PLATE
OF COLOMBO CITY 1:40,000


Page 140

No, o


Page 141
THE PORT-CAPITAL CIT
feet, and few areas hilly like, above so fe divided into the following:2
(1) the most built-up surface betwe (2) the undulating and hilly tracts
acres) 3) the low lying areas, below seal 5 to 9 feet (about 1,875 acres). (4) the Beira lake (about 2 II acres).
The built-up surfaces appear to hav area is above flood level, and secondly : spray during the south west monsoon seas have a firm laterite and lateritic base. Eve alluvial deposits, these are thick enough The undulating and hilly tracts break th landscape. These surfaces enhance the accommodate the city's water reservoirs a the gravity flow scheme of water distribu of Kelani Ganga flood plain, are subject to them uninhabitable. The Beira lake who double its present surface is a relict, reve. with subsidence. Apart from its comme to the port, it is of recreational value. Pe. climatology of the built-up areas around
The Kelani Ganga skirts only the nort lake so centrally situated in the townscap. constitute the surface drainage. Due to the regime it is subject to, floods are seaso of the canals prevent quick run off aggra disposal.
Impact of the Elements of Climate
The humid heat (temperatures above cent) so characteristic of Colombo's w maritime type. The daily convectional vable in the months of April and Octob
- 2. See B. L. Panditaratna, “Functional Zones Cc Vol. XIX, No. 2, 1961, pp. 138-165.
3. See, J. S. Cotton, Control of the Kelani Ganga.
-- Ganga flood protection scheme.' Department of Irrigatio,
I37

Y OF COLOMBO
et. (Fig. 2). The surface may be
'n IO-3o feet (about 5,400 acres) 3 I-so feet and above (about 47I
evel to 4 feet (about I,OOO acres),
e two advantages. Most of the a good part is not subject to sea on. Besides, some of these lands in in those areas with accumulated and characterize a terra firma. 2 monotony of an otherwise flat aesthetic beauty. The heights ind the natural gradients facilitate tion. The low lying areas, those seasonal flooding thus rendering pse original extent was more than ling the geological past associated }rcial role as an industrial annexe rhaps, it also influences the microLt.
hern margin of the city, the Beira 2, and the connected canal system the meanderings of the river and hal phenomena. Silting of some rating the problem of flood water
79°F and humidity above 68 per eather is typical of the tropical rhythm especially felt and obserer with afternoon thunderstorms
lombo City' University of Ceylon Review,
Dalifornia, 1948. Also "Report of the Kelani v. Colombo, 1948. (unpublished).


Page 142
UNIVERSITY OF
RELEF SURFACE
LO keMunicipal boundary Contours Reclaimed Surfaces
Reclaimed Surfaces (pi
PI
 
 

CEYLON REVIEW
e
s
m
Subject to Sea
*鬣s SOrg し一つ
Roads Railways همیشهای بمه" Railways Zone "oposedo) محمعہجی
毒● Stations
CHANS
G. 2
ട് 38


Page 143
THE PORT-CAPITAL (
and showers (when the monsoons are the monsoonal phenomena (south we variety in respect of rainfall incidence annual rainfall recorded at different s 94 to 79 inches. There are two wet west monsoons, receiving about 35-40 rainfall, and 20-25 per cent during th the average, there are 174-190 wet day 20 days for each month respectively.4
Rainfall both in its periodic occ essential bearing on the economy of chiefly an exporting outlet of agricul of foodstuffs. Rain is a hazard for with the loading, unloading, storing, Methods of cargo handling, the very p. are conditioned mostly by rain, both t In fact, monsoon rains in May-June acc delay in port operations of loading or gestion in the port ofunloaded Cargo 1 which inevitably lead to either demuri disadvantage.
Monsoon gales above 35 miles : rainfall and poor visibility are a hindr craft engaged in fishing. Wind force of ships into or out of the harbour. Ev. to alternate with changes in drifts, wi and spray during the Southwest monso processes tend to depress land values a pical downpours sometimes cause floc problems. Seasonal heavy rains in C cause floods in the city and attendant outbreaks of epidemics endangering th showers sometimes reduce visibility che circulation of vehicles to a standstill. of light causes many a problem to the
Colombo's muggy weather is ph Colombo is the administrative capital,
4. G. T. Thambyahpillay, 'Secular Fluctuation of Ceylon Reviev. Vol. XVI, Nos. 3 & 4, 1958, pp
I3.

ITY OF COLOMBO
slack or retreating) is dominated by st, from May to July) which give
distribution and effects. The total tations within the city varies from periods corresponding to the south inches or 42-45 per cent of the total e north east monsoon period. On 's; May and June having more than
Fig. 3).
irrence and intensity of fall has an the city. The port of Colombo is Jural produce and importing centre these cargoes interfering adversely clearing and distributing activities. hasing and timing of such operations he time of occurrence and intensity. ount for the loss of many man hours, unloading. These delays cause coniners or liners awaiting to be loaded,
age, or ships skipping the port to its
per hour accompanied with heavy ance to sailing especially the marine and direction influence the pilotage an the pattern of berthing ships seems nd and spray. In general, the wind on season, by accelerating corrosion long the immediate sea front. Troding in certain areas creating traffic olombo and the Kelani catchment social distress, intensified further by e general health of the city. Heavy cking the flow of traffic and bringing The wet road being a good reflector motorist.
ysiologically uncomfortable. Since the main centre of employment, the
sin the Rainfall Climate of Colombo." University
93-106.


Page 144
... UNIVERSITY OF
JNÍHSNñS EÐ\/\s]AY ATH!NKOW|
● ■ @ 毫 r r 量 y 鲁 曾 r *
SɔsɔwɛAw Asłońwnae |-
39YLN3D34
as YN3O3d
(„er鲁阁
--„ɛo ∞属叠》喻w●•sae�|×)• 0%!!!!6!! ¿O4 38s^1\^\$dW}& CINY TŶ ŶNIVĂ ATHINƠo 39v33Aw
乏W
T그T그>__:
،
0&&-ućł woło 3 mawował wnwinow ɑNw wnwixww aw, Now x

Page 145
THE PORT-CAPITAL
offices should necessarily be provided movement. Multi-storey blocks cons should then have to adopt artificial
pumping or the use of fans to provide work. The physiological discomforts may be minimised by wearing a loose between clothing and skin.5 Cotton able are preferred. -
Colombo's weather promotes fi ating problems in the preservation, st tion of various methods of preservatic the extent to which man has been ab nected tropical problems by advances
Internal Reorganisation
The internal reorganisation and te associated with (a) harbour and pol flood control measures, (c) road expar
The harbour and port
Kolamba was one of the six ments.6 The trade attracted a conce both rich and populous. About 133 largest cities of the island of Serendit Sea." During the Portuguese an Colombo continued to be one of th carrying entrepot trade and distribut trial enterprises. In the coastwise ports mainly with goods imported it was gradually establishing itself as of foreign commodities. During a p Colombo changed considerably becau land. Functionally, by 1833, it becan Administrative centralization since til trend of urbanization and city growt was seen in the increasing commercia
5. D. H. K. Lee has examined some of thes Development in the Tropics. New York, 1957.
6. G. C. Mendis, Early History of Ceylon. C
7. Ibn Batuta, Travel in Asia and Africa, Tran

CITY OF COLOMBO
with adequate ventilation and free air tructed in order to economise space methods, either air conditioning, air an office environment conducive for associated with heat and perspiration ress permitting maximum ventilation garments that are porous and perme
Ingus growth and accumulation creoring and decay of materials. Adopon, storage and checking decay shows le to overcome certain Weather-conin science and technology.
arritorial expansion of Colombo were it development, (b) reclamation and ision and the building spread.
original Muslim port-trading settlepurse of merchants and the port was 4 A.C., it was 'one of the finest and ), the residence of Wazir, Lord of the d Dutch periods (IsoS-1795 A.C.) e ports for the export of cinnamon, ing activities and the venue of industrade, Colombo provided the other from foreign ports. In this respect, the chief centre for the distribution hase of the British period (1795-1860), Ise of economic progress in its hinterhe the capital city for the entire island. len had a tremendous impact on the h. The impact of economic progress lisation of the townscape. However,
e problems. See chapter 5 in Climate and Economic
alcutta, 1948, p. 68. slated by H. A. R. Gibb, London, 1936, pp. 234-260.
4I


Page 146
UNIVERSITY OF
Colombo Fort until 1869, retainec fortress). Hinterland development, tions and transport, also made the and railways, the essential links for import economy. Arterial roads, Ratnapura Roads, the Kandy Road railway routes such as the Kandy line, the Southern line (Matara), the Chila with the Dutch-river canal system lil the plexus of the transport system.
Hinterland development and for the construction of a harbour outer harbour' by the construction of approved by the Legislative Counci 1884.8 The protection afforded by suggested that Colombo would ult coaling port in the Indian ocean. T felt, so the construction of North Eas These were completed by 1900, and p) making Colombo one ofthe finest arti ing dock concentrated in the port the fitting, as Colombo was the only p Malta and Australia with Such facili and depots, facilities for coal, oil and and raised its international status to t and seventh in the whole World, abol
Two world Wars have proved th the operating bases so vital to the d monwealth of the eastern hemisphere from Europe to the Far East and Au need for harbour and port developin
8. A. B. Prouse, "The history of Colombo Engineering Association of Ceylon, 1931.
Also see, B. L. Panditaratna, ''The Harbol of its Historical and Functional Aspects. The C No. 2, 1960, pp. 120-143.
9. In the address given by Governor Sir He stone, Colombo Harbour-May, 1912.
10. W. C. B. Tunstall, The Commonwealth and University of London, 1959, p. 54.

CEYLON REVIEW
its defensive forms (circumvallated he result of the opening up of plantaity the hub of island's routes-roads the smooth functioning of an exportthe Galle Road, the Hanwella and , the Negombo Road, coupled with the Northern line (Jaffna and Mannar), w line and Kelani Valley line, together ked to the Beira lake made Colombo
the trade resulted in the agitation at Colombo. The proposals for 'an breakwaters projecting to the sea were in 1871 and the work completed in the breakwaters attracted vessels and imately become the most important he need for complete protection was
it, NorthWest and Island breakwaters.
covided an enclosed area about 640 acre ficial harbours in the World. The grav: important industry of ship repair and ort between Malta and Hong Kong, ties. Warehouses, quays, coal jetties
Water bunkers increased its efficiency hat of the third port in British Empire ut I9 I 2.9
estrategic value of Colombo, as one of 'fence of the Indian ocean and Com, and for the policing of the sea routes stralia. 10 After War II, there was the ent, to modernise it to provide deep
Harbour from its inception to 1924. Transactions,
r and Port of Colombo: A Geographical Appraisal eylon Journal of Historical and Social Studies. Vol. 3,
nry McCallum when setting the commemoration
Regional Defence. Commonwealth Papers, No. VI,
12


Page 147
(
THE PORT-CAPITAL
J. El E를 노블 F=具=具=真儿是 &gs)�oo::&SQ/
\|f\O88\/H Ogs, O TOD
,
FIG
I4
 
 
 

ITY OF COLOMBO
محصب
Qで& } *****
『ミssg\ そきミy ys マgyy ----*- wo owo womozos sa 433, og ozovoooooo so • v3ww. ~~ ~~ ooooo averows sw kgミ g gssg%s ggs ygyy ------- ooooo awanaws sw に%gg 9 &に zggys V9 &に xy 『gyw%マ やミ79@%マ*
(}-xwooxbox.y
・『gssミgyyミ 3gミ、ミ ***ミvskり ミ。にょくss、ト3 ***やきマミきにミミ、ミミ **マミマやs rygき*yy、s)
•••••••• →e, →ợwyzozza, ayotofo -sosno o 3x van sy wz.z.o.o ^ ^fa?
· torno, ovom «vz»ovo roo -sosnowowy, 2-73 w r^oa **きるミsysきに受& 「ミg
·s3sraecaer oxy^^
gさい*ミミ、。 **ssyssys gssミ** - zo *さ*ミにさy ș· c) „gyy gavywoooooo• 5 : t9 gs sysミもマa、、。 ・gs シzgQ Q ・gにミミミ9/  - ro. “gg』yg
ミyりにくgにマミ、ミ -yɔɔ ɑ wɔwawae - z &': \トにs gミ*colo **& ミミys ys
·s3/4), z wywo oooowoozoooooooooooo
て
忠ggry”。そ
) so
· şavy, og 73øy - *): Ag

Page 148
UNIVERSITY OF
water berths, to equip it more fully di technological improvements so as to new deep Water berths constructed, su Queen Elizabeth Quay, storeyed-ware and other offices (Fig. 4) have given a
The port premises is a distinct 1 efficiency, there is a general demarcat and eastern area for exports. The pass Elizabeth Quay. The discharge of foc Indian trade are carried out in the Del Granaries. The new warehouses on C cargo, the Kochchikade warehouses for for timber and metals. Five export w Railway coal and phosphate cargoes a stored in the depots. Perishable carg warehouses.
Colombo as a port of call is pi numbers which frequent it. After W calling at the port has been on their consequently the average tonnage has cargo tonnages also increased, handling
Merchant ships, mostly British, ; 400-SOO feet in length were the comn regular scheduled liners, cargo boats, COasterS.
The ports oil bunkering has im oil bunker, amounting to a total about ships call for water and the water inta Transhipment and reshipment traffic Indian, Arabian, Pakistani and South-e
Colombo is an important passenge position between European and Aust
average, about 4OO,OOO passengers pass
Thus the functional geography of the city; the port-city on the islandwic
I4.

CEYLON REVIEW
le to the changes in size of ships and increase the port's efficiency. The Ich as North Pier, Delft Quay and houses, new terminal, customs block new look to the port premises.
norphological area. For functional on of the western area for imports enger jetty has been shifted to Queen dstuffs, general cargo and the South it Quay. Rice is stored in Chalmers ueen Elizabeth Quay are for general grain, those along the harbour canal arehouses are to the east of the canal. re handled at the coaling jetties and oes are handled in the transhipment
imarily interested in ships and the Vorld War II, the number of ships crease, about 3, OOO-3,25o per year, been about 13 million. The port's ; more than 5 million per year.
about 4O-SO per cent, and between nonest callers. Besides, there were tankers, and even sailing vessels and
proved. About I, SOO ships call for SOO,OOO tons per year. About 3,OOO ke was about 85o,oootons per year.
was carried out mostly with the ast Asian ports.
'r transit port by virtue of its midway alian or Far-eastern ports. On the through it every year.
the port is interdependent on that of le hinterland.
s
-


Page 149
s
THE POIR TI-CAPIT ITAL
Reclamation and flood control
Most of the built-up surfaces are or from the sea or marshy and low from the Beira lake is about 200 acres separated the Fort from the Pettah reclaimed. The marshes of Colpetty up surfaces are widespread in the east; areas, (harbour side of Reclamation reclaimed from the sea. The swamp either by the natural process of silting swamps and marshes mostly in M. Maligawatta and Kuppiawatta ocCup Future city growth and expansion ar filling and effective flood control mea
Road expansion and building spread
The road pattern was the skel feature of the townscape in relation been articulated. The initial layout Dutch periods) had a clearly define original military purpose. This patt Gate. The old town was connected Maradana, Cotta Roads. The arter Road, Kandy Road, Low level Han the core;—the Alutmawatta Road fr High Level Road from the south, B. form the basic pattern. On this bas ler's, Pamankade Roads, Ward, Hill parallel roads, (Horton, Barnes, Rost land, Guilford), squares (Torrington) merged in the outer zones (Plate I). T relationship with the building pattern zone occupied by the Fort railway stat Kuppiawatta stations, workshops, sid two parts, another noticeable feature
Modern building development v at the core (after the demolition of for towards the integuments, characteri
11. B. L. Panditaratna, "Colombo Townscal of Ceylon Review. Vol. XIX, No. 1, 1961, pp. 45
IIZ

CITY OF COLOMB ()
reclaimed either from the Beira lake
lying areas. The surface reclaimed (Fig. 2). The Lotus pond which once Tanque Salgado (Lunupokuna) are
are filled. New reclaimed and filled und Southeast. The harbour foreshore
Road from Pettah to Mutwal) are is and marshes have been transformed or reclaimed as polders. The existing ldampitiya, Bloemendhal, Grandpass, y about an eighth of the total surface. e necessarily tied up with reclamation, |SUFCS.
tal framework, the most permanent to which building development has of the Fort and Pettah (Portuguese and 'd rectangular system, suited to their ern extended fanwise from Kayman's with the outer areas by the Hanwella, ial network; (Galle Road, Negombo wella Road) and alternative route to om the north, and Parsons-Thurstan aseline-Maradana Roads from the east ic pattern, lateral roads, (Turret, BulStreets) rectangular forms made by mead), a few crescentic forms (Mait, and the oval around the race course he railway pattern does not show a close However, the east-west extending ion, Maradana Junction, Dematagoda, lings and yards divides Colombo into in the morphology.11
which followed the road system started it structures, I870 onwards) and spread zing the trends of internal reorgani
pe: Some Aspects of its Morphology.” University 60.
45


Page 150
UNIVERSITY OF
URBAN TEXTURE
56 2S o s ாைாைணாவை
c - A inds.
Predominantly multi-storey (Commercial a Predominantly one-storey (Commercial and Terraced one-storey or no-storey tenement Terraced compact contiguous houses with Compact cottages isolated from each other Spacious bungalows and one-storey houses Government and Municipal Housing Scher Residential multi-storey flats Railway zone and yard
Open spaces.
 

CEYLON REVIEW
- 5 ind Public Buildings) شضسے--
Mixed) s, cooly lines and contiguous houses shop fronts
11eᏚ
46


Page 151
THE PORT-CAPITAL (
sation and territorial expansion. Bl. flanked the Fort road grid; predomina contiguous blocks, mostly one-floor w inner zone and a variety of residential ations (Cinnamon Gardens contrasted the outer zone. Institutional buildings, Hospital, the University of Ceylon, the low skyline of the outer Zone. (Fi the circulatory systems to the suburbs, dormitory towns around Colombo.
The fabric of the Fort area has be blocks towering much above the old ( Bank Blocks). Old forms in the Pe modern two or three-storey structus new administrative areas with multi-stc Zone along Kitula-Narahenpita Roa functional; Pettah, known mainly for Small Subcores at junction Centres Col retail business; the inner zone for 1. interspersed with residential units, wh up by institutional buildings mainly go edifices. The outer zone is predomin τον ards the north, east and South c trades are restricted; surrounded by a
Another constituent in the morp Most of these public open Spaces (par and marsh) are unevenly distributed. served. Central Colombo is well serv Park and lake, Southern Colombo is co. if the semi-public open spaces owned and associations, the race course, golfli unbuilt open spaces are taken together, these channels for free air movement :
Sofile Cultural Elements
The nomenclature of the city in
sets us in doubt whether it is foreign in
Columbus. Columbus, however, die
I47

CITY OF COLOMBO
ock buildings, usually multi-storey ntly one-storey blocks in the Pettah; fith new-multi-floor intrusions in the patterns With different spatial associ
With Maradana or Slave Island) in those of the Town Hall, the General Several colleges, churches, dominate g. 5). Residences have spread along
and some of these areas feature as
en renewed with new multi-storeyed the Ceylon Insurance Block, Central ttah are demolished giving place to res. Due to functional devolution, prey blocks have appeared in the outer ids. The core is essentially multithe wholesale and retail business; the petty, Bambalapitiya, etc. mainly for mixed functions in contiguous blocks ose monotonous appearance is broken vernmental, educational and religious antly residential; in a marginal tract ast, certain dangerous and offensive predominantly residential suburbia.
hology of the city is the open spaces. ks, playgrounds, unbuilt Crown land
Northern Colombo is rather poorly ed by the Galle Face Green, Victoria mparatively poorly served. However, by the educational institutions, clubs inks, and privately or crown, owned , the city as a whole has a fair share of and circulation.
ow known as Colombo (Kolamba) derivation, perhaps after Christopher d not accept any exploratory assign


Page 152
UNIVERSITY OF
ment under the Portuguese towar name was after Kola-amba tree, (Ma as a navigational aid to sailing vessels logical explanation is consideredmeans a shallow bay with port fur setting of the original site, so that Sinhala rendering which shows a disi
Colombo city passed through and expansion as a Portuguese fortre of the maritime provinces, British today the port-capital of independe from a trading settlement to fortress, a fascinating Study for the histori settlement with bangasalas (retained a commercial role, had changed to the by ramparts, bastions, watch towel churches dominated the skyline. In buildings were transformed to Kant after Dutch style were constructed; f and the canal system, the Dutch left today. In British times, the urban these changes had an impact on soci dragged the people from the coun urban population increased. Till measure to the increase of populati was more stratified On a class basis t class of labourers, also referred to a workers (clerical servants) and an cutives, high governmental officer Sinhalese migration to Colombo wa the southern districts. Jaffna Tamil after 1920 and their area of settleme Tamils brought by the British for C port settled down near the port and P in the town partly explains the pool ditions in this district.
12. In Sidath Sangara, p. 16, Kolamba is ex explains "Kolamba as opposed to Diamba, a nam
within a ferry, but also to the ferry or port itself.'
13. A valuable collection of historical maps Vols. I & II. Colombo, 1951.

CEYLON REVIEW
is the East. An explanation that its ngifera indica) a tall leafy tree serving may also be set aside when the etymothat Kol-amba (opposite to Diyamba) |ctions. 12 This meaning fits well the ܐ܂ it may be more logical to accept this inct geographical flavour.
several stages, changes, reorganization is and "Royal city', Dutch fort-capital capital city for the entire island, and nt Lanka. Its changing morphology then to port and capital city is certainly cal geographer. 13 The Muslim port in name as Bankshall Street) signifying : Portuguese insulated Fort, surrounded as and moat, where the Portuguese Dutch Colombo, several Portuguese Dors; in the residential areas, mansions urther in several institutional buildings their impress easily recognisable even |-economic base was broadened, and ety. The operation of the pull forces tryside to the town and Colombo's [93O, migration contributed in large on. The emerging new community han caste. The city accommodated a S coolies, a large class of white collar Irban elite restricted to business exeS and the landed proprietors. The
s a continuous stream, especially from migration and settlement were mostly it was mainly Wellawatta. The Indian onstructional projects and work in the ettah. The growth of this community i quality housing and dilapidated con
plained as a ferry, port or haven. J. de Lanerolle e applying not merely to the area of shallow waters
is found in R. L. Brohier, Lands, Maps and Surveys.
І48


Page 153
THE PORT-CAPITAL C.
When the medical and sanitary
death rates of infants, mothers, adults a
the birth rates continued to be high.4 lation growth was more due to natural
The city has a population about density of 57 persons per acre. The O Fort and Pettah, although Small in si. than Io,OOO people in each. The large than 400 acres each, but the average de The pattern of population distribution San Sebastian, Kochchikade and Aluth Kotahena West, Grandpass, New Bazaa Island. The pattern tends to deconcen east and south of the wards mentioned pressure on the land (more than 2OO pe Kochchikade) has resulted in slum cc spread over nearly one-seventh of the total number about 62,446 households, less than 3 rooms in each unit. But, ti 8 persons per household. In the crowd per room exceeded 7 persons. A 2OO,OOO or two-fifths of the total substandard dwellings or slums.
The city's population is multi-cC 1majority group, Comprising about 47 p I3.5 per cent; Ceylon Tamils, 12.6 pel Indian Moors 4.5 per cent. The othe Europeans and Malays together account
feature is Communal segmentalization
flocking together”. Jaffna Tamils, foi Wellawatte, Indian Tamils in St. Paul' Island and several clusters of Colombo in Chetty Street, Malay town and Koc
14. After 1931, the birth rate rose to 46.2 per persons. Between 1946-1953, the birth rate fell to 3 to 10.3 per 1000 persons. The infantile mortality ra For details, see B. L. Panditaratna, "Colo. 1824-1953.' The Ceylon Geographer. Vol. 14, 19t
15. The distribution of slum areas as shown in a to the slum areas of the present townscape. In fact,
16. I personally prefer the term "community' i. to refer to these various (communal rather than racial
I49

ITY OF COLOMBO
services were well organized, the
ind old groups were depressed, while After 1930, Colombo city's popuincrease than immigration.
5 II, 74O in I963 giving an average ld settled areas, the wards encircling ze (under IOO acres) contain more st wards in the outer Zone are more Insity is below 3 o per acre. (Table 1) is heaviest in the wards of St. Paul's, kade; followed by a heavy zone in ar, Maligakanda, Wekanda and Slave trate and decrease towards the north, | above. The very high population er acre in St. Paul’s, Aluthkade and onditions and sub-standard housing total area of the city.15 Out of a about 77 per cent were Small, having he accommodation density exceeded ed areas, the accommodation density recent Survey indicated that about population Were accommodated in
mmunal. 16. The Sinhalese are the er cent, followed by Ceylon Moors, Cent; Indian Tamils, I2.5 per cent; r communities, Burghers, Eurasians, for nearly IO percent. An interesting , resembling the birds of a feather instance, form a distinct group in s and Pettah, Ceylon Moors in Slave Chettys, Malays and Cochin Tamils hchikade respectively.
1000 persons, but the death rate was 30 per 1000 0.7 per 1000 persons, but the death rate fell sharply te was also reduced to 78 per 1000 births. mbo City: Its Population Growth and Increase, 50, pp. 1-16. survey conducted in 1941 more or less correspond these are now more numerous and widespread.
instead of "race' as the former is more appropriate ) groups.


Page 154
UNIVERSITY OF
TAH
AREA, POPULAION AND DENSiTY OF COL
ИVards
MATTAKKULIYA
MODARA MAHAWATIA ALUTHMAWATHA LUNIUPOKUNIA BLOEMENDHAL KOTAHENA EAST KOTAHENA WEST KOCHCHIKADE NORTH GINTHUPITIYA (St. Paul’s) MASANGA SWEEDI YA NJE W BAZAAR GRAND PASS NORTH GRAND PASS SOUTH MALIGA WATTA \X/ES" ALUTHKADE EAST A JLT JTH KADE WEST KEHELWATTA KOCHCHIKADE SOUTH FORT KOMPANNAWEEDIYA WEKANDA HUNU PITIYA SujDUWELLA PANCHIKAWATIA MARADANA MALIGAKANDA MALIGAWATTA EAST DEMATAGODA WANATHAM ULLA KUPPY AWATTA EAST KUPPIYAW ATTA WEST BORELLA NORTH NARA HENPITA BoRELLA. SOUTH CINNAMON GARDENS KOLLUPITIYA
BAMBALAPITIΥΑ MILAGIRIYA TIMBRIGAS YAYA
KIIRULA HAVELOCK TOWN WELILAW ATTA NORTH KIRILLAPONE PAMANKADA FAST PAMANKADA WEST WELLAWATTA SOUTH
COLOMBO CITY
Area in
375. 162 230. 150 107. 27().
67.
75.
112. 245. 480. 140. 835. 205. 235. 245. 442. 432. 265. 262. 367. 195. 152. 162.
8,957.
Sources :-Computed from data obta
IS

CEY LON REVIEW
BLE I
OMBO CITY ACCORDING TO WARDS, 1963.
Acres Population Den sity per Acre
() 11,411 30.4 ལོ་ཡི།། 5. 11,146 68.6 - () 12.993 56.5 - () 12,266 81.8 5. 10,246 95.3 () 13,132 48.6 5 8.535 126.5 () 11,655 1554 5. 12,254 1692 5 11,227 236.4 () 10,025 17(). 6 5 9,74() 79.5 5 10,501 93.4 () 12,647 97.3 () 7,450 55.2 () 12,267 20-45 5 8,433 222.8
5 8,503 117.1 () 11, 153 223. 1
5 17,831 43.3
5 11,533 651 () 8,947 61.9 5 8.817 46.1
() Q,719 32.9 () 10,224 1859
5 9,316 179.2 5 9,203 216.5 () 11,150 769 () 11,223 7().2 () 10,592 84.7 () 9,442 85.8 5 8, 176 72.7 () 11, 175 45.6 () 1(), ()6() 21. () () 10,837 77.4
() 15,230 18.3
() 12,140 59.2 () 11,258 47.9 () 11,711 47.8
5 13,005 30.1
5 11,908 27.8 () 10,678 40.3
5 11,994 45.5
5 10,044 27.9 O 10,389 53.3 5 9,633 63.2 5 9,917 61.1
5 51 1,740 57.2
ined from the Colombo Municipality.
O


Page 155
THE PORT-CAPITAL C
Four major religions (Buddhism, their religious edifices, patterns of worsh diversity. The more prominent Budd watte, Maligakanda, Asokarama and I show the widespread distribution of th Ao per cent, and the overall importance uSually Celebrated in the city with por corations and pandals attracts large nu ations with Christian powers, the city ha about 22 per cent, the Roman Catholic churches with European architectural the spires of All Saints and St. Mars Church dominate the low Colombo Christianity in the city. The towering indication of the predominance of the l Similarly, Hindu kovils and temples temples, churches, mosques, minarets, oriental and Occidental architecture, scu of both, add variety to the form and aes
The sex composition of the popul males, a ratio of I54 males to IOO female menon in most Asiatic cities, caused classes into the city. Men who are ei convenient to leave their families in the rooms close to their places of work. is an excess of females over males in the but in the adult group (Is to 49 years) remarkable; in the old group, (over 5 literacy rate about 80 per cent is indicati facilities, opportunities for social contac city's work-force is predominantly m. I 3.7 per cent female. Majority of the are dependent on the 34 per cent gainfu
Aspects of Functional Geography
The port and capital city functions export-import functions channelled to both the economy of the city and the produce (tea, rubber, coconut produc
ISI
 

TY OF COLOMBO
Christianity, Islam and Hinduism) ip and festivities lend some cultural list temples of Vajirarama, Kuppiasipathanarama (to mention a few) he Buddhist population more than 3 of Buddhism in the city. Vesak mp and dignity, illuminations, dembers. Owing to historic associs a high concentration of Christians group being predominant. Several features, the dome of St. Lucia's, r’s and the imposing Wolfendhal skyline. Islam is even older than minarets of the mosques are a clear Muslim community in the vicinity. indicate Tamil pockets. Viharas, kovils and edifices characterizing lpture, paintings, or a combination sthetic aspects.
ation indicates a preponderance of S. This is a common Social phenoby the migration of the working mployed find it cheaper and more village, while they live in crowded On the basis of age structure, there lower age group, (under 14 years); the excess of males over females is D years) the ratio is even. A high ve of the availability of educational ts and employment prospects. The ale, some 86.3 per cent, and only total population about 66 per cent illy employed. (Table 2)
encompass the whole island. The through the port are fundamental ! island. The export of agricultural ts, cinnamon, citronella, arecanuts,


Page 156
UNIVERSITY OF
etc.) has created several commerci. processing, mixing, grading, packin imports of foodstuffs explain a sel fumigating, handling, sacking, bo tribution. Several port industries, Stevedoring, food chandling and se the export-import functions. Si insurance, banking and cargo han national and external cconomies.
T
(DCCUPATIONAL STRUCIU RE
Осснpation Total Pe Categories 1114inbers t
1. Services 69,282
2. Managerial, Administrative,
Clerical 34,892
3. Crafts and Production
processes 33,92)
4. Sales and related types 31,250
5. Transport 13,760
6. Profession and Technical 11,44)
7. Miscellaneous 4,563
8. Fishing and farming 3,440
9. Unspecified 2,450
10. Quarrying 46
TOHAL 204,843
Sources : Sampling Survey for 1.
necessary adjustments.
 

CEY LON REVIEW
1 and industrial firms engaged in the ; of the produce for export. Similarly,
of activities associated with treating, ttling, storing, warehousing and dismarine cngineering, repair, bunkering, Veral service industries are tied up with pecialized services, those of shipping, ling link the port in respect of both
ARTE 2
IN COLOMBO CITY 1963
"centage Total Mei 1 Total I Ионне11 o the titlinber of percentage number of percentage total Mefi И”онисti
33.6 55,386 8(). 1 13,896 19.9
17.1 32,433 92.6 2,459 74
16.6 31,033 91.2 2,887 8.8
15.1 28,812 96.7 2,438 3.3
7.0 13,285 94. () 475 6.0
5.8 8,064 66.6 3,376 33.4
2.0 3,583 78.6 98() 21:4
1.6 3,110 94.6 330 5.4
1.1 1,496 60.0 754 40. ()
- 26 - 20 -
100 177,228 86.3 27,615 53.7
63 based on Survey of Occupations in 1953 with
52


Page 157
THE PORT-CAPITAL C.
Wholesaling of imported goods ( luxury goods) has been either by the go Department, Cooperative Wholesale Wholesaling and retailing functions acco logical features. Fort, with multi-stor of department stores; Pettah, predomi business area exemplifying a mosaic of sh goods area is localized along the Skir segment, while the Darley Road-Uni engineering and motor car firins. Til Borella, Bambalapitiya, Wella watta Jun Surrounded by retail units and satellites retail units are intermixed with instit Colombo's functional dominance as the c goods is yet unchallenged. Perhaps, de and Trincomalee may effect certain fu ports are developed and facilities made a
The growth of many industries pri marine engineering and repair, boat buil imports machinery and equipment an assembly business, repair and maintenan shop for the entire island. Being a den orientated light consumer industries h; ment policy of restricting imports, imp and extending its patronage has reacti trial growth especially in the city. In industries, those of electricity, gas, wat munication services broadbase the indust superior internal accessibility, its exteri (electricity) and other essentials (gas, w; services (banking, insurance, marketing capital and market, (city, commuting existing growth momentum, and speci of sites within the city, all explain why continue to be the industrial hub of Cey
18. B., L. Panditaratna, “The Trend of Indust Ceylon Pakistan Geographical Review, Vol. 20, No
IS3 ܢܬܼܵܐ.

ITY OF COLOMBO
foodstuffs, textiles, machinery and vernment sponsored agencies (Food Establishment) or private firms. unt for certain interesting morphoey blocks, has become the centre nantly one-storey, the chief retail nop sizes and types. The hardware liner's Road-Panchikawatta Road on Place areas teem with general 1e secondary retail centres are at ctions, where the market square is tores. Along other thoroughfares, tutional and residential functions. chief distributing centre of imported volution of port functions to Galle inctional changes when these two vailable for business and commerce.
ocessing agricultural raw materials, lding is port orientated. Colombo d has become also the venue of ce and in fact, the industrial worksely populated city, many marketave evolved. The recent Governosing prohibitive tariffs, giving aid vated and stimulated a rapid indusaddition, the facilitative group of er, internal transport and telecomrial structure of the city. Colombo's hal focality, availability of power, ater), concentration of institutional etc.), availability of labour supply, areas, and even the whole island) ally personal choice and preference Colombo was in the past and will "lon. Is
rialisation in Colombo City: the Capital of . 2, July, 1965. pp. 143-155.


Page 158
UNIVERSITY OF
As the capital city, it is the ch ment, Senate, Queen’s House, Symb All the head offices of governme About 40 per cent of these offices are Road, Torrington Square and Bari centration of governmental offices shifting some departments to N: monetary and police affairs Colomb health, civic affairs, recreational an the apex, if a hierarchy based on SI look forward to Colombo to procu where. As a service celitre with superior capacity to cater to heterog its influences are extensive indeed at
The port-city functional impac muting pattern involving some 200 by bicycle, bus and railway are th bicycle circuit extends to about 5 to , about 20 to 24 miles around the cit mobility are served with double-d frequency, as for instance in Fortand Pettah-Jaela areas. Express t of commuting numbers from these
Trends in Planning
The fact that one-eighth of the and that the reclamation of these control measures deserves primary and Hood controlarelegion, butimpl coming. Perhaps, a flood evokes coi such schemes, but as the flood subsi of the civic authorities. Proposals control should have precedence a Central Government, Colombo N units.
19. B. L. Panditaratna, 'Urban Field of pp. 26-36.
20. Ceylon Sessional Paper, XXI-1957.

CEYLON REVIEW
lief administrative centre. The Parliaols of sovereign power are located here. ntal departments are centralized here. localized in the Fort, some at McCallum nes Place. A measure towards deconin the Fort has been carried out in arahenpita. In legal, fiscal, financial, o's dominance is unique. In education, d cultural pursuits, Colombo occupies ach criteria is to be set up. Ceylonese ire the best and those not available elsea wide range of goods, possessing a encous and complex consumer demands, ld felt throughout the island.
ct on its region is best seen in the com-23O,OOO people daily.19 Commuting he three important modes. While the 7 miles, the bus and railway serve a region Iy. Internal zones with high passenger ecker buses with a constant and quick -Mount Lavinia, Pettah—Maharagama, bus and railway services are indicative respective localities.
surface is subject to periodic inundation areas is tied up with the Kelani flood Consideration. Studies on Kelani Ganga lementation of schemes has not beenforthinment about the necessity to implement des, so the enthusiasm and the interests for reclamation20 together with flood ind merit the collective study of the Vunicipality and the surrounding local
Colombo". The Ceylon Geographer, Vol. 16, 1962,
I54


Page 159
THE PORT-CAPITAL
Internal reorganisation and terr mena. Colombo is an old city. Th. which are congested, slum-like and she These areas have to be renewed or rect and hygienically suitable. In recent improvised shed type have sprung bodies, recreational spaces, thorough the health of the city. Radical meth condemned on humanitarian ground different matters. Slum clearance is town planning point of view.
Population growth and increase responsible for spiralling up land valu vertical building or horizontal expa values range between 4-6 million ru even ten or more storeys characterizin Even in the Pettah, where the values acre, two and three story blocks pee roof surfaces. In the intermediate flats have replaced some of the deca Multi-storey flats may be one of the housing in these areas. But, high flo or hygienically feasible where overc. rent owing to high land values and income groups from renting them. hand may not only dislike this reside high floor compact residential apartn gardens, lawns and even tennis court and suburban areas.
Residences have spread along t with urban utilities and amenities and in the southandeast, insuch areas as Moi extending as far as Maharagama and in the direction of Peliyagoda, Kela new residential areas show a planne along the major thoroughfares or the
21. B. L. Panditaratna, ''A Critical Review Some Trends in Planning.' The Ceylon Journal c pp. 111-123.
 

CITY OF COLOMBO
torial extension are related phenoare are certain areas around the port w features of obsolescence and decay. instructed to make them look pleasant imes, slums of a different type, the p like mushrooms along the water fares and crown land endangering ds to eradicate this blight may be i. But, planning and sympathy are one of the biggest problems from a
and competing urban land uses are les within the city resulting in either ision. In the Fort, where the land pees per acre, multi-storey blocks of g a new skyline seem to be inevitable. are between T — 4 million rupees per r out high above the low accordant mixed zone, multi-storey residential dent and obsolete no-storey blocks. ways to relieve the acute shortage of or residences are not quite practicable rowding is common. Besides, high cost of building would bar the low The high income groups on the other ntial district, but also may not prefer lents when spacious bungalows with can be rented or leased in the outer
he circulatory systems accompanied growth of civic institutions especially atuwa, Nugegoda, Rajagiriya, Nawala Homagama, and to a limited extent niya, Wattala and Mabole.21 These layout in blocks of 20-40 perches newly opened approach roads.
f Plans for the Development of Colombo City and Historical and Social Studies. Vol. 6, No. 2, 1963.


Page 160
UNIVERSITY OF
Colombo city has outgrown it trial sites, one at Ratmalana to the sc workshops, factories, stores and go Colombo region. Planning of Col. a larger region (termed differently as or 'Colombo Conurbation).
The Abercrombie-Weerasinghe were conceived and rendered in th: the main directional trends for the C duly amended by the Central Planni two fold. First, Zoning to stabilize and provide incentives towards fur would offer to property owners. urban, satellite town and rural areas, may be regulated. For instance, st semi-urban zones and in the neighbo zard building development may be amenities of the countryside need to restrictive measures are urgent to elin
Second, decentralization of in functions to thc satellite towns (Ragan trend in turn would reactivate the growth of other satellite towns.
The garden city idea, (proposed forgotten or neglected in planning localized in the Fort and Pettah only, lake, race course, golf links, unbuilt c served in the intermediate and outer outer zone have retained their fron suburbs, residences (mostly cottages plots) show an orderly layout with every sense a garden city.
The harbour and port areas a with developments in technology a
22. P. Abercrombie and O. Weerasinghe, The
Also see, "An Outline Planning Scheme Department of Town and Country Planning, Colo
• I.

CEYLON REVIEW
municipal boundaries. New indusluth and another at Jaela to the north, sernmental offices are located in the ymbo city should necessarily consider Greater Colombo', 'Colombo Region'
planning proposals22 for Colombo s regional context. These constitute evelopment of Colombo and Region ng Commission. The essentials were the existing character of the district her improvement by the security it By regional zoning into urban, semi(Fig. 6) the use of land in each zone raggling growth taking place in the urhood of the new towns and hapha: prevented. In the rural zone, the be preserved. In the urban zones, ninate nonconforming uses.
stitutional, industrial and residential na, Ratmalana and Homagama). This urbanization of the Region and the
by Geddes) however, is not altogether the city. Since block buildings are open spaces such as parks, playgrounds, rown land and marshy lands are prezones, the residential districts of the ; and rear gardens, and even in the with 3-5 living rooms in individual ample gardens, Colombo city is in
e likely to change to keep abreast ld catering to the needs of modern
Colombo Regional Plan. Colombo, 1947.
r the Regional Development Area of Colombo.' mbo, 1957. (un published).
5


Page 161
THE PORT-CAPITAL (
 

CITY OF COLOMBO
初1 COLOMBO REGIowal PLAN
ہے جنکس سسلم
O 车汽1LEs
& ኮኔ N8\
URBAN Z o NE S E M | U R B A N ZO N E SAT E LLIT E TOWN
R U RAL ZO NEEXPANDED Tow N - O U S N G E STATE ROADs


Page 162
UNIVERSITY OF
shipping. These plans, although inc Port Commission, should be correl: for city development executed by Department of Town and Countr bound to set chain reactions and r growth of the city. City planning measures so conducive to the port's beneficial.
The port-capital city functions. linked up effectively maintaining is tions of port-city growth reveal fa the economy of Ceylon.
Co
The future growth of the city c building and (c) horizontal spread to
The marginal surfaces below 4. which are subject to floods, could operations should be carried out in C and surface drainage.
Competition for space is acute centralization, access and availability possible way to provide for space. C monotonous when compared with Multi-storey buildings should replace the Fort. Broader access roads and vertical building. The trend of ver (for instance, Galle Road) should be
In the less built-up areas of Me and Kirula, the absence of a sewerage spread. The development plan sho of water service and sewerage to th order to effect an even distribution o

CEYLON REVIEW
ependently executed by the Colonbo ted and co-ordinated with those plans the Colombo Municipality and the y Planning. Port improvements are apercussions in functional and spatial should necessarily accommodate these functional efficiency and are mutually
although so diverse and varied, are landwide relationships. The fluctuairly well the condition and state of
inclusion
lepends on (a) reclamation, (b) vertical wards the suburban townships.
feet, and some areas between 5-9 feet be reclaimed, and utilized. But these onjunction with those of flood control
at the core because of its functional I. Vertical building here is the only Dolombo's skyline is relatively low and the other South-east Asian port-cities.
the low four of five-storey blocks in parking for vehicles should accompany tical building along the major arteries incouraged.
dampitiya, Mattakkuliya, Kirillapone, : Scheme is an obstacle to the building uld give priority for the provisioning nese unsewered areas of the city, in fpopulation and building densities.
58


Page 163
THE PORT-CAPITAL
The city's population is increasin increase is the main factor. The incr working, and the low-middle, class. gestion is thus intensified. There is planning and restriction. But, even time to implement such a programm upper-middle class group is numeric. Their influx inflates the accommoda of the already congested slums.
The population increase, conse of housing should be resolved withi region. Further, the problems of in lution, dormitory suburbs, satellite should fall within the scope of an i Colombo Region. But, the city re; into local administrative areas. The nation between these various local co rity is thus very necessary to impleme ensure coordinated growth and devel
 

CITY OF COLOMBO
g about IO,OOO for every year. Natural eases, however, are mostly among the The problem of accommodation cononly one solution: a policy of family in an urban setting, it would take some e to yield results. Immigration of the illy small, but of the rural rustic large. tion density and the occupancy rates
quent congestion and acute shortage in a broader regional setting: the city dustrial location, administrative devotowns, new roads and transport, all integrated developmental plan for the gion (Colombo Region) is divided up re is very little cooperation or coordiuncils. A Colombo Regional Authont the proposals of a regional plan and lopment of the Colombo Region.
B. L. PANDITARATNA.
I59


Page 164
Revie WS
South India and Ceylon: By K. tures I958-1959). University of Madra
THE Subject chosen by Professor K. K. Pillay foi ment is one of absorbing interest. The problems wh historian of South and South East Asia and, to the hist and interest. Needless to say that a proper evaluati for a sound knowledge and understanding of the hist For the most part we cannot quarrel with Professo history, but the history of Ceylon is certainly not his sources of Ceylon history and leans heavily on sect acceptable. This leads the author into very serious his enquiry and collclusions.
At the outset one is given the impression that th India for he explains that " South India here is used to to the south of the Vindhyas' (P.1, f.i.1). This Professor Pillay concentrates on the region to the sou blem of political relations, a more comprehensive the Deccan dynasties such as the Rastraktitas and Ca that Ceylon is not only the Jaffna peninsula. Deali and institutions of Ceylon (Chapter XI), he concent rest of the country is ignored.
The book bristles with inaccurate statements of belong to the group of people known as the Vädd. Vanniyars are quite distinct from the Väddas and no them do. Then again it is stated that the mother of (p. 22). There is no such statement in any of the acc book introduces us to an elder brother of Dutthagal younger brother, is a well known fact.
It is indeed regrettable that Professor Pillay has source books he so often quotes. Doubtful interp The Mahavarihsa is quoted as authority for the staten near Ramesvaram (p. 38). Cullodara, according to the inana mountain. Its identification with Kandannada. Mahavamsa. It is totally incorrect to attribute to 1 converted to the Saiva faith, and that his daughter w
The author's attempts at quoting from original ludicrous turn when the Rajavaliya is mentioned as a of Pattini Dewey, the arms of the four gods and the p during the time of the former king' (p. 42). The t makes it quite clear that the quotation is taken from conversant with either Sinhalese or Sanskrit terms text or translation both of which are mentioned in th in a foot note as Rajavali p. 231. No such page nun
The University History of Ceylon has no doubt
Even while leaning heavily on it, he has made certain These could have been avoided if the text was read
ʼ I6(

K. Pillay (Sir William Meyer LecS, I963, pp. xv+2OO, Price Rs. 8.OO.
his lectures under the Sir William Meyer Endowich revolveround itare of great significance to the orian of Ceylon they are of exceptional importance on of South India's connections with Ceylon calls Iory both of South India as well as that of Ceylon. r Pillay regarding his knowledge of South Indian forte. He displays a sad lack of knowledge of the Indary works, some of which are historically not nisunderstanding, greatly reducing the value of
e author hopes to deal with Ceylon and peninsular } denote the whole of peninsular India or the region however is soon forgotten and for the main part ath of the Krishna river. With regard to the proSurvey should include Ceylon's connections with lukyas. At times the author even appears to forget ng with South Indian influences on the social life rates on the social history of Jaffna alone, and the
fact. For instance we are told that the Vanniyars as and that they are Tamil speaking (p. 13). The tall the Vanniyars speak Tamil, although some of Dutthagamani was the daughter of a Naga king repted sources of Ceylon history. Page 45 of this mani, presumably Saddha Tissa. That he was the
made no attempt to familiarise himself with the retations are sometimes attributed to the source. ent that Cullodara was the ruler of Kandamadanainn * Mahavarnsa, was the ruler of the Kannavaddhanam near Rāmes varam cannot be atributed to the he Nikaya Sangrahaya the story that Sena I was as cured of her dumbness by an ascetic (p. 57).
Sources which he has never seen takes an almost 1thority for the following:-" the foot ornaments itra Lawtoo of Buddhil wihch had been taken away se of the word deuvey for devi and lavtoo for dhatu a secondary work by an author who is not very and certainly not from Mudaliyar Gunasekara's e bibliography. Incidentally the reference is given ber-occurs in the texts given in the bibliography.
been a useful source of information to the author.
glaring mistakes which are certainly unpardonable. with adequate care. On page 46 of his book, Pro


Page 165
REVI]
fessor Pillay tells us that the personal name of Nai Abhaya. This is clearly a mistake made due to th History of Ceylon which reads thus :- "This samani, whose personal name was Abhaya' (p. name Abhaya is a well known fact. Even worse is A.D. at Nagarjunikonda mentions" the dedicatio p. 51). The relevant section of the University
iyaghara to the fraternities of Tambapanni dip: ressor Pillay should have known better. The Ceti a subsequent chapter however the author refers to ghara to the fraternities of Tambapalli dipa,' but assigned to the second century B.C. This is hardl
Throughout his work, the author has devoted her relations with South India. This enquiry ho A very fanciful reconstruction of the carly history on C. Rasanayagan's book on Ancient Jaffna. P there were very early Tamil settlements in North C Pandya empires with Ceylon have been dealt with been supplied. However we cannot say that this v period. Adequate attention has not been paid to S of Ceylon.
On the whole the author is carried away by th Culture was very strongly felt in Ceylon. This p) spective. The close ties between Ceylon and the 1 lution in Ceylon itself is an idea practically never that this work inherits the serious attention of schol:
A few lapses are noticed in the foot notes. P to 81. The correct reference should have been J foot note 6 is given as Mhv. i. Nothing can be in
A map is almost a sine qua non in a book whe modern, occur so frequently. A map of South I purpOSe.
A Short Guide to English Style, Book Society, and Oxford Universit.
Mr. Warner manages his material deftly, writ English' that it is part of the purpose of this book nodest terms :
" Part One contains practical advice ( sketches in broad outline the developmen as a language. ... I have tried to keep in m for whom English is not the mother to style are similar the world over. So that this book helpful too.” (pp. v., vi).
It would be a pity, however, if this book we teachers of English. It is a good handbook-it tell report-but it is also more than that. To quote Mr a thing.' " Saying ' is, as Mr. Warner points out, -it is a matter of the whole process of thought. M a useful piece of creative criticism. He compels rev words are used in the world of print that now surr
 

EVXVS
dimitta (one of Dutthagamani's Commanders) was e misunderstanding of a sentence in the University s Nandinitta, the Chief Commander of Duttha155). That King Dutthagamani had the personal the statement that an inscription of the third century of a Cetiyaghara in Tambapanni dipa (Ceylon) ' History of Ceylon reads:- " the dedication of a ” (p. 17). This being a South Indian record, Proyaghara was in South India and not in Ceylon. In the correct position-" the dedication of a Cetiyaonce again he is so utterly careless that the record is
scholarship !
a great deal of attention to the history of Jaffna and wever, has not always been made on scientific lines. f Jaffna has been attempted, this being largely based rofessor Pillay has not substantiated his claim that Deylon. The relations between the Cola and Second in a rational manner and a fair amount of detail has work has in any way added to our knowledge of the outh India's connections with the Kalinga monarchs
2 idea that the impact of South Indian Society and roblem has not been placed in proper historical per'est of India are hardly considered and cultural evo2ntertained. In a final appraisal we cannot concede 1S.
lage 15, foot note 6 reads R. A.S. vol. XXI Nos. 61 RAS (Ceylon Branch) No. 61. p. 81. At page 38 hade of this.
re a large number of place names, both ancient and India and Ceylon would have served a very useful
SIRIMA KIRIBA MUNE
by Alan Warner, English Language y Press, 1964, Rs. 2.8O.
ing in a style that is a fine example of the "clean to recommend. He describes his aims in very
on the writing of clean and clear English. Part two it of English prose style since English was first used ind the special needs and difficulties of those students gue. . . . . I believe that the problems of English
I hope students in England and America will find
re taken to be a mere handbook for students and s you how not to begin an essay or how to phrase a ... Warner's epigraph, " All the fun's in how you say much more than a matter of "putting in the style ' (r. Warner" says to some purpose for he achieves aluation of the way we use words, " and of the way punds us all.” (p. vi).
6I.


Page 166
UNIVERSITY OF
His own use of words is admirable. Look at h cackle–Don't mix your drinks–etc.’ or look at t
* All writers of English, even those without the keep their English as clean as they can. Words a and dirty, and lose their sharp points and cutting cd Man needs language for the control of his enviror control.... It is our duty to civilization to keep out
It is in this spirit that Mr. Warner puts our sensi unwillingness to suffer such follies as vagueness an against more dangerous vices, such as officialese, ev by offering us the choice between " Expectoratio 1nature of his concern for civilization is suggested by
(1) that the first sentence is longer and yet le effective (many members of the public mig
(2) that " It has a gloonly, negative tone. Th
human.'
It is very frequently that Mr. Warner reveals an efficiency and precision.
But his first concern is for efficiency of utteran and individual thought and order goes to pot.” Starting from the acute analysis of carefully chosene on the Way to Writing..
* English that is clear and vigorous, free job of conveying meaning cleanly to the re
He is not interested in prettiness or even in offerin valuable principle quite early in the book:
* It is easy enough to write 'Please do not that we can make all our statements and dire
(p. 14)
A man so little enslaved by " technic has no c over-rate his own teaching. He devotes his epilog
with decision that
"The power of writing creatively is (p. 191). . . . It is better to be dirty and alive
This said, he can afford to conclude with
"... we cannot all have distinctive pers try to keep our pens clean and sharp.. T will all writers breathe. If we clear away prefabricated phrases, we shall see better n also the colours of the spectrum and the rai
One of the virtues of this book is its wide range Two, the historical section of the book. Even of t comprehensive that it will be a standing temptation are even more interesting, for they seem to cover the essays of African students to James Joyce's Ulysses. dygook, extracts from a political manifesto, and son Writing in English,
It strikes the present reviewer as distinctly odd accurate title. It should surely have been called “A
62

CEYLON REVIEW
is chapter headings-" Please do not spit-Cut the his :
faintest trace of literary ambition, should try to re the tools of thought. If they become rusty ges, thinking itself becomes less keen and efficient. ment, and the cleaner his language the better his language as clean and sharp as we can.” (p. 7).
bilities to the whetstone. He develops in us a new it superfluity, and puts us thoroughly on the alert asion, or double-talk. He gets off to a good start is forbidden and " Please do not spit.' The two of his comments on these sentencesss inclusive (onnitting the ' please"), and also less ht not understand the Latinisim “ ekpectoration ”);
e other version is more polite and altogether more
interest in the altogether human, and not only in
ce, for without it " the whole machinery of social (p. 7. quoting from Pound's The Art of Reading.) Examples, Mr. Warner works at putting his readers
from verbiage and affectations, and doing its ader.” (p. 7)
g formulae for catching the eye. He sets down a
Spit, but it is only by hard and clear thinking "ctions as clean and simple and pointed as this onc.'
lifficulty in seeing and avoiding the temptation to que to “ the limits of clean English,” and he says
a greater gift than the power of Writing cleanly : than clean and dead.” (p. 192)
onalities that will shape our styles, but we can all he cleaner the environment of language the easier the Smog of euphemisms and officialese and inert ot only the plain daylight of common sense but inbow.” (p. 192).
: of examples. This is only to be expected in Part his section it has to be said that it is so concisely to our lazier students. But Parts One and Three 2 whole gamut of modern English prose, from the Chere are examples of scientific jargon and gobblethe very fine samples of modern Asian and African
that so excellent a book should have a rather inShort Guide to English Prose Style.'
A. H.


Page 167
REVIE
The Population Crisis and the Use C Mudd. Dr. W. Junk Publications—The 13 figures. Price Dutch Guilders 35.
THIS book consists of a Collection of articles by st strators and economists on the current population at articles contributed, such as Bertrand Russc's “ Po, The impending Crisis or Radhakrishnan's addres purely appeals by these enlinent figures for an inned lation, whilst sonne of the other articles included it nothing more than descriptions of the International programmes. Thus quite a number of the papers when they are taken in the context of the subjct whic for this rather pedestrian fare the Volume provides a
Stycos in “Problems of Fertility control in under-de current theories regarding the factors which affect fel an incorrect analysis of such factors can lead to the tal fertility levels. Thus referring to the fact that “a 1. in the West Indies leads the middle classes to make : ligious leaders and social reformers appear to view in out the female population. The young are therefo paternity and high fertility. In point of fact, nostill or consensual unions rather than of promiscuity. connended, there is good reason to believe that thei would be changing from transitory relationships to 1
The importance of the correct analysis of the facto emphasized if action programmes to curtail fertility the employment of Women in rural weaving centre women factory Workers in the cities-is it the mere place of residence, or the effect of all these factors wi
The Volume also contains an interesting articl Population Growth a topic which has not attracted to not only the under-developed countries but also It also contains some interesting papers which are de policies in Japan, China and the U.A.R.
Ι03
 

VXVS
f World Resources-Edited by Stuart : Hague-1964; pp. XX, and 563 with
ates inlan, demographers, Family Planning Adminild resource situation in the world. Many of the pulation Pressure and War , Sir Julian Huxley's s to the Family Planning Association of India are iate programme of action to control world popuin a section entitled Action Programmes contain Agencies in the field of family planning and their included in the Volume are not very interesting h was to have been discussed but as compensation few stimulating and informative essays. Mayone :veloped Areas' makes an able summation of the tility levels in under-developed areas and how far king of wrong policy decisions in efforts to curtail arge proportion of children are born illegetimate a causal connection with high fertility rates. Reales as casting their seeds indiscriminately through bre exhorted to marry as a curb to irresponsible Elegitimate births are the produce of common-law Moreover, if the young enter legal unions as rer fertility would show marked increases since they more permanent ones.'
ors leading to high fertility patterns cannot be over
levels are to be successful. Thus in Ceylon will s lead to a fall in fertility levels as in the case of act of employment, the type of employment, the nich influences fertility levels.
e by Joseph J. Spengler on “ The Economics of the interest justified by its importance with regard to some of the stagnating economies of the west. voted to describing current population trends and
S. A. MEEGAMA


Page 168



Page 169



Page 170
Printed at the Ceylon University Press, Colombo 3. and published by K. D. Scimadasa, El
 

by R. L. de Alwis, Printer to the University, brarian, University of Ceylon.